Full text of "A grammar of the Somali language with examples in prose and verse and an account of the Yibir and Midgan dialects"

See other formats

»f

?co

!CT>
?00

■CD

llill

Hil

JHili
BHUi

■Mve
IRiHI

fflm

QMS

f«

A GRAMMAR

OF THE

SOMALI LANGUAGE

CAMBKIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,

C. F. CLAY, Manager.

fLonUon: AVE MARIA LANE, E.C.

©laBuoto: 50, WELLINGTON STREET.

TLtijjjifl: F. A. BROCKHAUS.

fleto gorfe: THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.

Bombas ant) Calcutta: MACMILLAN AND CO., Ltd.

A GRAMMAR

OF THE

SOMALI LANGUAGE

WITH EXAMPLES

PROSE AND VERSE

AND AN ACCOUNT OF THE

YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS

J. W. C. KIRK, B.A.,

KING'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE,

LIEUTENANT, DUKE OF CORNWALL'S LIGHT INFANTRY,

AND 6TH (SOMALILAND) BATTALION, KING'S AFRICAN RIFLES

CAMBRIDGE

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1905

'JOS'

Qtantbrftge :

PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A.
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS.

S.B.N. — GB: 576.11490.1

Republished in 1969 by Gregg International Publishers Limited
Westmead, Farnborough, Hants., England

Printed in Holland

PREFACE.

ri^HERE are but few people who have made any serious study
J- of the many and interesting tongues of that part of the African
Continent in which the Somali race has grown up. Our knowledge
of the Somali language is due to the labours of Rigby, Hunter, and
Larajasse and Sampont. As this is not a written language, great
praise is due to those who first grappled with the difficulty of
reducing the speech to writing This has now been done so satis-
factorily that I myself have lately carried on a successful corre-
spondence with an educated Somali in his native tongue, using the
spelling and orthography of the present book. Schleicher's work is
rather a philological treatise on the language, gathered largely from
isolated individuals of the people, and not from practical acquaintance
with the race in their own country ; but he is to be congratulated
on having collected a number of stories which are a useful and
important foundation to a Somali literature. Paulitschke's work is
a purely comparative treatise on the three dialects, Somali, Gala,
and Danakil, written from an ethnological point of view.

While serving with Somali troops during the campaigns of 1902
-1904 against the Mullah, Mohammed Abdallah, I had the most
favourable opportunities for a practical and wholesale study of the
colloquial dialect of this people ; and it seemed only right that
results obtained from so intimate an acquaintance should not be
left unrecorded, in spite of the many imperfections which must still
exist in the record. The work done by others hitherto has been
largely confined to the coast and to the mixed population which
assembles at the sea-port towns; and it is but recently that any
strangers except a few sportsmen have been able to dwell in the
interior, and so to know and converse with the natives in their own
homes and natural surroundings. The result is that it has now

VI PREFACE

been possible to correct and add to our knowledge, hitherto incom-
plete, on certain grammatical points, and to give their proper
value to certain variations of speech. I refer especially to such
peculiarities of the language as the Syntax of the Suffixes, Particles,
Verbs, Concord of Nouns, and Compound Sentences. It is generally
found to follow very clear and defined, though unwritten, rules,
which are disturbed by very few exceptions.

In regard to Orthography, where I have differed from Schleicher
and from Larajasse and Sampont, I have given the latters' corre-
sponding signs in the Alphabet. In the spelling of words I have in
most cases (subject to the orthographical variations) followed that
used by Larajasse in his Dictionary, which leaves little room for
improvement or addition. This book is indispensable to the student
of Somali, or to anyone who wishes to examine the stories and songs
given by Schleicher or myself. I have therefore not included a
vocabulary, as such are necessarily deficient and frequently mis-
leading.

In 1903 I published a small practical hand-book, Notes on the
Somali Language, but this was written on lines totally different
from those of the present Grammar. It was a compilation of notes
which I had found useful to myself, and was intended to serve as
an elementary guide to beginners, who had not the time to digest a
more lengthy work. The orthography, the spelling, and the few
grammatical rules, have since been entirely revised and corrected.

I desire to express my grateful appreciation of the assistance
rendered me by Mr H. J. Edwards, Fellow and Assistant Tutor of
Peterhouse, Cambridge, and by Mr R. R. Marett, Fellow and Tutor
of Exeter College, Oxford, in revising the whole of the present work,
in manuscript and proof : Professor E. G. Browne kindly suggested
some improvements in the Introduction. I acknowledge with
gratitude and admiration the promptness shown by the officials and
staff of the Cambridge University Press, in completing against time
a work involving unusual difficulties of composition and proof-
reading.

J. W. C. K.

Sevenoaks,

December, 1904.

CONTENTS.

PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY.

The Alphabet
Vowels

Diphthongs ...
Vowel changes
Consonants ...

PAGE

1
2
4
5
6

PART II. ACCIDENCE.

THE PARTS OF SPEECH
A. Substantives ...

1. Classes of Nouns

2. Gender of Nouns

3. The Suffixes

(a) Linking Consonants

(6) Definite Article

(d) Possessive Pronominal Adjectives

(e) Interrogative Adjective

4. Plural of Nouns

5. Cases of Nouns

6. Numerals

7. Pronouns

(a) Simple Personal Pronouns ...
(6) Possessive „

(d) Relative „

(e) -Interrogative „
(/) Indefinite „

12
12
15
16

17
18
19
20
21

22
25
27
29
29
32
33
33
33
34

CONTENTS

B. Adjectives

I).

1. Classes of Adjectives

(«) Radical

(b) Derivative

2. Inflexions of Adjectives

(a) Radical

(b) Derivative

Comparison of Adjectives

3
Verbs

1. Conjugation

(a) Moods and Tenses ...

(b) Affirmative Conjugation

(d) Interrogative „

(e) Negative-Interrogative Conjugation

2. Peculiarities and Irregular Verbs

(a) 1st Conjugation

Irreg. Verb, oil
(6) 2nd Conjugation ....

Irreg. Verbs, imo, ogho, oclo
(c) 3rd Conjugation
(rf) Irreg. Verbs, aho, laho, wah
(e) The Passive Voice ...

3. Derivative Verbs

(a) Intensive

(6) Reflexive

(d) Causative

Particles

1. Verbal

(a) Adverbial

(b) Prepositional

2. Conjunctive

(a) Introductory

(b) Conjunctive

Adverbs, Prepositions, and Conjunctions
Interjections, and Salutations

CONTENTS

PART III. SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES.

A Structure of a Simple Sentence

1. Order of Words

2. The Particles wa, ba, ya

3. Simple Interrogative and Negative Sentences

4. Verbs of Existence

B. The Parts of Speech

1. The Article

2. The Noun

(a) Cases

(b) Number

3. The Adjective

(a) Order

(b) Comparison

4. The Numerals

5. The Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives

(a) Persons

(b) Simple Personal Pronouns

(d) Impersonal Pronouns

(e) Possessive Adjective

(/) Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives

(g) Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives

6. The Verb

(a) Moods and Tenses

(b) Persons

7. The Particles

(a) Order

(6) Uses

(d) Prepositional „

PAGE
81

82
86
88

101

102

103

106

107

108

109

111

114

115

117
117
117
118
119

PART IV. SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES.

A. Co-ordinate Sentences

Conjunctive Particles

B. Subordinate Sentences

1. General rules ...

123
123
124
125

CONTENTS

PAGE

Adjectival Sentences

125

Adverbial „

127

(a) Temporal and Locative

127

(b) Final

128

129

(d) Causal

130

(e) Concessive

131

Substantival Sentences

131

(a) Subjective

131

(6) Objective

132

Oratio Obliqua

133

Appendix

I. Seasons, months, days

134

II. Money, weights, measures

136

III. Tribes and Sub-tribes

138

EXAMPLES OF PROSE AND VERSE.

Part I. Somali Stories, and Narrative 141

„ II. Translations of the Stories 160

„ III. Somali Songs (with translations) 170

THE DIALECTS OF THE OUTCAST TRIBES,
MIDGAN AND YIBIR.

Account of the two tribes

Observations on the Dialects

3. Examples of the Dialects :

Midgan sentences ...

Yibir sentences

Yibir story of Mohammed Hanif

4. Vocabularies :

Yibir-Bnglish and Midgan-English

Comparative vocabulary, English — Somali — Yibir — Midgan

Index

184
185

191
192
197

200
207
215

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Rigbt, Lieut. C. P., "On the Somauli Language"; Transactions of the
Bombay Geographical Society, VoL ix, 1849.

Hunter, Capt. F. M., A Grammar of the Somali Language ; Bombay, 1880.

Cust, R., The Modern Languages of Africa ; London, Triibner & Co., 1883.

Schleicher, A. W., Die Somali-Sprache ; Berlin, 1892.

Paulitschke, Dr Philipp, Ethnographie Nordost-Afrikas ; Berlin, 1896.

Larajasse and Sampont, Practical Grammar of the Somali Language ;
London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co., 1897.

Larajasse, Somali-English and English-Somali Dictionary ; London, Kegan
Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co., 1897.

Schleicher, Dr A. W., Somali-Texte (edited by Leo Reinisch); Vienna
and Leipzig, 1900.

These are the most important works upon the language, though other
writers are also quoted by Paulitschke.

ERRATUM.

§ 15 (b). for warm, warming read warn, warning.

INTRODUCTION.

Somali is the language spoken by the inhabitants of the square
tract of country, known as the Horn of Africa (Regio Aromatifera
of the ancients), which lies between the French port of Djibouti,
Cape Guardafui and the river Juba. This country was formerly
inhabited by a people, now known as Gala1, who have been steadily
driven inland by Mohammedan propagandists, who call themselves
Somali. The neighbours of the Somali are the Danakil on the
north, the Abyssinians, speaking Amharic, on the north-west, and
the retreating Gala on the west and south-west. The languages of
the Somali and the Gala are quite distinct, and mutually unintelli-
gible, but possess so many fundamental characteristics in common,
that there is ample evidence of their close relationship, even if it can
not be proved that modern Somali is actually derived from Gala.
There has always been considerable trade between the inhabitants
of Aden and Southern Arabia and those of the Somali coast, and
the Semitic element in Somali is sufficient proof of the local tradi-
tion that the present Somali race had its origin in a Mohammedan
colonisation from Southern Arabia.

If we compare the vocabularies of the three languages, Arabic,
Gala and Somali, we find many words having a root common to all
three, such as the Somali words, aba father, wil boy, faras horse.

The majority of words common to Arabic and Somali are found
to be technical or legal terms, or names of utensils or articles of
commerce not native to the country. These are obviously borrowed

1 Gal (of which the plural is Galo) is the name used generally to denote
infidels, i.e. those who are not Mohammedans, and may be used by Somalia,
without any disrespect, to include English, Abyssinians or others as well as
those former inhabitants who would not embrace the faith preached by the
Mohammedan missionaries, and to whom the name is now specially applied.

XIV INTRODUCTION

direct from the Arabic and have no bearing on the relationship of
the languages. But in a few Somali verbs the Arabic root can be
recognised, such as, ghad take, carry ; akhri read ; Ibi sell, buy ;
gajo be hungry.

On the other hand a large number of words in ordinary use are
common to Gala and Somali, but are not of Arabic origin. These
have simple and elementary meanings, and include many verbs.

Such are,

arag see nin man

look

dig

blood

jir

light

gal

enter

month

dul

attack

arrab

tongue

der

long

The Somali numerals are common to Gala, except one, six, ten
and a hundred, and are all quite different from the Arabic.

In regard to the structure of the language, the most striking
features are the Suffixes, with their generic linking consonants, the
use of the Definite Article and its concord with noun aud adjective
(the latter is comparable with the declension of the German adjective),
the Negative Conjugation of verbs, and .the Particles. In all these
points Somali resembles Gala, but apparently has little or no
resemblance to Arabic, except in the particles.

All three languages employ similar inflexions in the persons of
the verb conjugation, but in the two former, as in Arabic, prefixes
are not used, except in the five irregular Somali verbs.

Example,

wan imi I came

wad timi thou earnest

wu yimi he came

wei timi she came

weinu nimi we came

The regular forms being as follows :

wan shega I tell

wad shegta thou tellest

wu shega he tells

wei shegta she tells

weinu shegna we tell

INTRODUCTION XV

The Semitic element is also exemplified in the guttural and
aspirate sounds, which correspond to the Arabic letters Ghain, 'Ain,
and Ha ; and in the form and concord of plural nouns, which largely
resemble the Arabic broken plurals.

The Bantu languages, which are prefix languages, seem to
have nothing in common with Somali, either in construction or
vocabulary.

There are certain slight variations in the speech of different
tribes, which almost constitute different dialects. The most
notable are the Ishhak, Dolbohanta, Mijjertein and the Esa and
Gadabursi.

For instance :

Ishhak

Dolbohanta

camel

aur

rati

road

dau

jid

tag

the saddles koryashi koryalki

A Dolbohanta will say wa ddnahaya (I want), pronounced by
the Ishhak as wa ddneya or wa ddnaya. " I want " is translated
by wa ddneya in Bari, wa ddnaya in Galbed

Practically all the men I have served with have belonged to the
Ishhak section, and in this book it is the everyday speech of these
people which is presented, while words and forms which are not
familiar to them, but are used by Dolbohanta and others, have been
avoided. The Ishhak almost entirely inhabit the British Protectorate,
and their speech may therefore be taken by Englishmen as the
standard form of the language.

Within the Ishhak there are slight variations again in accent,
phrases and idioms, of no great importance. These depend chiefly
on geographical distribution.

In the East {Bari) the common forms for the personal pronoun
are ban, bad, bu, etc., while in the West {Galbed) they are
represented by yan, yad, yu, etc.

The Midgan and Yibir dialects are quite apart. These are
dialects spoken by two outcast and homeless tribes living among the
Somalis, and are now published for the first time, having hitherto
been kept a secret even from the Somalis themselves. They are
discussed in full at the end of this book.

XVI INTRODUCTION

Finally, with regard to speaking the language, the mode of speech
is that of all Eastern people, like the language of the Bible. Sentences
are split up into strings of short simple remarks, with numerous
copulative particles, and expressions meaning, "and so," "and then,"
" he said," etc. In a narrative, after each remark the speaker pauses,
when the listener is expected to answer with some suitable expression
of assent, such as Kodi, or Haiye.

Correct pronunciation is most important, and as there are no
definite rules for the accentuation of syllables I have had to use
accents freely all through the book. The Somali is not a polite
person, and though extremely good-natured he is quite outspoken,
and has no hesitation in ridiculing one's false quantities or concords,
that is to say, if one's efforts are at all recognisable to him. He
expects a high standard of accuracy, chiefly because he is unaccus-
tomed to hearing a European endeavour to grapple with his language,
but this has the advantage of not allowing the stranger to form too
favourable an idea of his own skill.

PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY.

1. In reducing the Somali language to writing, we are faced
by the fact that there is no written language. Many educated
Somalis write Arabic, but, so far as the writer is aware, they have
never attempted to write their own language either in Arabic or
any other characters. Nor would it be possible to employ the
Arabic characters to represent Somali sounds. The list of Arabic
consonants is too elaborate, whilst the three vowel-signs are in-
sufficient, a great variety of vowel sounds being an important
peculiarity of the Somali language.

According to Hunter the alphabetical signs for Urdu contain all
the necessary elements, but he and all others have agreed to adopt
the Roman characters, for obvious reasons.

The alphabet that is used here, so far as it is applicable, is
that recommended by the Royal Geographical Society in "Hints
to Travellers," with the addition of two extra signs for the Arabic
Aine (c) and the cerebral d (Sanskrit ^), which are represented

respectively by the inverted comma ', and d, as in the grammar
published by Larajasse and Sampont. The double hh is employed
to represent the Arabic Ha (*-). Accents are also employed freely

to express the different values of the vowels.

a, a, d, - Arabic "fatha," or t
b » V

d „ >, J

d Sanskrit ^5"

(half d, half r)
e, £ as in Latin languages
/ = Arabic \J

The Alphabet

ir 1 9 = ■

Arabic J>

„ £ (L. & S. h)

» x

(L. & S. h)

i, i

" 7r

k =

Arabic J)

u = Arabic J

kh
I

» t

.. J

>» J»

» t

n
o, o, 6

Diphthongs.

» J

s
sh

(Schl.

§)

ei
au

„ &

There is no doubt a double / (according to Hunter, the
Sanskrit "&), but it is so seldom used (as in lehh = six) that it is not
necessary to have a separate sign. The same remark applies to the
Arabic i, which occurs in some Somali words, and is commonly used
in Yibir.

Vowels.

3. The following accents are used to represent the different
values of vowels : —

w and A are only used with special forms of a and o respectively.

The grave accent, v , is used to express the long drawn sounds
of each vowel.

The acute accent, ', is only used to denote the syllable upon
which the accentuation should fall, and may therefore vary in the
same word in different contexts or forms ; it is to be understood that
this accent does not alter the length or value of the vowel in any
way.

4. a corresponds to the Arabic "fatha" and has a nondescript
sound, as the u in " bun," " sun," or the a in " balloon " :

badan many
ban plain
dab fire

& is pronounced like a in "rat," "ham," but is not a common
sound :

wan&ksan good
r&g men

k&leh other

shalei yesterday

VOWELS o

& is long as in " father," " mast " :
san skin
dar stone building

e is pronounced like e in "pen," "fell" :

hebel a certain man
sheg tell

Before cerebral d this has almost the value of u, as in English
"fur." Example, hed tie.

& is like the vowels of "fate," "weight," "fare" :

adSr uncle

habSn night

gdnyo mare

g&d tree

i is short as in "pin" :

mid one
illin entrance

Care must be taken to pronounce i with exactly this value before r,
as y in " tyranny," and not as in English "fir" :

bir iron
jir be

1 is like ee in " feel," " seem " :

'Id sand
dlr trees
lln orange

O is short as in "on," "cot" :

kol time
'oil army
ghor write

6 is quite long as in " foal," " sole " :
ddn wish
gdb a kind of fruit
g61 lioness

6 This is represented by Larajasse and Sampont by ow, which,
however, seems liable to confusion with the English diphthong

1—2

4 ORTHOGRAPHY

ou. It has a very long drawn out hollow sound like a gasping
« Ohh ! "

dd near

ild forget

mado black

u is pronounced as in "full," "put" :

Before r it must retain the same value and not be pronounced like
the English "fur."

gur pick up
kun thousand
kulul warm

ti is long and full as oo in " fool," " rule " :

gilr start to march
fiid soup
fid ride

5. Diphthongs.

ai is pronounced as in "aisle," or "fire" :
ain sort, 'kind

ei is pronounced like " feign," but in this case the i is sometimes
almost heard :

weidi ask
samei make

Note. In many words it is hard to distinguish whether the diphthong
is the one or the other of these, the common a, or " fatha," and e being so
much alike when preceding another vowel. Thus this work differs from
that of other writers in that the past terminations of verbs, and the
Continuative tense inflexions are spelt with an e, instead of a, the former
being to the writer's ear distinctly the sound produced by the tribes he
has been in contact with.

au is like the English diphthong in " how," "hour," but with a
round full sound almost like " ao " :
aur camel

oi very seldom occurs, but where it does it is exactly the same
as in English :

hoi ! an exclamation

VOWEL CHANGES 5

Note. The above diphthongs may occur before another vowel, in which
case i becomes y, and u becomes w :

laya

slay ye (lai-a)

wa tegey a

I am going (tegei-i

wa samey a

I make (samei-a)

bilawa

dagger (bilau-a)

goya

cut ye (goi-a)

6. Vowel changes.

When two vowels occur in succession they may both be pro-
nounced separately and distinctly, in which case the second vowel
is marked with the diaeresis, " :

ai curse
baan badtempered
ei dog

More commonly the hiatus is avoided (a) by elision, (b) by the
use of the semi-vowels y, w, (c) by the insertion of some consonant.

(a) Elision is the suppression of one of the vowels, and takes
place especially before the pronouns which are attached as suffixes
to the preceding word.

Examples, gorti-u becomes gortu when he

hadi-an „ hadan if I

(b) y is used instead of i, or after 1, when preceding a vowel.
Examples, wa samei-a becomes wa sameya I make

wa sl-a „ wa slya I give

madd-ba „ madd-a the black
wa ild-ba „ ild-a I forget

When a is followed by i, it is very frequently changed into e,
whether a consonant is between or not.
Examples, ka' wake, awaken ke'i

la i becomes lei.
sa' cow, si'i, or su'u (for sa'i, sa'u) the cow

wan taga I go, wan tegeya I am going
aba father, abihi, or abuhu (for abahi, abahu)

the father

orthography

7. Consonants.
The consonants are sounded as follows :

Faucals (', h, hh).

' (aine) is an Arabic sound caused by a sudden contraction of

the glottis in place of a hiatus

i. It is treated like a consonant in all

rules as to inflexions, etc. :

'ab

drink

maga'

name

la'ag

money

b'e'id

oryx

'Id

sand

lo'

cows

'oil

army

'ur'ur

forearm

In order to learn the correct pronunciation compare the above

with

aba '

father

nag

woman

baan

badtempered

beid

egg

idlad

end, completion

lohh

plank

urur

assembly

ulul

growl

Note. The Aine is a hard letter, and must be followed by the hard form
of any other class of consonant in inflexion :

wa ka'da she gets up
for ka'ta

h is like the English h in "hit," but is scarcely sounded when at
the end of a word :

harag sheep-skin
gesiah brave

hh is the long drawn Arabic consonant ; in the middle, or end,
of a word it is sounded almost as a whole syllable, but is hardly
different from h at the beginning of a word :

CONSONANTS 7

dehh middle (dehh(e))

libahh lion (libahh(a))

lehhda the six (lehh(e)da)

hhun bad

Gutturals (g, gh, k, kh).

g is always hard as in "go."

It most nearly resembles the Arabic J> :
ga'an hand
gel camels

gh is the Arabic " ghain," 6, and must be learned by ear :

ghad carry
ghor write
ghanso bow

k is like the English k :

kali come here

hakama bridle

kh is a softer guttural-aspirate than the ghain or gh, and more
nearly corresponds to the Scotch ch, as in "loch," but is harder
than this :

sandukh box

akhal house

Note. It is often difficult to distinguish between gh and kh, the former
oeing softer, and the latter harder than in the true Arabic forms.

Palatals1 (j, sh, y).

j is a hard,/, as in English "journey," " John2 "

ja'al like
j6g stand

sh is like the English, as in " shoot " :

shimbir bird
sheg tell

1 These are not found at the end of a word in Somali.

2 There is no sound ch, as in "church," iu Somali; the English sound is
reproduced by the native as j.

8 ORTHOGRAPHY

y is like the English, as in " you " :

yer small
blyo water

Dentals (t, d, d, r, s, 1, n).

t as in English :

tuka crow

tehh shower of rain

d as in English :

wadan skin pail
durug move

Note. At the end of a word d ia sounded nearly like t :
mid one.

d is a cerebral letter, and, as mentioned above, is of Sanskrit
origin.

In the middle of a word it has almost the sound of r, but at the
beginning, or end, of a word it more nearly approaches d.

It is formed by curling the tongue back and bringing it forward
along the roof of the mouth :

adi sheep

fadi sit

hed tie

dan all, complete

r is always pronounced distinctly, like the r of Latin languages,
as in " arrow " :

ra' accompany

bir iron

shimbirtu the bird

s as in English :

1 as in English :

san skin
so'o go on
hes song

libahh lion
lln orange

filfil pepper

CONSONANTS 9

n as in English :

nag woman
mindi knife

Note. 1 and t, where they occur in inflexions or suffixes,
become sh.

hashi the camel, for hal-ti

wa yesha thou doest, for yel-ta

Labials (b, m, f, w).

b as in English :

barbar youth

bilawa dagger

albab door

m as in English :

m6d think
dambe behind

f as in English :

af mouth

iftin light

afar four

w as in English :

wiyil rhinoceros
walal brother

PART II. ACCIDENCE.

THE PARTS OF SPEECH.

8. All languages cannot be arranged on exactly the same
system, and, in the Somali Language, the arrangement and definitions
which are applicable to the grammar of well-known tongues, such as
English or Arabic, will not altogether hold good.

Somali is undoubtedly a simple and elementary language, in
which the only true and fundamental parts of speech are

Substantive, Verb, Adjective, Particle,

and it is by various combinations or forms of these that the other
generally recognised parts of speech are formed.

9. A Substantive is a word describing, or referring to, something
which exists, or some object of thought, either material or im-
material.

A Verb is a word expressing thought, being, action, or the
suffering of action, and affirms or predicates something of some
person or thing.

These two parts of speech are complementary and essential one
to the other, and in any form of speech both these elements must
necessarily occur, unless it is tacitly agreed, to save unnecessary
verbiage, that one or the other may be obviously understood from
the context, and may be omitted from actual expression.

An Adjective is a word which describes or qualifies the object or
thought represented by a substantive, according to any known idea
of quality, such as colour, size, nature, etc.

A Particle is a word which has no meaning in itself and can only
occur in conjunction with other parts of speech. It may qualify the

Suffixes, known as -

PARTS OF SPEECH 11

meaning of a verb, or it may be " Conjunctive," that is, it may
connect, or act as a link between, two expressions or parts of
speech.

10. Other parts of speech that occur in more advanced
languages are, in Somali, all derived from substantives, or are
represented by suffixes.

Substantives may be qualified

(i) according to place, context, possessor, etc., by
'Definite Article,
Demonstrative Adjective,
Possessive Pronominal Adjective,
^Interrogative Adjective ;

(ii) according to number, by
Inflexions.
They include,

(i) Nouns (actually descriptive of an object or idea),
(ii) Numerals1 (expressing the abstract idea of a number),
(iii) Pronouns (words used to refer to a noun or numeral
already expressed, or understood, to avoid lengthy and unnecessary
repetition).

Note a. All substantives are recognisable by the fact that they are able
to have attached to them the suffixes mentioned above, and may stand alone
as Subject or Object to a Verb.

Note b. Nouns and numerals have no declension, nouns alone being
inflected in the plural. Personal pronouns have an Objective (or Accusative)
form as well as the Subjective (or Nominative).

In addition to the above, there are formed, by the use of a noun
alone, or a noun combined with any of the other substantives, with
or without suffixes or inflexions, and with or without an adjective,

(iv) Adverbs (words expressing time, place or manner, relative
to the action of a verb).

(v) Relative Conjunctions (words introducing expressions of
the same value as the above).

(vi) Prepositions (words expressing the relationship of one
substantive to another).

1 These are undoubtedly treated as Substantives in Somali.

12 ACCIDENCE

A. Substantives.

11. These will be dealt with in the order given in the classi-
fication above, but it is necessary first to describe the Noun itself,
its Forms, and Gender, after which will follow the Suffixes, to be
followed again by the Plural Inflexions.

The reason of this order will be seen on a perusal of the
following pages, as the questions of gender and number are
inextricably mixed with those concerning the form of the Suffixes.

1. Classes of Nouns.

12. Nouns are classified into Proper and Common.
' Proper ' nouns are names of people or places.

The commoner and typical Somali men's names are, Jama,
Farah, Hassan, Hussein, Mohammed, Mahhmud, Ahhmed,
Ali, Omar, Nur, Liban, Egal, Dualeh, Abdallah, Abdi,
Robleh.

Nicknames are very common ; in fact nearly everyone, whether
Somali or English, is always known by his friends by some nickname,
such as, Gurreh left-handed, Farurah hare-lipped, Dunjog
active or " cute," Bulali fair, Timo-wein long hair, Awarah
one-eyed, Galds, Delowein, etc., always referring to some feature
or eccentricity, but without any idea of disrespect.

13. Common nouns are classed in various ways : according to
their Nature they are Concrete, or Abstract,

according to their Derivation they are Radical, Derivative,
or Borrowed,

according to their Gender they are Masculine, Feminine,
or Common.

14. Concrete Nouns include the names of all animate or
inanimate objects, or parts of them.

Nearly all of these are Radical words, or else are borrowed
entirely from another language.

(i) Animate : nin man, nag woman, wil boy,

gabad girl, libahh lion, faras horse, aur camel,
shimbir bird.

ABSTRACT NOUNS 13

They include collective words, as :

dad people, rag men, dumar women, artir children,
gel camels, bdlo flocks, ghalab, alabo baggage, kit.

Names of relations :

aba father, hoyo mother, walal brother or sister,
fnan son, or daughter, adSr uncle.

(ii) Inanimate objects are :

wahh thing, bir iron, ghori wood, dagahh stone,
bur hill, mlyi jungle, akhal house.

15. Abstract Nouns.

(a) Many abstract nouns of action and sense are radical, in
which case they are also used as intransitive verbs.

hadal talk, yab wonder, dagal fight, 'ur smell,
harad thirst, bandn pain, ai curse, gabei chant,
ado rage.

(b) Verb-nouns, describing the action of a verb, are formed
from the verb-root by the addition of certain terminations :

1st Class (ending in a consonant) add -nin, or -in.

2nd Class ( „ „ -o ) „ -d.

3rd Class ( „ „ -i ) „ -s, or -n.

1st

Class.

dig

warm

dignin warming

tol

sew

tdlin sewing, seam

ghor

write

ghorin writing

bdd

jump

bo din jumping

sug

wait

sugnin waiting

(Note :

fed

ride

fCdan riding.)

2nd Class.

so'o walk so'od walking

nokho return nokbod return

garo understand garad sense

babso escape babsad escape

idlo come to an end idlad end, completion

ACCIDENCE

3rd Class.

weidi

ask

weidis

goi

cut

gois

give

sin

samei

make

samein

safei

clean

safein

question
cutting, cleft
present
construction
cleaning

'ulusnimo heaviness from 'ulus heavy

'ajisnfmo laziness „ 'ajis lazy

fulanfmo cowardice „ fulei coward

nagnfmo womanliness „ nag woman

hoyonfmo motherliness „ hoyo mother

'adan

whiteness

'ad

white

'asan

redness

'as

red

weinan

largeness

wein

large

adkan

hardness

adag

hard

derer
fudeid
'uleis
adeig

length
lightness
weight
strength

der long

fudud light

'ulus heavy

adag hard, strong

(d) Other radical abstract nouns are those of Quantity, Time,
and Place, some of which are used as Indefinite Pronouns.

in some (quantity) ghar some (number)

gidi, kulli, daman all, whole gor, kol time
malin, 'asho day mel, hag place

16. Borrowed words are chiefly Arabic, many being common to
all East African languages.

mes table, sa'ad hour, kursi chair, sandukh box,
bandukh gun, hukum order, askari soldier

In albab (door), the Somali has taken the Arabic definite
article as well, but adds his own article to it :
albabki the door.

Verbs are very seldom borrowed, such as safei (clean).
English words are now becoming familiar and naturalised over
the whole of our Protectorate, as,

GENDER OF NOUNS 15

kdd (coat), tfcbel (table), sord (sword), drabel (trouble),
ketli (kettle), kob (cup).

2. Gender of Nouns.

17. There are no rules determining the gender of a Radical
Noun, either according to its meaning or form. It must therefore
be learned by practice in the case of each word. This however is
not so difficult as it would appear, as the definite article is so much
a part of the noun, and the gender is so clearly marked by it, that
it is best to learn the definite article with the noun in each case.
I shall, therefore, when quoting a noun, give the definite article,
separated by a hyphen, as in

nin-ki man
nag-ti woman.

This will imply that

nin =a man nag = a woman

ninki = the man nagti = the woman.

It will suffice here to say that all Feminine nouns are those
which take the dental article, i.e. -ti or -di ;

While all Masculine nouns are those which take a guttural
article, i.e. -ki, -gi, -hi, or in some cases the vowel -i, alone.

In both cases the Suffix consists of two parts. The" final vowel
is the Article Suffix, the consonant is the Linking Consonant.

18. The Derivative and Borrowed Nouns do follow certain
determinate rules in respect of gender.

Borrowed words are masculine :

mes-ki, kursi-gi, hukum-ki, sandukh-i, albab-ki, t^bel-ki,
kod-ki, etc.

Exceptions, sa'ad-di hour ) ,. . .

.. , . . . , , > are feminine.
warkhad-di letter j

19. Of Derivative Nouns,

Verbal Nouns in -in (1st and 3rd Classes) are Feminine :
dignin-ti, sugnin-ti, samein-ti, etc.

Verbal Nouns in -d, -s (2nd and 3rd Classes) are Masculine :
so'od-ki, idlad-ki, gois-ki, etc.

ACCIDENCE

Adjectival Nouns in -nimo -an are Feminine.
'ajisnfmo-di, weinan-ti.

Adjectival Nouns of other forms are Masculine,
derer-ki, 'uleis-ki, etc.

20. Names of men and animals may have special forms for

each gender :

Examples,

nin-ki

man, husband

nag-ti

woman, wife

aba-hi

father

hoyo-di

mother

aur-ki

male camel

hal-shi '

female camel

sanga-hi

stallion

g6nyo-di

mare

wan-ki

ram

sabein-ti

ewe

orgi-gi

he-goat

ri-di

she-goat

ar-ki

lion

gol-shi1

lioness

21. Some nouns are of common gender, and vary only in the
form of the definite article.

inan-ki son Inan-ti daughter

son
walal-ki brother

walal-shi1 sister

3. The Suffixes.

22. The Suffixes consist of two parts, namely (1) a vowel
termination, or syllable beginning with a vowel, and (2) a linking
consonant, connecting the termination to the substantive, and
denoting the gender of the word.

23. The following parts of speech are represented by Suffixes
in Somali :

viz.

i Definite Article (the) -i

Demonstrative Adjective (this; that) -an;
Possessive Pronominal Adjective.

(my, thy, his, her) -ai

(our (1 and 3), our (1, 2 and 3)

your, tlieir) -aya

Interrogative Adjective (what ?) ... -e P

-a

-as

or
or

-u.

-a.

-Is -ed.

-fcn -In -6d.

1 In Feminine nouns ending in -I, the final I and the t of the Article are
transformed into sh ; thus nashl the she-camel, for halti, walashi for walilti.

LINKING CONSONANTS

ninki, ninka, or ninku the man

ninkan this man

ninkas or ninka that man

ninkai, ninka, ninkis, &c. my, thy, his, etc. man

ninke ? what man ?

The above forms are constant, whether the noun qualified is in
the Singular or Plural.

(a) Linking Consonants.

24. The Linking Consonants are peculiar to each noun, and
conform to its gender and the final letter of the word.

25. Masculine words take the gutturals, k, g, h.

Nouns ending in any consonant, except g, or a gutt. aspirate, take k

„ g

-i or g
-a

Note i. Nouns ending in -h, hh, or a guttural aspirate, would logically
be followed by h, but this additional aspirate is hardly to be detected by
the ear, and need not therefore be written.

Note ii. With nouns ending in ' no linking consonant is required, unless
it be another ', but this again the ear cannot detect.

Note iii. Where the noun ends in a, -ah, the -a is assimilated to the
form of suffix vowel which follows, i.e. if the suffix is -i, the a becomes i, if
u, it becomes u.

Examples,

(The suffix is here separated by a hyphen, but it must be remembered
that it is not spoken as a separate word, and will not be so written in
examples later.)

albab-ki

shabel-ki

sul-ki

san-ki

af-ki

mlyi-gi

askari-gi

the door
the leopard
the thumb
the nose
the mouth
the jungle
the soldier

harag-gi

ilig-gi

libahh-i

sandukh-i

maga'-i

muda'-i

the sheep-skin,
the tooth
the lion (i)
the box (i)
the name (ii)
the fork (ii)

kbra a saddle

dayah a moon

the saddle kdri-hi, kdra-ha, or

kdru-hu (iii)

the moon dayi-hi, daya-ha, or

dayu-hu (iii)

;

ACCIDENCE

and

(waranleh

a spearman the s.

farddleh

a horseman the h.

waranlihi, waranlaha,
waranluhii
the h. fardblihi, fardalaha,

farddluhu)

26. Feminine words take the dentals -t or -d.
Nouns ending in any consonant except d, or ', take -t.

„ „ -d, -i, -o, ', or an aspirate, „ -d.

Examples,

nag-ti the woman laf-ti the bone

lan-ti the branch miyid-di the corpse

far-ti the finger salo-di the dung

ga'an-ti the hand ghorahh-di the sua

hal-shi the she-camel warakh-di the letter

ri-di ' the goat Nogal-shi the Nogal

27. In many cases the linking consonant may be omitted, as
has been noticed after aspirates, and ' .

It is also omitted in certain words,

rag-i the men

g£l-i the camels -
with the simple Personal Pronouns,

an-i, an-a I

ad-i, ad-a thou, etc.
after some of the Possessive Pronominal suffixes,

akhal-kls-i his house

has-k£d-a her family

dad-kdn-i our people
or after the Demonstrative suffix,

nin-kan-a this man

aur-kas-i that camel

(b) The Definite Article.

28. It is seen in § 23 that the Definite Article has three
alternative forms, the use of which depends entirely on the context
of the noun defined.

A short general rule is given here, but the question will be more
fully dealt with under Syntax (§ 150, etc.).

DEFINITE ARTICLE 19

" The horse " may be, faraski, faraska, or farasku.
" The place " „ meshi, mesha, or meshu.

29. (i) -i is the most general form, and is used when -a, or
-u, are not required.

(ii) -a is used in the following cases :

(1) when referring to a person or thing actually present in front
of the speaker, and is very nearly equivalent to the demonstrative
adjective (this), but must not be confounded with the demonstrative
suffix -a (that) ;

(2) when the noun is used possessively, adjectivally or ad-
verbially.

Examples,

(1) sandukha ghad take the box (which you see)

ninka ba 6g the man (i.e. he that is present) knows

ninka ad arkesa the man thou seest

(but, ninki ad araktei the man thou sawest)

(2) akhalki sirkalka the house of the officer
nin magaloda a man of the town
galabta this evening

(iii) -u is used when referring to a well-known, or already
mentioned, object or person.

Any definition is supposed to be unnecessary, and therefore -u is
not employed if the noun is qualified by an adjective, nor is it used
with the object of a sentence.

It may be represented in English by the use of "The" or
capital letters.
Examples, Sirkalku The Officer (as a soldier would refer to

his company officer or Commandant)
Wadadku The Mullah (i.e. Mohammed Abdallah

Hassan)
ghorahhdu the sun
dayuhu the moon

rbbku the rain

30. The suffixes are,

-an this

-as, or -a that

2—2

20 ACCIDENCE

Examples, faras-kan this horse

faras-kas that horse

nag-tan this woman

gSd-kas that tree

sandukh-an this box

busta-has that blanket

ha-shan this camel

magalo-dan this town

31. The Demonstrative may be intensified by the addition of
the definite article in two ways (cf. § 198) :

(i) The definite article -a and demonstrative adjective both
require linking consonants.

In this case the linking consonant used with the Demonstrative
Suffix is always k for masculine words, and t for feminine words.

Examples,
nfnkakan this man nagtata that woman

gh6rigakan this wood mSshatas that place

dagahhakan this stone sanadukhdatan these boxes

(ii) The definite article is suffixed to the demonstrative without
any linking consonant.

Examples,

ninkasa that man gabaddasu that girl

nimankani these mei gddkasa that tree

rdbkanu this rain inantasi that daughter

(d) Possessive Pronominal Adjectives.

32. my -ai- (-gi, or -di)
thy -a- (-gi, or -di)
his -is- (-i)

her -Sd- (-i)

our -fcn- (-i) (including " you ")

our -aya- (-gi, or -di) (excluding " you ")

your -in- (-i)

their -6d- (-i)
Except when qualifying terms of relationship, as "father,"
"mother," "husband," etc., the above suffixes require the definite
article as well, as given in brackets after each person. Only -ai, -a,
-aya, however, require the linking consonant, the remainder taking
the article without any link.

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE

The linking consonant to the article, when used, is always
for masculine words, -d- for feminine words.

Example, aur-ki

camel

aurkaigi

aurkaiga

aurkaigu

my camel

aurkagi

aurkaga

aurkagu

thy camel

aurkisi

aurklsa

aurklsu

his camel

aurkedi

aurkeda

aurkedu

her camel

aurkSni

aurkena

aurkdnu

our camel

aurkayagi

aurkayaga

aurkayagu

our camel

aurklni

aurklna

aurklnu

your camel

aurkbdi

aurkdda

aurkddu

their camel

aur-ti

camels

aurtaidi

aurtaida

aurtaidu

my camels

aurtadi

aurtada

aurtadu

thy camels

aurtlsi

aurtlsa

aurtlsu

his camels

aurtfcdi

aurtdda

aurtadu

her camels

aurteni

aurtena

aurtenu

our camels

aurtayadi

aurtayada

aurtayadu

our camels

aurtlni

aurtlna

aurtlnu

your camels

aurtddi

aurtdda

aurtddu

their camels

With terms of relationship, the definite article is not used after
the possessive.

Examples,

abahai

my father

hoyoda

thy mother

nagtls

his wife

ninked

her husband

aderken

our uncle

tolkaya

our tribe

awdwigln

your grandfather

walalkdd

their brother

(e) The Interrogative Adjective.

33. " Which ? " "What ? " are expressed often by the suffix -e ?
This suffix is sounded distinctly at the end of the noun, like English
" eh ? ", but must not be pronounced as ei or S.

ninke ? what man ?

sandukhe ? what box ?
gabadde P what girl ?

ACCIDENCE

This form is most commonly used alone, or with the word wa (is),
and usually repeats some noun already mentioned.

Examples, ninki yimi the man has come

ninke P or wa ninke P what man ?

4. The Plural of Nouns.

34. The only inflexion which nouns undergo occurs in the
formation of the Plural.

There are six methods of forming the Plural, and in all except
the first (Masculine Monosyllables) the gender is reversed in the
process, and the linking consonant, required with the suffixes,
is altered from guttural to dental, or vice versa.

35. (i) Masculine Monosyllables repeat the last two letters.
The masculine, or guttural, linking consonant is retained. In words
ending in -n, the -n becomes -m, while the inflexion is always -an.

Examples,

dab-ki

fire

plural

dabab-ki

fas-ki

axe

fasas-ki

rad-ki

track

radad-ki

kob-ki

cup

kobob-ki

'oll-ki

army

'oll'oll-ki

nin-ki

man

niman-ki

tin-ki

tin

timan-ki

'ain-ki

belly-band
strap '

'aiman-ki

sun-ki

suman-ki

Exceptions

rer-ki

family, household

plural

rdro-hi

na's-ki

fool

na'syo-di

ges-ki

horn

gesas-ki, or geso-hi

'el-ki

well

'elal-shi

bal-ki

feather

balal-shi

aur-ki

camel

aur-ti

sais-ki

groom

saisis-ki, or saisin-ti

36. (ii) Nouns ending in -a, or -ei (all Masculine) change -a,
or -ei into -yal, and take the feminine, or dental, linking consonant.

Examples,

kdra-hi saddle plural kbryal, kdryashi

busta-hi blanket „ bustyal-shi

aba-hi father „ abyal-shi

PLURAL OF NOUNS

tuka-hi crow plural tukyal-shi

bilawa-hi dagger „ bilawyal-shi

hakama-hi bridle „ hakamyal-shi

odei-gi old man ,, odyal-shi

fCilei-gi coward ,, fulyal-shi

Exceptions :

These plurals are used with the masculine, or guttural, linking
consonant, by Dolbohanta, and other eastern tribes :

bustyalki, kdryalki, hakamyalki, etc.

37. (iii) Nouns ending in -o (all Feminine) add -in, and take
the masculine, or guttural, linking consonant.

Examples,

'asho-di day plural 'ashoin-ki

hoyo-di mother ,, hoyom-ki

^udimo-di native axe „ gudimoin-ki

dero-di gazelle „ d£roin-ki

ghanso-di bow „ ghansoin-ki

38. (iv) Masculine Polysyllables (except those under ii) add -o.
If the final letter is an aspirate or ', -yo is added.

These plurals take the feminine, or dental linking consonant, the
-o being then usually changed to -a.
Examples,

fandal-ki

spoon

plural

fandalo, fandaladi

libahh-i

lion

libahhyo-di

kursi-gi

chair

kursyo-di

muda'-i

fork

muda'yo-di

muftah-i

key

muftahyo-di

maga'-i

name

maga'yo-di

Exceptions,

dagahh-i

stone

dagahhan-ti

ugahh-i

egg

))

ugahhan-ti

sibaihh-i

sepoy

sibaihhin-ti

aghil-ki

chief

aghilin-ti, or oghal-shi

faras-ki

horse

fardo-hi

ilig-gi

tooth

ilko-di

askari-gi

soldier

askarr-ti

1 The common word now used,
word gudin, which is also used.

But it is originally the plural of an older

ACCIDENCE

guri-gi enclosure plural gurio-hi

Yibir-ki Yibir „ Yibro-hi

Midgan-ki Midgan „ Midgo-hi

Foreign words often add -yo in other cases than those given in
the rule above :

rakab-ki stirrup plural rakabyo-di
kitab-ki book „ kitabyo-di

39. (v) Words borrowed from the Arabic usually form their
plurals after the fashion of the broken plurals of that language, and
take the feminine linking consonant.

Examples,

sandukh-i

box

plural

sanadukh-di

bandukh-i

gun

■>■>

banadukh-di,

or banadikh-di

sirkal-ki

officer

sirakll-shi

kursi-gi

chair

kurasi-di

warkhad-di

paper

warakh-di

moskhln-ki

beggar

mosakhln-ti

musmar-ki

nail

»)

musamar-ti

40. (vi) All Feminine Nouns, except those in (iii), add o, and
take the masculine linking consonant, h.

When the noun is denned the o is assimilated to the form of the
article vowel, as in the case of masculine nouns in a.

Examples,

nag-ti

woman

plural

nago, nagihi,
nagaha, naguhu

hal-shi

she-camel

halo, halihi,
halaha, haluhu

mel-shi

place

melo-hi

lug-ti

leg

lugo-hi

deg-ti

ear

dego-hi

lan-ti

branch

lamo-hi

'alen-ti

leaf

'alemo-hi

jdniad-di

bag

j6niado-hi

ga'an-ti

hand

ga'amo-hi

ri-di

goat

riyo-hi

kab-ti

shoe

kabo-hi

Exception,

il-shi

eye

indo-hi

CASES OF NOUNS 25

There exist the following plural nouns, all of which end in o and
take the masculine article hi, and therefore belong to this class.

blyo-hi water

'ano-hi milk

g£do-hi grass

timo-hi hair

h61o-hi flocks, property

41. An Intensive Plural, ending in -al, -yal, is used in poetic
phraseology.

Example, Idinku baneyal...dftlan ma bulaten P
Have ye over plains and plains gone to war ?
Gerar wa bogholal. Songs are in hundreds.

42. After Numerals the plural form of a noun is not used
except in the case of Feminine Nouns of class (vi). In this case d
is added to the inflexion.

Examples, 2 men laba nin

4 boxes afar sandukh

3 blankets sadehh busta
7 days todbba 'asho

but, 5 she-camels shan halod

2 places laba melod

4 bags afar joniadod
9 months sagal bilod

5. Cases of Nouns.

43. There are no inflexions of the noun to represent the
Declension ; the cases must therefore be distinguished by position
and context. This is not an easy matter, and requires a knowledge
of other parts of speech not yet described : it will therefore be left
to be discussed under Syntax (cf. § 155).

44. The usual order of a simple sentence is,

(i) Subject, (ii) Object, (iii) Verb.
An Adverb may be placed first of all, or before the Verb.

ACCIDENCE

Examples,

Adv.

galabta

this evening-

Subject

sirkalku
the officer

harudki

the jowaree

Object

sandukh

a box

faraska
the horse

Burao

faraska

(to) the horse

Verb

la kali

bring

fuleya \

is riding J

ghobon dona |
am going to reach J

}

give J

45. The Possessive Case may be expressed in two ways.

(i) The common method is by the use of the Possessive

suffix.

Examples,

nin akhalklsu
sirkalku farasklsa
nagti bokhorkeda

a man his house
the Officer his horse
the woman her sash

(ii) The Noun in the possessive case is placed after the noun
possessed.

This can only be done where the Possessor is defined by the
definite article. The Possessor always takes the suffix a.

Example,

akhalki ninka the house of the man
not akhalki ninki

(nor is it possible to say, akhalki nin
for " the house of a man ").

The following are the typical forms :

The horse of the officer faraski sirkalka
or sirkalka farasklsu

nin sirkal farasklsu
far as sirkalka
fardaha sirkalka mid
ba dintei
(literally, of the horses of the officer one has died).
A horse of an officer sirkal farasklsi

The horse of an officer

A horse of the officer

has died

NUMERALS

Numerals.

16.

Cardinals,

(ko-di), mid-ki

16.

lehhyo-tdban-ki

laba-di

17.

toddbyo-tdban-ki

sadehh-di

18.

sid6dyo-tdban-ki

afar-ti

19.

sagalyo-t6ban-ki

shan-ti

20.

labaton-ki

lehh-di

21.

kobyo-labaton-ki

tod6ba-di

22.

labyo-labaton-ki

sid&d-di

etc. etc.

sagal-ki

30.

s6ddon-ki

10.

t6ban-ki

40.

afarton-ki

11.

kobyo-tdban-ki

50.

konton-ki

12.

labyo-tdban-ki

60.

16hhdon-ki

13.

sadehhyo-t6ban-ki

70.

todobaton-ki

14.

afaryo-tdban-ki

80.

sid6ton-ki

15.

shanyo-tdban-ki

90.

sagashon-ki

100.

b6ghol-ki

1,000. kun-ki

47. Rules for the use of the Numerals.

(i) The Numerals are placed before the noun they qualify.

(ii) Masculine nouns, and Feminine nouns ending in o are
used in the singular.

Feminine Nouns (except those ending in o) add od.

(iii) If the Noun qualified by a numeral is defined by the
Definite Article, Demonstrative, or Possessive, the suffix is attached
to the numeral and not to the noun, numerals 1 — 8 taking the
dental linking consonant, the remainder the guttural linking con-
sonant, irrespectively of the gender of the noun.

Examples,

laba nin 2 men
afar faras 4 horses
lehh halod 6 camels
tobanki askari
afarti nin
labada halod

sadehh 'asho 3 days

shan k6ra 5 saddles

todoba jdniadod 7 bags
the ten soldiers
the four men
those two camels

b6gholkaigi adi my hundred sheep.

ACCIDENCE

48. (i) K6 is only used in counting, and is never used with a
noun :

mid is not used to qualify a noun, but is used as an Indefinite
Impersonal Pronoun.

one man nin

one (thing) is bad mid ba hhun

one (man) is bad nin ba hhun

(ii) The numerals 19, 29, 39, etc., are usually translated by,

labaton midla 20 minus one = 19
sdddon midla 30 minus one = 29
b6ghol midla 100 minus one = 99

(iii) The numerals over 100 are translated as follows :

(iyo = and)

101 bogh61-iyo mid

102 bogh<51-iyo laba
130 bogh61-iyo s6ddon

146 bogh61-iyo 16hhyo-afarton

(iv) Time in hours is translated by the Cardinal numerals
with the Definite Article, (sa'adod = hours, may be used.)

3 o'clock sadehhda (sa'adod)

1 o'clock kddi

half-past 2 labada iyo badki

49. Fractions,

50.

a portion mel-shi

| bad-ki

fallad-di

£ daldl-ki T\

rima-di

I wahh-di

L Ordinals,

first

kdwad, h6re

eighth

sidedad

second

labad

ninth

sagalad

third

sadehhad

tenth

t6bnad

fourth

afrad

eleventh

i k6byo-t6bnad

fifth

shanad

etc.

sixth

lehhad

twentieth labatonad

seventh

todbbad

PERSONAL PRONOUNS 29

These are used like adjectives and follow the nouns they qualify,
but are not inflected.

nin labad a second man
nagti afrad the fourth woman
ki 16hhad the sixth

51. Distributive Numbers. No special forms are used for
these,

each = kasta every = walba (see § 68) ;

but distributive numbers are usually expressed by the particle ba
(S 143 («)).

give 10 each nin ba tdban si

one by one mid mid

in tens tdban tdban

52.

Periodical Numbers,

(time

mar, kol, gor)

once

kol, mar

three times

sadehh gor

Pronouns.

}

she

(a) Simple Personal Pronouns.
(1) Subjective.
53. The simple, or Enclitic, forms are :

-an I

-ad thou

-u he

-ai

-ei

-ainu ]

} we (inclusive)
-emu J x '

-annu we (exclusive)

-aiding

-eidin j y

t } -

These cannot stand alone in a sentence, but must follow, and be
attached to, some preceding word, which may be any part of speech.

30 ACCIDENCE

Examples,

gortas-u yidi then-he said

'had'-an imado if-I come

Burao-einu nil ' at Burao-we lived
1lmis'-ad dbnesa ? how-many-do-you want ?

ninki-an ddneya the man-(whom)-I want

54. Very often, however, these simple forms are combined with
the letters w-, b-, or y- (which represent certain particles, wa, ba,
ya) and are then used as separate words.

wan, wad, wu, etc. are forms which may be used at the

beginning of a sentence, but are never used in any other position.

ban, bad, bu, etc.] r , . , , , ,

, \ are synonymous forms, and are interchangeable.

yan, yad, yu, etc. J J J

b- is preferred by Eastern and Southern Somalis.

y- is preferred by the Coast, Western and Central tribes.

These forms usually occur immediately before the verb or its

particles, but never at the beginning of a sentence (cf. § 236).

55. There are two ways of emphasising the Personal Pronouns,
which may be u^ed disjunctively, like the French " moi," " toi," etc.
This is done by the addition of the Definite Article.

In both cases the simple form for the third person singular
masculine is is.

(i) The article suffix is added to the simple form without any
linking consonant, thus :

ani I adi Thou (isi) He

ana ada (isa)

arm adu isu

These are the only persons which are found in this form.

(ii) The article suffix and linking consonant is added to the last
or to the Enclitic forms of the plural.

The -a and -u suffixes only are used in this case, thus :

anigu, aniga I

adigu, adiga Thou

isagu, fsaga He

iyadu, iyada She

1 A final vowel iB usually dropped before the personal pronoun, as is shown
here by an apostrophe '.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS

fnnagu,

innaga

annagu,

annaga

We (exclusive)

idinku,

idinka

iyagu,

fyaga

They

To translate " I myself" cf. § 190.

56. Another form is produced by the suffix -na (and).

and I
and you

anna

adna

isna

iyana

innuna

annuna

idinna

iyana

57. A compound,
of wahh (thing).

wahhan has the meaning of "this is what I..."

These forms are especially used with the verbs " want,"
"think." "do," but may be used with any verb.

and he
and she
and we
and we
and ye
and they

Indicative," form is made by the addition

say,

wahhan
wahh ad
wuhhu
wahhai
wahhainu
wahhannu
wahhai din
wahhai

this is what I...
thou,
he...

she...

we...

ye...

they...

58. An interrogative form of the same is made with mahha ?
(what ?)

mahhan... ?

mahhad...?

muhhu...P

mahhai...?

mahhainu...?

mahhannu...?

mahhaidin...?

mahhai...?

what...
what...
what...
what...
what...
what..,

I...?

thou...?

he...?

she...?

we...?

what... ye...?
what... they...?

32 ACCIDENCE

59. These two forms are used very frequently in introducing
questions and answers.
Examples,

mahhad ddnesa P ) wahhan dbneya, etc.

| wahhan doneya, etc. \
f I want, etc. J

what do you want ?

hagg'eidin takten ?\ wahhannu tagnei, etc.)

where did you go ? J we went to, etc. J

muhhuyidi? | wuhhuyidi... y

what did he say ? J he said... J

(2) Objective.

60. The objective, or oblique, case of the Personal Pronouns
has special forms, which are used independently as separate words.

Simple

Emphatic

aniga

thee

adiga

him

isaga

her

iyada

rinnaga
lannaga

you

idin

idinka

them

u, or ku

iyaga

The accentuation of these emphatic forms must be noticed, to
distinguish them from the Subjective case.

Examples, isaga (Obj.) and isaga (Subj.)
iyaga „ and iyaga

61. (iii) The Reflexive Pronoun is iss.

iss dil kill yourself
This is also used reciprocally :

iss laya slay each other

(b) Possessive Pronouns.

62. These have the same forms as the suffixes (§ 32) with a
consonant (k masc. t fern.) prefixed, and the definite article suffixed,
to them (cf. § 199).

Masc. Fern,

mine kai-gi, -ga, -gu. tai-di, -da, -du.

thine ka-gi, -ga, -gu. ta-di, -da, -du.

his kis-i, -a, -u. tis-i, -a, -u.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 33

hers k£d-i -a -u tfcd-i -a -u

ours k£n-i -a -u t&n-i -a -u

ours kaya-gi -ga -gu taya-di -da -du
yours kln-i -a -u tln-i -a -u

theirs k6d-i -a -u t6d-i -a -u

In the Plural, the above prefix ku, tu, instead of k, t, to the

suffix, as,

kuaigi, tuaidi, kuagi, tuadi, etc.

63. These also have the same forms as the adjectival suffixes
(§ 30), and are used with consonants as above.

Sing. Plur.

Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem.

this kan, tan these kuan, tuan

, i kas, tas those kuas, tuas
that 1 ka ta

They may be intensified by the definite article, as follows :
sing, kani, kana, kanu, kasa, tasu, etc.
plur. ktiakan, tiiatan, kiiakas, etc.
or kuani, tuani, kuasi, etc.
Another form is,

ko, to that yonder
kuo, tu6 those yonder
The definite article is used independently as a pronoun in the

same way.

ki, ka, ku ; ti, ta, tu.

ki kaleh the other one

ta wein the big one.

The plur. form is

kuer, tuer
Example, kuer 'ad'ada the white ones

64. (e?) Relative Pronouns.

None.

65. (e) Interrogative Pronouns.

(i) Subjective :

who ? what ? ya P (sing.)
kue ? (plur.)

K. 3

34 ACCIDENCE

ke P te ? are also used disjunctively in this sense, as the other
suffixes.

(ii) Objective :

whom ? ya P

what? mahha ? (§ 58)

66. The suffix -ma is used as an interrogative pronominal
adjective, but is not included among the other suffixes, as it has not
the typical form, but is really the interrogative particle (cf. § 94).

ninma P what man ?

gonna P when ?

wa sa'adma ? what hour is it ?

-ma is also used suffixed to the simple personal pronouns, and
definite article, meaning "which of?"

kuma P tuma P which one ? (indefinite)

irmama P which of us ?
annama ? „

idinma P which of you two ?

iyama P which of them ?

These are used both subjectively and objectively.

The possessive case is,

yaleh ? kumaleh P whose ?

(/) Indefinite Pronouns.

67. la one, they, people

(similar to the French pronoun "on," in meaning and construction).

This pronoun is used in construction like any simple personal
pronoun.

The following euphonic alterations take place when any simple
pronoun or particle follows :

la i becomes lei
la u „ lo

la ku „ lagu

la idin „ leidin

la ka „ laga

ADJECTIVES

68. The following are substantival and are used with the
definite article suffix when necessary.

wahh-i something, anything gidi-gi

)

mid-ki one, an, a

kulli-gi

\ all, whole

'id-di someone, anyone

i daman-ti )

ghof-ki person

hebel-ki

a certain man

ghar-ki some, several

keli-gi

alone

daur-ki some, a few

gdni-gi

solitary, apart

in-ti some, a quantity

The following are treated as adjectives i

md follow the noun

qualified, but are not inflected for number or gender.

badan many

walba, waliba

every

yer few

kasta

each

hoga little

o dan

all

un any, soever

keliah

only

k&leh other

gdniah

separate, special

Adjectives.

69. Adjectives follow the noun they qualify, and agree in
Number and Definition.

1. Classes of Adjectives.

70. They are divided into :

a. Radical.

b. Derivative.

c. Compound.

(a) Radical Adjectives.

71. These are not numerous, and express some simple, natural,
or inherent, quality, such as size, shape, colour, or nature. They
are radical words and are not derived from other roots.

A complete list is given, with their inflexions, in the Table, § 76.

(b) Derivative Adjectives.
(i) Verbal Adjectives.

72. Verbal Adjectives are the Passive Past Participles of verbs,
ending in -an, or -san.

They express the result of the action of the verb.

3-2

ACCIDENCE

Examples,

'adeisan

clean

from

'adei

clean

hagaksan

straight

hagaji

straighten

furan

open

fur

open

hedan

closed

hed

wanaksan

good

wanaji

make good

dameyan

finished

damei

finish

(ii) Noun Adjectives.
73. These are formed in four ways.

(1) by the suffix -leh (possessing, containing).

Examples,

garadleh sensible from garad

uskagleh dirty „ uskag

arleh speckled „ ar

blyoleh containing water ,, blyo

(2) by the suffix -la (deprived of).
garadla foolish from garad
indala blind „ indo
degala deaf „ dego

(3) by the suffix -ah (being, made of),
ghoriah wooden from ghori
birah of iron „ bir
farldah clever „ farld

Adjectives may be formed at will like the above from any noun
as required.

(4) by the suffix -ed (expressing origin).
Somalied Somali

Arabed Arab

Admed of Aden

baded of the sea from bad sea

'ano wlyiled rhinoceros milk, „ wlyil rhinoceros

sense
dirt
spot
water

sense

eyes

ears

wood

iron

cleverness

(c) Compound Adjectives.
74. Formed from two separate words :
(i) Noun and Adjective.
h6g-wein strong (hdg strength, wein

hunguri-wein greedy (hunguri throat)

great)

RADICAL ADJECTIVES 37

didid-badan sweaty (didid sweat, badan plenty)

af-badan sharp (af edge)

adeig-run hardy (adeig hardness, run right)

(ii) The 3rd person singular Present Perfect Indicative of
a verb, being really an adjectival Relative Clause.

nin ghora clerk, lit. a man who writes
fuli yaghan knowing how to ride
af yaghan interpreter, eloquent
la arka visible

an la arkin invisible

2. Inflexions of Adjectives.

75. Adjectives are inflected to agree with the nouns they
qualify in the following cases :

(i) in the plural number,

(ii) when the noun is defined by the article suffix -i (and in
certain cases -a),

(iii) in case (ii) the inflexion is different for masc. {guttural),
and fern, (dental) linking consonants (cf. § 34).

(a) Radical Adjectives.

76. The following general rules are followed :
(i) Plural. Reduplicate the first syllable,
(ii) | ("Article -ki, -gi, -hi. Add -a.

(iii)J [Article -ti, -di. Add -eid.

(iv) If the noun is defined with article, -a, the adjective
only agrees with it in number.

Note. The rule for the inflexions -a, -eid, (ii and iii) is
invariable.

But when qualifying plural nouns with the definite article (other
than the Reduplicated Plurals, as niman), adjectives may or may
not take the plural inflexion (cf. § 164). Thus,
nagihi waweina, or nagihi weina the big women,
askarrti hhunhhumeid, or askarrti hhumeid the bad soldiers.

When qualifying the Reduplicated Plurals, and all indefinite
plurals, the plural inflexion of the adjective is always required.
Examples, nimanki waweina
nago wawein
askarr hhunhhun

ACCIDENCE

5 S -a

di "!^ «3

■d.a

■rl d>

5 B

««-S -a-SS 3S2S:22

iil*&lil?l 1*1111

silo's 2 ? »».a'm'io

v< d ^

2 bo3

B J

is
ii

I 2 d

s3§ fe2« &?"SSI

S "3 F P * h

eS -3 <° <° 5 S

1 1 p * t g

12 02

«2s

5 5 ■ i 5 P £ I If - s 5 § 5 -3 « i* •? * h

?3\*lls3F&iiafcSsa3:3?g&

+3 2

C'2

bp a to

2 3 2 3-9 £

bog 3P

'£• « i 1 3
• « « fi S3

"2 CO

5§

3,3.2
" 5 2

a * d * 1 a 3

£.5

3 a>

.2p-3^o«-Ss*Sa

DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES

(b) Derivative Adjectives.

77. These are not usually inflected (except some Verbal adjec-
tives) when qualifying a plural noun, the inflexion entirely depending
on the definite article, suffix, and linking consonant.

(i) Verbal Adjectives.

78. The Inflexions are the same as for Radical Adjectives,
except that only some are reduplicated in the plural :

good

broad

stout

empty

absent

tied

clean

sing,
plur.

sing.

plur.

sing.

plur.

sing.

plur.

sing. \

plur.)

Indefinite, orDef.
Art. -ka, -ta

wanaksan

baladan

balbaladan

buran

burburan

madan

madmadan

maghan

hedan
hedhedan

safeisan

Def. Art. -ki

wanaksana

baladna

balbaladna

burra

burburra

madana

Def. Art. -ti

wanaksaneid

baladneid

balbaladneid

burreid

burburreid

madaneid

madmadana madmadaneid

maghana maghaneid

hedna
hedhedna

safeisana

hedneid
hedhedneid

safeisaneid

(ii) Noun Adjectives.
79. These are not altered in the Plural.

Classes (i), (ii), and (iii) (adjectives in -leh, -la, -ah), obey
the following rules :

1. If the qualified noun is defined by -a, or -i, the noun portion
of the adjective takes its proper article suffix -a.

2. After Article -a (guttural or dental) there is no further
inflexion.

3. After Article -i the terminal portion of the adjective is also
inflected :

(a) After Masc. (Gutt.) Link. Cons.

-ki, -gi, -hi -a is added

(b) After Fern. (Dent.) Link. Cons.

-ti, -di -aid is added

ACCIDENCE

garadkaleh

akhligaleh

Indefinite

(i) garadleh
sensible

akhlileh
sensible

oghonleh

knowing

uskagleh
dirty

baraleh

spotted

blyoleh

containing water

(ii) garadla garadkala

senseless

indala

blind

lugla

legless

haulla

unemployed

farldah

clever

Inflexions of Noun Adjectives
Art. -ka, -ta Art. -ki

Art. -ti

garadkalaha garadkalahaid

(iii)

birah
of iron

ghoriah
wooden

akhligalaha akhligalahaid

oghdntaleh oghdntalaha oghontalahaid

uskaggaleh uskaggalaha uskaggalahaid

barahaleh barahalaha barahalahaid

blyahaleh blyahalaha blyahalahaid

garadkalaa garadkalaaid

indahala indahalaa indahalaaid

lugtala lugtalaa lugtalaaid

haushala haushalaa haushalaaid

farldkaah farldkaaha farldkaahaid

birtaah birtaaha birtaahaid

ghorigaah ghorigaaha ghorigaahaid

The following have special plural forms :
'ajisah (sing, 'ajiskaah 'ajiskaaha 'ajiskaahaid
lazy \plur. 'ajisintaah 'ajisintaaha 'ajisintaahaid

gesiah (sing, gesigaah gesigaaha gesigaahaid
brave \plur. gesiyintaah gesiyintaaha gesiyintaahaid

80. The last class of Noun Adjectives, in -ed, have only one
inflexion.

When qualifying a noun with article suffix -i of any gender or
number they take -a.

The e is usually dropped.

COMPOUND ADJECTIVES 41

Examples, Somalied Somalida
Arabed Arabta

biladki Somalida the Somali country
afki Arabta the Arab language

81. It is impossible to give rules for the inflexions of these,
since as far as possible the necessity is avoided, by a separation into
the component parts, and the natives themselves are by no means
unanimous on the question.

The following examples, however, are given, being the few types
that I have satisfied myself about :
af badan sharp :

mindi af badan a sharp knife ; mindida af ka badan the

sharp knife ; or, mindidi af ka badneid
mindiyo afaf badbadan sharp knives
mindiyaha afafka badbadan, or, mindiyihi afafka
badbadna the sharp knives
hog wein strong :

nin, ninka, nag, nagta, hog wein a, or the, strong man,

or woman
ninki or nimanki, hog weina the strong man, or men ;
nagti hog weineid the strong women ; nagihi hog
weina the strong women.
af yaghan eloquent :

In adjectives like this the verb is conjugated and therefore
agrees in number and gender.

nin af yaghan an eloquent man
nag af taghan „ woman

ninki )

ninka I a^a Yagnan the eloquent man

nagti

nagta I afka taghan ,, woman

niman af yaghanin eloquent men
nago af yaghanin ,, women

nimanki i
nimankal a^^a yagbanin the eloquent men

nagihi )

nagahaf afka ya£han » women

42 ACCIDENCE

This adjective may be treated as one word, and take the
termination -ah, in which case it is inflected regularly like such
derivative adjectives :

afyaghanah, afyaghankaah, afyaghankaaha,

af y aghank aah aid.

(3) Comparison of Adjectives.

82. There is no inflexion for the comparison of Adjectives.
This want is supplied by the use of the particles ka more, more
than ; u, ugu most,

Examples, akhalkan akhalkas ka wein

This house is bigger than that house
mid ka wein la kali bring a bigger one
ki u wanaksana The best

ya ugu horeya ? Which is first of all ?

"is most," is usually translated by ba, sa.

kas sa wanaksan that is best

sadehhdas kan ba wein of those three this is the biggest

C. Verbs.

1. Conjugation.

(a) Moods and Tenses.

83. The Verb has four moods :

Imperative, Indicative,

Infinitive, Subjunctive.

Also, Verbal Adjective, or Past Participle, and Verbal Noun.

84. There are three Regular Conjugations, distinguished by the
form of the Verb root, and the formation of the Infinitive.

The Verb root is the 2nd person singular of the Imperative.
1st Conjugation. Root ends in a consonant.
2nd „ „ „ -o.

3rd „ „ „ -i.

The Infinitive is formed
in 1, by adding -i to the root.

2 and 3, by adding -n to the root.

VERBS

85. The following is a paradigm of the verb sheg (tell), a
regular verb of the 1st Conjugation.

There are four terminations for the Tense inflexions,
-a is used in the Present Indicative tenses.

-e „
-o „

Imperative
Verb Adjective
Verb Noun
Infinitive

Indicative :

Aorist
Preterite

Continuative Present
Continuative Past
Future Definite
Habitual Present
Habitual Past
Conditional

Potential

Subjunctive :
Aorist
Continuative

Future

Habitual

,, rast ,,

,, Potential tense.
„ Subjunctive mood.

sheg tell thou,

shegan told.

shegnin telling,

shegi to tell

lwa shega
wa shSgei
wa shSgeya
wa shSgeyei
wa shegi d6na
wa shegi jira
wa shegi jirei
wa sh&gi laha

an shege

I (usually) tell, I am to tell.

I told, have told, had told.

I am telling, intend to tell.

I was telling.

I am going to tell.

I am in the habit of telling.

I used to tell.

I would, or should tell,

I would have, or should

have told.
I may, might tell.

(hadi)an sh£go
(hadi)an shSgeyo

(If) I tell, told, had told.
(If) I were to tell, were
telling.
(hadi)an shegi ddno (If) I were, had been,

about to tell.
(hadi)an shegi jiro (If) I were, had been,

accustomed to tell.

86. The tenses fall into three classes,
(i) The Aorist, Preterite, and Potential Indicative, and the
Aorist Subjunctive, are simple or radical, and the terminations
are added directly to the root.

1 wa is a particle used frequently with the verb, and may take the plaoe of
a personal pronoun.

44 ACCIDENCE

(ii) In the Continuative tenses the terminations are,
-eya (or -aya, or -ahaya),
-eyei (or -ayei, or -ahayei),
-eyo (or -ayo, or -ahayo).
These are suffixed, in the 1st Conjugation apparently to the root,
but in the 2nd and 3rd Conjugations to the Infinitive.
The syllable ey is short and is not accented.

(iii) The third class consists of Auxiliary tenses, formed by
the Infinitive with an auxiliary verb.

87. In the 2nd Conjugation (verbs ending in -o), the -o is
often changed to -a in the Infinitive and other moods.

In the Simple tenses of this Conjugation, d is inserted between
the root and tense termination.

Examples, baro learn Infinitive baran

jdgso stop wan jbgsoda I stop

88. There are three persons in the Singular and Plural, and
two genders in the 3rd person singular.

The following are the variations in the four tense terminations
for the different persons.

Sing. 1.
2.

Present
Indicative

-a

f-ta
l-sa

Past
Indicative

-ei

r-tei
l-sei

Potential
Indicative

-e

r-te, -tide
1-se, -side

Subjunctive
-O

r-to, -tid
1-so, -sid

3 m.

-a

-ei

-e

-o

3f.

r-ta
l-sa

r-tei
l-sei

r-te
1-se

r-to
1-so

Plur. 1.

-na

-nei

-ne

-no

r-tan
1-san

r-ten
1-sen

r-tene
1-sene

r-tan
1-san

-an

-en

-ene

-an

In the 2nd person singular and plural, and 3rd person fem.
singular, t is used after a consonant,

s is used after i, e.g. in the 3rd Conjugation,
and in Continuative tenses of all Conjugations.

89. (b) Affirmative Conjugation.

I. sheg tell. II. gurso marry. III. samei make.

Infinitive.
shegi gursan samein.

AFFIRMATIVE CONJUGATION

Imperative.

Let me tell

Let me many

Let me make

Sing.

an shego

an gursado

an sameyo

sheg

gurso

samei

3 m.

ha shego

ha gursado

ha sameyo

3f.

ha shegto

ha gursato

ha sameiso

Plur.

an shegno

an gursano

an sameino

shega

gursada

sameya

ha shegan

ha gursadan

Indicative.
Aorist.

ha sameyan

I tell

I marry

I make

Sing.

shega

gursada

sameya

shegta

gursata

sameisa

3 m.

shega

gursada

sameya

3f.

shegta

gursata

samdisa

Plur.

shegna

gursana

sameina

shegtan

gursatan

sameisan

shegan

gursadan
Preterite.

samdyan

I told

I married

I made

Sing.

shegei

gursadei

sameyei

shegtei

gursatei

sameisei

3 m.

shegei

gursadei

sameyei

3f.

shegtei

gursatei

sameisei

Plur.

shegnei

gursanei

sameinei

shegten

gursaten

sameisen

shSgen

gursaden

sameyen

Confirmative Present.

I am telling

I am marrying

I am making

Sing.

shSgeya

gursaneya

samdineya

shegesa

gursanesa

sameinesa

3 m.

shdgeya

gursaneya

sameineya

3f.

shegesa

gursanesa

sameinesa

Plur.

shegena

gursanena

sameinena

shegesan

gursanesan

sameinesan

shegeyan

gursaneyan

samdineyan

ACCIDENCE

Sing. 1.

3 m.

3f.
Plur. 1.

Sing. 1.
2.

Plur.

3 m.

3f.

Confirmative Past

was telling I was marrying I was making
hegeyei gursaneyei sameineyei

shegeyei

shegesei

shdgeyei

shegesei

shegenei

shegesen

shSgeyen

I am going
to tell

shegi d6na

donta

d6na

dbnta

donna

ddntan

ddnan

gursaneyei

gursanesei

gursaneyei

gtirsanesei

gilrsanenei

gursanesen

gtirsaneyen

Future Definite.

I am going
to marry

gursan dona
,, ddnta
etc.

sameinesei

sameineyei

sameinesei

samdinenei

sameinesen

sameineyen

I am going
to make

samein dona
„ donta
etc.

Habitual Present.

I am accustomed I am accustomed

to tell to marry

shegi jira gursan jira

declined like " ddna " above.

I am accustomed

to make

samein jira

Sing. 1.
2.

Plur.

3 m.

3f.

Habitual Past.
I used to tell I used to marry

shegi jirei
shegi jirtei
shegi jirei
shegi jirtei
shegi jirnei
shegi jirten
shegi jiren

gursan jirei

etc.

I used to make
samein jirei
etc.

AFFIRMATIVE CONJUGATION

Conditional.

I should tell

I should marry

I should make

Sing. 1.

shegi laha

gursan laha

samein laha

shegi lahaid

etc.

3 m.

shegi laha

3f.

shegi lahaid

Plur. 1.

shegi lahain

shegi lahaiden

sh£gi lahaiyen

Potential.

I may tell

I may marry

I may make

Sing. 1.

an shege

an gursade

an sameye

ad shegtide

ad gursatide

ad sameiside

3 m.

ha shege

ha gursade

ha sameye

3f.

ha shegte

ha gursate

ha sameise

Plur. 1.

an shegne

an gursane

an sameine

ad shegtene

ad gursatene

ad sameisene

ha shegene

ha gursadene

Subjunctive.

ha sameyene

(Only found

in Subordinate Clauses.)

Aorist.

Sing. 1.

shego

gursado

samdyo

shegto, shegtid gursato,

sameiso,

gursatid

sameisid

3 m.

shego

gursado

sameyo

3f.

shegto

gdrsato

sameiso

Plur. 1.

shegno

gursano

sameino

shegtan

gursatan

sameisan

shegan

gursadan
Continuative.

samdyan

Sing. 1.

shegeyo

gursaneyo

samdineyo

shSgeso, shegesid gursaneso, -id

sameineso, -id

3 m.

shegeyo

gursaneyo

sameineyo

3f.

shegeso

gursaneso

samdineso

Plur. 1.

shegeno

gursaneno

sameineno

shegesan

gursanesan

sameinesan

shegeyan

gursaneyan

sameineyan

ACCIDENCE

Sing. 1. shdgi ddno
2. shSgi ddnto
etc. as " shSgo."

shegl jiro

etc.

Future.

gursan dbno

etc.

Habitual.

gursan jiro

etc.

samein d6no

etc.

samSin jiro

etc.

90. The following table gives all the types necessary for the
formation of the tenses of a regular verb :

Conjugation

Eoot

Engl.

Inf.

Aorist

Continuative Pres.

hel

get

heli

hela

heleya

so'o

walk

so'on

so'oda

so'6neya

III

give

sin

slya

sineya

The other Indicative, and the Subjunctive, tenses are formed by
changing final -a into -ei, -e, or -o.

91. (c) Negative Conjugation.

The Negative Particles are :

Imperative Mood, ha, or yan.
Indicative Mood, ma.
Subjunctive Mood, an.

Imperative* ha shdgin ha gursan ha samSin

Indicative :

Aorist*

ma shego

ma gursado

ma samSyo

Preterite

maan shegin

maan gursan

maan samSin

Contin. Pres.*

shSgi mayo

gursan mayo

samein mayo

Contin. Past

ma shdginin

ma gursaninin

ma samdininin

Fut. Def.*

ma shdgi

ma gursan

ma samSin

ddno

dono

Habit. Pres.*

ma shegi

ma gursan

ma samein

jiro

Habit. Past

ma shegi

ma gursan

ma samdin

jirin

Conditional*!
Potential J

maan shdgen

maan gur-

maan samd-

saden

yen

NEGATIVE CONJUGATION

Subjunctive

Aorist

-anan shegin

-anan gursan

-anan samein

Continuative

-anan shdg-

-anan gursan-

-anan samein-

inin

Future

-anan shegi

-anan gursan

-anan samein

d6nin

ddnin

Habitual

-anan shegi

-anan gursan

-anan samein

jirin

Notes,

(i) Only the tenses marked * are conjugated, the remainder
having one form of the verb for all persons.

(ii) The Personal Pronouns are only used with the following
negative tenses :

Imperative, Preterite and Conditional tenses of the Indicative
Mood, and the Subjunctive tenses.

In other tenses of the Negative Conjugation no pronouns are
used.

(iii) In the Present Continuative tense, mayo (am not) is con-
jugated like an auxiliary verb.

(iv) In the Subjunctive tenses, the negative particle, -an, and
the pronouns are added as suffixes to the conjunction, or conjunctive
particle.

Imperative.

Let me not tell

Let me not marry

Let me not make

Sing.

yanan shegin

yanan gursan

yanan samein

ha shegin

ha gursan

ha samein

3 m.

yanu (or yu)

shdgin

gursan

samein

3f.

yanei (or yai)

shegin

gursan

samein

Plur.

yanan shegin

yanan gursan

yanan samein

ha shdgina

ha gursanina

ha sameinina

yanei (or yai)

yanei (of yai)

shegin

gursan

samein

ACCIDENCE

Indicative.

Aorist.

{Conjugated like Aorist Subj. Affirmative.)

I do not tell

I do not marry

I do not make

Sing.

ma shego

ma gursado

ma sameyo

ma shegto

ma gursato

ma sameiso

3 m.

ma shego

ma gursado

ma sameyo

3f.

ma shegto

ma gursato

ma sameiso

Plur.

ma shegno

ma gursano

ma sameino

ma shegtan

ma gursatan

ma sameisan

ma shegan

ma gursadan

ma sameyan

Continuative Present.

I am not telling

lam not marrying

I am not making

Sing.

1.
2.

shegi mayo
shegi mayso (or

gursan mayo

samein mayo

maysid)

etc.

3 m.

shegi mayo

3f.

shegi mayso

Plur.

1.
2.
3.

shegi mayno
shegi maysan
shegi mayan

•

Future Definite.

(The Auxiliary verb is declined as the Negative Aorist
tense of 1st Conjugation.)

I am not going to I am not going to
marry
ma gursan ddno

tell

Sing. 1.

ma shegi ddno

ma shegi dbnto

(ddntid)

3 m.

ma shegi ddno

3f.

ma shegi d6nto

Plur. 1.

ma shegi dbnno

ma shegi ddn-

tan

ma shegi ddnan

I am not going to
make

etc.

ma samein
ddno

etc.

THE CONTINUATIVE TENSES

Habitual Present.

I am not accus-

tomed to tell

tomed to marry

tomed to make

Sing.

ma shegi jiro

ma gursan jiro

ma samein jiro

ma shegi jirto

ma gursan jirto

ma samein jirto

(jirtid)

etc.

Conditional.

I should not tell

I should not marry

I should not make

Sing.

maan shegen

maan gursaden

maan sameyen

maad shegten

maad gursaten

maad sameisen

3 m.

mau shegen

mau gursaden

mau sameyen

3f.

maai shegten

maai gursaten

maai sameisen

Plur.

maainu sheg-

maainu gursa-

maainu samei-

nen

maaidin sheg-

maaidin gursa-

maaidin samei-

ten

sen

maai shegen

maai gursaden

maai sameyen

92. The Derivation of the Continuative tenses.
In § 86, three alternative types were given for the Continuative
tense terminations,

-eya, -aya, -ahaya.

These are added to the Infinitive of the verb, but in the 1st Con-
jugation the final -i of the Infinitive is lost.

-ahaya is the form used among Dolbohanta :
wa tegahaya I am going
wa so'onahaya I am walking
wa slnahaya I am giving

-aya is the form used by the tribes of the North Coast and
Western Somaliland:

wa tegaya, wa so'onaya, wa sinaya.

-eya, which is pronounced quite short, and nearly like -ya, is
used by the Central tribes, such as Habr Yunis and Western Habr
Toljala :

wa tegeya, wa so'dneya, wa sineya.

The last two are contracted forms of the first, which is really a
compound tense, in which the auxiliary verb, ahai be (modern aho,

4—2

52 ACCIDENCE

q.v.) is used, with the Infinitive of the principal verb, as in the case
of compound tenses.

In the Negative tenses this is more clearly seen, and here the
1st Conjugation retains the -i of the Infinitive.

The negative tenses of ahai are used as a separate word with
the particles ma, or an :

shSgi mahayo, or shdgi mayo I am not telling
(for ma-ahayo)

In the past tenses the ma may be separated :

yeli mahain (for ma-ahain)] I was not doing,
or, ma yeli aham J or, I would not do

These are contracted by Ishhak tribes into
yeli main, or ma yelinin

The Subjunctive Mood is similarly formed :
hadanu yeli ahain)
or, hadanu yelinin J ^ he will not do.

93. (d) Interrogative Conjugation.

The Interrogative particle is ma, which, when combined with
Personal Pronouns, becomes mi.

The Conjugation is otherwise the same as the Affirmative.

Indicative :

Aorist mian shSga P mian gursada P mian sameya P

Preterite mian shSgei P etc. etc.

Contin. Pres. mian shSgeya P

„ Past mian shdgeyei P

Future Def. mian sh§gi ddna P

Habit. Pres. mian shegi jira P

„ Past mian shegi jirei P

Conditional mian shSgi laha P

(e) Negative- Interrogative Conjugation.

94. Here the negative particle used is an.

No tense is declined except the Conditional, which is the same
as in the simple Negative form.

FIRST CONJUGATION

Indicative

Aorist
Preterite
Contin. Pres.
Contin. Past
Fut. Def.

Habit. Pres.
„ Past

mianan shSgin ?\
mianan shegin ?J
mianan shdginin ?\
mianan sheginin ?J
mianan shegi dbnin P

mianan shegi jirin P I
mianan shegi jirin ? I

mianan mianan
gursan ? sameln ?
mianan mianan

gursaninin ? samdininin P

Conditional mianan shegen ?

mianan
gursan
ddnin ?

mianan
gursan
jirin ?

mianan

mianan
samSin
ddnin ?

mianan
sam£in
jirin P

mianan

gursaden? sameyen?

2. Peculiarities and Irregular Verbs of the Three Conjugations.

(a) 1st Conjugation.

95. These verbs have the root ending in any consonant,
aspirate, guttural aspirate (gh or kh), or "aim" or 6.

The following changes take place in certain letters when they
occur together :

1 followed by t become sh.

n, after 1 or r, is often assimilated to either of the latter.

t, after ', gh, kh, hh, 6, and i, becomes d.

Examples,

dil kill.

hel get, yel do, dagal fight
Aorist.

Sing. 1.

„ 2.
Plur. 1.

„ 2.

dir

dirir

jir

dila
disha
dilla
dishan

hela
hesha
hella
heshan

yela
yesha
yella
yeshan

dagala
dagasha
dagalla
dagashan

send... 1st Plur. Aorist

fight...

be ...

dirra, or dirna
dirirra, or dirirna
jirra, or jirna.

ACCIDENCE

ra'

accompany.

..2nd

sing. Aorist

wad ra'da

da'

fall

j» >>

„ da' da

dagh

graze

>j >>

„ dagh da

bagh

fear

j> »>

„ bagh da

bahh

>> >>

„ bahhda

jehh

tear

>> >>

„ jehhda

ild

forget

j» >>

„ iloda

fadl

sit (cf. § 10

>> >>

„ fadida

Verbs ending in n, change n to m when it is preceded by two
short syllables and the inflexions begin with a vowel.

warran give the news dagalan fight

Infin. warrami dagalami

Aorist. Aorist.

Sing. 1. wan warrama wan dagalama

,, 2. wad warranta wad dagalanta

96. In the case of Polysyllabic verbs, of which the last syllable
is short and contains the vowels a, o, u, these vowels are dropped
in the Continuative Tenses, and in those persons of all Simple
Tenses in which the inflexion does not begin with a consonant, i.e.
in 1st and 3rd masc. sing, and 3rd plur.

g becomes k before a vowel or t.

Examples,

Boot

Infin.

Aorist

Contin. Pros.

arag

see

arki

arka

arkeya

dulun

cheat

dulmi

dulma

dulmeya

durug

move

durki

durka

durkeya

gdgol

make the bed

gfcgli

g6gla

gbgleya

hadal

talk

hadli

hadla

hadleya

hurud

sleep

hurdi

hurda

hurdeya

khatalan

err

khatalmi

khatalma

khatalmeya

ghosol

laugh

ghosli

ghosla

ghosleya

jSdal

whip

j&dli

jddla

jedleya

makhal

hear

makhli

makhla

makhleya

orod

run

ordi

orda

ordeya

rehan

pledge (pawn)

rehmi

rehma

rehmeya

Examples of Conjugations of the above,
arag see hadal talk dulun cheat makhal hear

FIRST CONJUGATION

Aorist Indicative.
Sing. 1. arka hadla dulma makhla

„ 2. arakta hadasha dulunta makhasha

Plur. 1. aragna hadalla dulunna makhalla
2. araktan hadashan duluntan makhashan

Present Continuative Indicative.
Sing. 1. arkeya hadleya dulmeya makhleya

„ 2. arkesa hadlesa diilmesa 'makhalesa

Plur. 1. arkena hadlena diilmena makhalena
,, 2. arkesan hadlesan dulmesan makhalesan

97. The following verbs (all containing the vowel a) change a
into e or i in the Infinitive and the Continuative Tenses :

Root. Infin.

tag go tegi

gal enter geli

ka' get up ke'i

da' fall, or rob di'i

na' hate ni'i

2gama' sleep gam'i

bahh go bihhi

dahh travel dihhi

nahh be astounded nihhi

tahh put in line tihhi

Exc. nahh be fat nahhi

dagh save dighi

daba' imprint dabi'i
The following make Infinitives like the 3rd Conjugation :

da leave dein daya deineya

la slay lein laya leineya

98. Verbs ending in 6, require b after the root in all inflexions,
except those beginning with a consonant.

d is used for t in the inflexions.
Infin.
'ato be tired 'atobi

gabo be old gabobi

ghabo be cold ghabobi

hallo be lost hallabi

1 makhal retains the a in these persons.

2 Participle gama'san asleep.

8 The forms of the Contin. tenses of these verbs must be noticed. Cf . § 92.

Aorist Indie.

Contin. PreB. Indie

taga

t6geya

gala

g61eya

ka'a

k6'eya

da'a

dl'eya

na'a

ni'eya

gama'a

gam'eya

bahha

3bahhaya

dahha

3dahhaya

nahha

nihheya

tahha

tihheya

nahha

nahheya

dagha

digheya

daba'a

dabi'eya

Aorist.

Continuative.

'atoba

'atobeya

gaboba

gabobeya

ghaboba

ghabobeya

hallaba

hallabeya

ACCIDENCE

Infin. Aorist

Continuative

haso

converse

J hasobi hasoba
1, hasawi hasawa

hasobeya

hasaweya

ilo

forget

ilobi iloba

ilobeya

karo

defend

karebi kareba

kar^beya

'olio

be hostile

'ollobi 'olloba

'ollobeya

hambarc

> fall heavily

hamba- hamba-

hambaro-

robi roba

beya

mado

be black

madobi madoba

madobeya

weido

be lean

weidobi weidoba

weidobeya

malo

get possession malobi maloba

malobeya

Aorist Indie.

Sing. 1.

wan ildba I forgel

wad ildda

Plur. 1.

weinu ilona

weidin ilodan

99.

tag (go), is irregular in the Preterite Indicative.

Sing. 1.

wan tegei I went

wad taktei

3 m. wu tegei

wei taktei

Plur. 1.

weinu tagnei

weidin takten

wei tegen

da' (fall, rob) forms either

de'ei, or da'ei, in the Preterite.

Its Aorist Subjunctive is

inan d'o.

Verbs

in -ahh conjugate the Preterite as follows.

Example,

bahh go

Sing. 1.

wan bahhai I went

wad bahhdei

3 m.

wu bahhai

3f.

wei bahhdei

Plur. 1.

weinu bahhnei

weidin bahhden

wei behh6n

OLL

100. The verb oil (lie, be in, dwell), is irregular in the Present
and Past Perfect Indicative.

Imperative oil dwell

Infinitive olli

Indicative :
Aorist
Preterite
Contin. Pres.
„ Past
Fut. Def.
Habit. Pres.
„ Past
Conditional

Subjunctive :
Aorist
Continuative

al I dwell (Neg. ma al)

il I dwelt (Neg. ma ollin)

611eya I am dwelling, I intend to dwell

dlleyei I was dwelling

olli ddna I am going to dwell

olli jira I am accustomed to dwell

olli jirei I used to dwell

611i lalaa I would dwell, or would have dwelt

inan olio that I may dwell

inan 611eyo that I may dwell

Aorist Indie. Preterite Indie.

Sing. 1. al il

2. tal til

3 m. yal yil

3 f. tal til

Plur. 1. nal nil

2. talin tillen

3. yalin yillen

Note that the consonants denoting the persons are prefixed to
the verb, and that there are no personal endings in these tenses
(except in 2nd and 3rd plur.).

The Negative form of the Present is the same as the Affirmative.
ma al I do not dwell
ma tal

etc. etc.

(b) 2nd Conjugation.

101. In this Conjugation the root ends in o, and the Infinitive
is formed by adding n, but in a great many cases the o is changed
to a.

This change may also take place in both Simple and Con-
tinuative tenses.

ACCIDENCE

In the Simple tenses d is added to the root, before adding the
tense terminations, but in the 2nd pers. and 3rd pers. fern. sing, the
d is lost, being assimilated into the t of the termination, and in
the 1st pers. plur. the d is dropped before the n.

Table I.

102. The o in the Simple tenses is long, or at least as
accentuated as the preceding syllable.

The consonant before the o is, h, sh, k, g, j, or ', or y.

Infin.

Aorist

Continuative

amahho

borrow

amahhdn

amahhdda

amahh6neya

ashtako

complain

asktakdn

ashtakdda

ashtakdneya

gajo

be hungry

gajdn

gajoda

gaj6neya

gasho

put on

gashdn

gashoda

gashdneya

harrago

swagger

harragbn

harragdda

harrog6neya

riyo

dream

riybn

riyo da

riydneya

so'o

walk

so'on

so'oda

so'6neya

tasho

consider

tashdn

tashoda

tash6neya

tuko

pray

tukdn

tukoda

tuk6neya

Table II

103. These are Attributive Verbs formed by adding o to an
adjective.

In conjugation o is changed to a, which is long in the Simple
tenses.

Infin.

Aori8t

Continuative

ado

grow angry

adan

adada

adaneya

bislo

become ripe

bislan

bislada

bislarieya

damo

be completed

daman

damada

damaneya

dowo

approach

dowan

dowada

dowaneya

fogo

go far

fogan

fogada

foganeya

hhumo

become bad

hhuman

hhumada

hhumaneya

idlo

come to an end idlan

idlada

idlaneya

mergo

be entangled

mergan

mergada

merganeya

shishlo

grow fat

shishlan

shishlada

shishlaneya

weino

grow big

weinan

weinada

weinaneya

SECOND CONJUGATION

Table III.

104. Verbs ending in so, which is preceded by a consonant, or
in hho, have the vowel of the Simple tenses short, but it may or
may not be changed to a.

Infin.

Aorist

Continuative

badso

badson

badsoda

bads6neya

be plentiful

bahhso

bahhson

bahhsoda

bahhsdneya

escape

buhso

buhsan

biihsada

buhsameya

be full

bukso

buksan

biiksada

buksaneya

be cured

dafso

dafson

dafsoda

dafsoneya

exchange

'ehho

'ehhon

'6hhoda

'ehh6neya

be partial

g&rso

giirsan

gursada

gtirsaneya

marry

hubso

hubson

hiibsoda

hubs6neya

ascertain

ghaibso

ghaibson

ghaibsoda

ghaibs6neya

take your share

ghallohho

ghallohhon

ghallohhoda

ghallohh6neya

be bent

ghobso

ghobson

ghobsoda

ghobs6neya

seize

Ibso

Ibson

Ibsoda

lbs6neya

buy for yourself

j6gso

jbgson

jogsoda

j6gs6neya

shop

sehho

sehhan

sehhada

sehhaneya

sleep

tirso

tirson

tirsoda

tirs6neya

count for yourself

In the verbs of this class the Aorist and Preterite tenses are
found very frequently in a contracted form, in the 1st and 3rd
masc. sing, and 3rd plural, the terminations being -sha, -shan, or
-sa, -san, etc.

ACCIDENCE

Example,

Sing. 1.
2.

3 m.
3f.

Ibso buy

A wist Indicative.

wa Ibsha
,, Ibsota
„ Ibsha
., Ibsota

I buy

Plur. 1.
2.
3.

wa Ibsona
,, Ibsotan
., Ibshan

Aorist. Preterite.

Similarly, badso makes badsha, badshei

,, ghaibso „ ghaibsha, ghaibshei

„ bahhso „ bahhsa, bahhsei

„ gtirso „ gursa, gCirsei

„ bukso „ buksa, buksei

Table IV.

105. In the following verbs o is preceded by, b, d, d, f, gh,
kh, 1, n, r, s. These drop the o in the Simple tenses, except in
2nd pers. and 3rd fem. sing, and 1st plur., in which the vowel
usually appears as short a in 2nd and 3rd fern., and as o in 1st plur.

In all persons the d of the Simple tenses becomes t, except after
gh, kh.

It, as usual, becomes sh.

Example, haiso have got

Aorist Indicative.
wa ha'ista I have got wa haisona

,, haisata

haisatan

„ ha'ista

»»

haistan

„ haisata

Infin.

Aorist

Continuative

bagho

baghan

baghda

baghaneya

be afraid

baro

baran

barta

baran6ya

learn

dalo

dalan

dasha

(dal6neya)

be born

damlno

daminon

daminta

(damln6neya)

be surety

degeiso

degeison

degeista

degeisdneya

listen

difo

difon

difta

difdneya

strike

SECOND CONJUGATION

In fin.

Aorist

Continuative

dimo
die

diman

dinta

dimaneya

diso dison

build for yourself

dista

disdneya

d6no

look for

ddnon

d6nta

ddndneya

doro

choose

doron

dorta

dordneya

dumo

hide yourself

duman

dunta

dumaneya

dabbalo

dabbalan

dabbasha

dabbalaneya

swim

fadiso
sit down

fadlson

fadlsta

fadis6neya

farahhalo farahhalan

wash your hands

farahhasha

farahhalaneya

garo

understand

gar an

garta

garan6ya

haiso
have got

haison

haista

hais6neya

hedo

tie on yourself

hedon

hedta

hed6neya

hiro

shave yourself

hiron

hirta

hir6neya

ghado ghadon
take for yourself

ghata

ghad6neya

ghobo

catch

ghobon

ghobta

ghob6neya

j&so

turn yourself

j&son

jesta

j6s6neya

jldo

hurry on

jldan

jlta

jldaneya

maido

be washed

maidon

maidta

maid6neya

naso

take a rest

nason

nasta

nas6neya

nokho

nokhon

nokhda

nokhoneya

return

sameiso sameison
make for yourself

sameista

sameisoneya

ACCIDENCE

Infin

Aorist

Continuative

sido

sidon

sita

sid6neya

carry, wear

slso

slson

slsta

sls6neya

pay for

weidlso

weidlson

weidlsta

weidls6neya

ask for

lukho

lukhon

lukhda

lukh6neya

gulp

The Irregular Verbs, imo, odo, ogho.

106. These verbs are declined irregularly in the Simple tenses,
with the same peculiarity as the verb oil.

Note. The root from which the Simple tenses of olio are formed is
related to the regular verb yefl call, and also a verb yafl, found in songs :

Examples, dabyera tehhdo yada ba.

"The little song I sing is like a shower of rain."

Yan sidi danabka yedei.
"I spoke like the lightning."

Imperative

imo come

(odo)1 say

ogho know

Infinitive

iman

odan

oghdn

Adject.

—

Noun

imad-ki

—

oghdn-ti

Indie. Aorist

imada

idahhda or

idahha

aghan

Preterite

imi

idi, or idahhei

ighin

Contin. Pres.

imaneya

odaneya

oghaneya

„ Past

imaneyei

odaneyei

oghaneyei

Fut. Def.

iman dbna

odan ddna

oghdn dbna

Habit. Pres.

iman jira

odan jira

oghdn jira

„ Past

iman jirei

odan jirei

ogh6n jirei

Conditional

iman laha

odan laha

oghdn laha

Potential

imade

idahhde or

idahhe

oghade

Subjunctive :
Aorist imado idahhdo oghado

Continuative imaneyo odaneyo oghaneyo

1 Instead of the Imperative oflo, the word den is used.

THIRD CONJUGATION

Aorist Indicative.

Sing. 1.

imada

idahhda, or idahha

aghan

timada

tidahhda, or tidahha

taghan

3 m.

yimada

yidahhda, or yidahha

yaghan

3f.

timada

tidahhda, or tidahha

taghan

Plur. 1.

nimadna

nidahhna, or nidahha

naghan

timadan

tidahhdan, or tidahhan

taganin

yimadan

yidahhdan, or yidahhan

yaghanin

Preterite Indicative.

Sing. 1.

imi, or imid

idi, or idahhei

ighin

timi, or timid

tidi, or tidahhdei

tighin

3 m.

yimi, or ylmid

yidi, or yidahhei

yighin

3f.

timi, or timid

tidi, or tidahhdei

tighin

Plur. 1.

nimi, or nimid

nidi, or nidahhnei

nighin

timaden

tidahhden

tighinen

yimaden

yidahhden, or yidahhen

yighinen

The Aorist Subjunctive of imo, and odo, is declined like the
Indicative, with the Subjunctive terminations, o and an.
inan imado hadan idahhdo

inad timado, etc. hadad tidahhdo, etc.
The Aorist Subj. of ogho is regular : oghado, oghato, etc.
The Negatives of the Aorist Indie, and Conditional are regularly
formed, in the former by using the Aorist Subj., and in the latter by
replacing the Aorist terminations by en ; but in the verb ogho the
Pres. Indicative is unaltered.

I do not come ma imado I would not maan imaden
I do not know ma aghan have come
All other Negative forms are regular.

107. These verbs all end in -i or -ei, and form the Infinitive
by adding -n. In the Simple tenses i becomes y for euphony
before the tense terminations which do not begin with a consonant.

108. Certain Participles are irregular :
ingeji dry Part. ingegan

wan&ji make good
hagaji make straight
ghoi make wet

dried,
wanaksan good
hagaksan straight.
ghoiyan wetted

ACCIDENCE

109. Certain verbs in i are conjugated like the first Conjuga-
tion, adding -yi in the Infinitive. These take -d instead of -t in
the 2nd and 3rd fern, persons.

Root

Infiri. 1st

pers. sing.

2nd pers. sing. Indie.

<affi

pardon

'afflyi

'afflya

'affida

'aflfiyeya

ahdi

swear

ahdlyi

ahdiya

ahdida

ahdlyeya

akhri

read

akhrlyi

akhriya

akhrida

akhriyeya

<ai

curse

'aiyi

'a'iya

'a'ida

'aiyeya

'ari

ebb

'arlyi

'ariya

'arida

'ariyeya

awawi

. dream

awawlyi

awawiya

awawida

awawlyeya

bakhti die

bakhtlyi

bakhtiya

bakhtida bakhtlyeya

bari

beseech

barlyi

bariya

barida

barlyeya

bari

be safe, well

barlyi

bariya

barida

barlyeya

dai

look

dalyi

daiya

daida

dalyeya

'ei

cry

'elyi

'eiya

'eida

'elyeya

'eri

drive away

'erlyi

'eriya

'erida

'erlyeya

fadl

sit, dwell

fadlyi

fadlya

fadfda

fadlyeya

fori

whistle

fdrlyi

foriya

fdrida

fdrlyeya

gabei

sing

gabeyi

gabeya

gabeda

gabeyeya

haji

make a pil-
grimage

hajlyi

hajiya

hajida

hajlyeya

cry

oiyi

oiya.

oida

oiyeya

silei'

be tortured

silSi'yi

silSi'a

sil&'da

sildi'yeya

(d) The Irregular Verbs alio, laho, wah.

110. aho (be), is an Irregular Defective Verb of doubtful
conjugation. It has the same peculiarity in the Present Indicative
as the other Irregular Verbs, inasmuch as it places the Personal con-
sonants t, n, at the beginning of the word.

Imperative
Infin.

Indicative :
Present
Past
Future

Affirmative Tenses.

aho be

ahain

wan ahai I am

wan aha I was

wan ahain ddna I am going to be

AHO

Habit. Pres.
,, Past
Conditional
Potential
Subjunctive

wan ahain jira
wan ahain jirei
wan ahain laha
an ahade
inan ahado

I usually am
I used to be
I should be
I may be
that I may be

111. It is only irregular in the Infinitive and Indicative.
There are no Continuative tenses.

Past.

I am wan aha I was

wad ahaid
wu aha
wei ahaid
weinu ahain
weidin ahaiden
wei ahayen

112. When aho is conjugated negatively, it is only irregular in
the Present Indicative.

Present

Sing.

wan ahai

wad tahai

3 m.

wu yahai

3f.

wei tahai

Plur.

weinu nahai

weidin tihin

wei yihin

Neg. Pres.

Indie.

Neg. Past. Indie.

Sing.

miihi I

am not

maan ahain I was not

miihid

etc.

3 m.

maaha

Neg. Conditional

3f.

maaha

maan ahaden I should not be

Plur.

miihin

maad ahaten

maihidin

etc.

maaha

Neg. Subjunctive

inanan ahain that I may not be
etc.

113. This verb is used independently as in :

na's bad tahai you are a fool

nin 'ajis bu aha he was a lazy man

askari ban ahain jirei I used to be a soldier

But it most frequently occurs combined with adjectives, especially
participles.

Such adjectives are pluralised in the Plural persons.

hedan tied wein large

k. 5

66 ACCIDENCE

Present Indicative Affirmative.

Sing. 1. wa hSdnahai I am tied wa weinahai I am large

2. „ hedantahai „ weintahai

3 m. ,, hedanyahai ,, weinyahai

3 f. ,, hedantahai „ weintahai

Plur. 1. „ hedhedannahai „ waweinnahai

2. „ hedhedantihin „ waweintihin

3. „ hedhedanyihin „ waweinyihin

Present Indicative Negative.

Sing. 1. ma hedni I am not tied ma weini I am not large

2. ma hednid ma weinid

3 m. ma hedna ma weina

3 f. ma hedna ma weina

Plur. 1. ma hednin ma weinin

2. ma hednidin ma weinidin

3. ma hedna ma weina

Past Indicative Affirmative.

Sing. 1. wa hedna I was tied wa weina I was big

2. „ hednahaid „ weinahaid

3 m. „ hedna . „ weina

3 f . ,, hednahaid „ weinahaid

Plur. 1. „ hedhednahain „ waweinahain

2. ,, hedhednahaiden „ waweinahaiden

3. „ hedhednahayen „ waweinahayen

Past Indicative Negative.

Sing. 1. maan hednahain maan weinahain

I was not tied I was not big

etc. etc.

114. The adjectival roots, 6g (knowing), ja'al (liking), ogdl
(agreeing), are similarly conjugated with aho, in the Present and
Past tenses.

Pres. Affirm. Past Affirm.

wa dgahai I know wa dgaha I knew

„ ja'alahai I like „ ja'alaha I liked

„ ogblahai I agree „ ogdlaha I agreed

LAHO 67

Pres. Negative Past Negative

ma dgi ' I do not know maan bgahain I did not know

ma ja'alihi I do not like maan ja'alahain I did not like

ma ogdlihi I do not agree maan ogblahain I did not agTee

Other tenses are formed according to the 2nd conjugation from
the verbs,

ogho know (q.v.)
ja'alo like
ogdlo agree

After adjectives ending in a, h, 6, the t of the Personal in-
flexions is changed to d.

wa lugoladahai she is legless
wa garadl§hdahai she is sensible
wa dddahai it is near

115. The verb laho (possess), is conjugated like aho.

Affirm.

Negative

Imperative

laho

Infinitive

lahafn

Indicative :

Present

wa lehahai

ma lihi

Past

„ laha

ma lahain

Habit. Pres.

„ lahafn jira

ma lahafn jiro

,, Past

„ lahafn jirei

ma lahafn jirin

Future

„ lahafn ddna

ma lahafn ddno

Conditional
Potential

„ lahafn laha ]
an laha.de J

maan lahaden

Subjunctive

inan lahado

Affirmative.

inanan lahain

Present

Past

Sing. 1. wa

, lehahai I possess

wa laha I

lehdahai

„ lahaid

3 m. „

lehyahai

,, laha

3f. „

lehdahai

„ lahaid

Plur. 1.

lehnahai

„ lahain

lehdihin

„ lahaiden

lehyihin

„ lahayen

I possessed

1 The 1st Sing. Present Negative is contracted into mOJi, or mflyl.

5—2

ACCIDENCE

Negative.

Present

Past

Sing. 1.

malihi I do not possess

ma(an) lahafn

I did not

possess

malihid

etc.

3 m.

malaha

3f.

malaha

Plur. 1.

malihin

malihidin

malaha

116. Uses of laho.

This verb is made up of the root leh (possessing), and aho (be).

In the Indicative the tenses of aho are conjugated in full,
preceded by leh; but other tenses are contracted, as if from the root
laho.

laho literally means "have possession of," "own."

gel badan ma lehdahai P have you many camels ?
nag ma lehdahai ? have you a wife ?

[hai (have, hold), could not be used in these examples.]

The root alone is used in the following expressions :
aniga leh, adiga leh it is mine, it is yours

etc. etc.

daktarka leh, 1 • , , * ,

or daktarki bu lehyahai ) ll hehn& to the doctor
nin ba leh it belongs to someone

Other idiomatic meanings :

mahhad lehdahai P what have you to say ? what do you
mean ? what is the matter with you ?

wuhhu lehyahai, ddni mayo, he means, he does not
want to.

laba rubod ban ugu lehahai, I am owed two rupees
by you.

The Past Indicative is used as an auxiliary with an Infinitive, to
form the Conditional tense of verbs.

wa t6gi laha I should go

WAH

It may also govern substantival sentences, introduced by in :
malihi inan ku ra'o, it is not my business to go with you.
inad berrl takto bad lehdahai, you ought (have) to go
to-morrow.

117.

wan.

The verb root wan is conjugated as an irregular defective verb,
and is used as an auxiliary verb, meaning, "fail," "be unable,"
"cannot find."

It is only conjugated in the Present and Past Indicative, and
in one tense of the Subjunctive.

Indicative.

Sing. 1.
2.

Present

wahya, waiya, wai
weida

I fail

wahyei,
weidei,

Past

waiyei, wai
wei

3 m.
3f.

wahya, waiya, wai
weida

wahyei,
weidei

waiyei, wai

Plur. 1.
2.

weina
weidan

weinei
weiden

wahyan, waiyan, wai

Subjunctive.
Sing. 1. waiyo
2. weido

wahyen

, waiyen, wai

3 m.
3f.

waiyo
weido

Plur. 1.
2.

weino
weidan

waiyan

Exampl

^(cf. §§146, 195, 274

note),

iman waiya
so'on wai
shakhein waiyen
hadad tegi weido
hadeinu gadi weino
biyo mesha ka weina
ghori ka wein wa wai
mahhad u iman weida
wa wai
la wan

I, or he, cannot (or will not) come

I, he, or they cannot (fail to) walk

they would not (failed to) work

if you fail to go

if we fail to reach it

we cannot find water there

I cannot find larger wood

why don't you come ?

I, he, or they cannot find it

one cannot find it, it cannot be found

70 ACCIDENCE

118. (e) The Passive Voice.

There is no Passive Voice in the conjugation of the Somali
verb.

It is translated in two ways :

(i) by the Past Participle and the verb aho, cf. § 113 ;

(ii) by the Indefinite pronoun la, with the 3rd pers. masc. sing,
of the Active voice of the verb.

Here la is identical in meaning and construction with the French
pronoun on, and means "they," "people," "one."

Examples,

wahha la yidi it is said

wahhba lagu ma falo nothing is done with it

lei shegei I was told

la na ghobs6neya we shall be caught

In neither case can the Instrument be expressed. If required,
the Instrument must be expressed as the Subject :
ninkan igu diftei I was struck by this man (this man struck me).

3. Derivative Verbs.

119. These are, Intensive, Reflexive, Attributive, Causative,
and may be formed from either nouns, adjectives, or verbs.

120. (a) Intensive verbs express an emphatic, intensified or
repeated action, and are formed by reduplication of the simple
radical verb. These all belong to the 1st Conjugation.

Examples,

lab

fold

fur

open

goi

cut

ddn

want

gur

pick up

hed

tie

jehh

tear

sheg

tell

lablab fold up] i.e.

furfur unfold J many folds

gogoi cut up in pieces

d6nddn look around for

gurgur pick up all

hedhed tie up, pack up

jehhjehh tear up

shegsheg repeat word by word

DERIVATIVE VERBS

121. (b) Reflexive verbs imply doing something to or for oneself,
or may be passive in meaning. They are formed by adding -o or
-so to a noun or verb (words ending in i always take -so).

These are all of the 2nd Conjugation.

Examples,

fadl

sit

fadlso

seat yourself, sit down

j&g

wait, be

jbgso

halt, stop

jed

turn

jSso

turn yourself

hub

be sure

hubso

ascertain, assure yourself

bar

teach

baro

learn

gar-ti

justice

garo

understand

amahh-di

loan

amahho

borrow

d6n

want

ddno

find for yourself

bagh

fear

baghho

be afraid

dor-ki

choice

doro

choose

jld

pull

jldo

hurry on

maid

wash

maido

be washed, wash yourself

sid

carry

sido

carry for yourself, wear

ghad

take away

g'hado

take for yourself

hir

shave

hiro

shave yourself

hed

tie

hedo

tie on to yourself

ghob

take

ghobo

catch, take hold of

ghobso

j> >>

hai

have, keep

haiso

have got, keep for your-
self

ghaib-ki

ghaibso

take your share

Ib-ki

price

Ibso

buy, sell

samei

make

samdiso

make for yourself

gur-ki

marriage

gurso

marry

kahhai

take, lead

kahhaiso

take to yourself

give

slso

pay for

weidl

ask

weidlso

ask for yourself

122. (c) Attributive verbs are formed by adding -o to an
adjective or participle, and are conjugated according to the 2nd
Conjugation, the o being changed to a in all tenses and moods.
This o gives the meaning of "become," and not "be," the latter
being translated by aho.

Examples,
'ad white 'ado become white

ACCIDENCE

bisil

ripe, cooked

bislo

become ripe, cooked

near

dowo

approach

gab

short

gabo

become short

hhun

bad

humo

become bad

fbg

far

fbgo

go to a distance

shilis

fat

shishlo

become fat

Distinguish between the following tenses :
wa hhtinyahai it is bad
wa hhumada it becomes bad
wa hhumaneya it will become bad

fardahaiga ma shishla, my ponies are not fat.
farduhu meshatan ma shishlado, ponies do not get fat here.
hadi mlyi lo kahhayo wa shishlaneya, if they are taken to the

jungle, they will get fat.

123. (d) Causative verbs imply the causing of an action or
production of a state or attribute in some object. They are formed
(i) by adding -i, or -si (-si always to a word ending in -i) to any
noun or verb, (ii) by adding -ei to an adjective. They are all
transitive verbs of the 3rd ^Conjugation.

Examples,
shakhei work shakheisi make to work

dambeisi put behind
'absi cause to drink

ghaibsi divide in shares
gabi
amtisi
daldli
hababi
radi
badi
durki

Where the last letter of the radical is a guttural it is usually
altered to j.

Examples,

dagh graze daji

bagh fear baji

j6g wait jdji

ingeg be dry ingeji

dambei

be behind

'ab

drink

ghaib

gab

be short

anr&s

be silent

dal61-shi

hole

habab

loss

rad-ki

track

bad

be plentiful

durug

move

shorten

make silent

perforate

cause to lose

follow the track

increase

remove, cause to move

cause to graze
frighten

stop (transitive)
cause to be dry

PARTICLES

hagag

be straight

hagaji

make straight

wanag

goodness

wanaji

make good

wereg

go round

wereji

cause to go round

also

ghabo

be cold

ghabdji

make cold

Verbs formed from adjectives :

'ad

white

'adei

whiten

bisil

cooked

bislei

cook

kulul

hot

kululei

make hot

adag

hard

adkei

harden

fbg

far

fbgei

put afar off

dan

all, complete

damei

finish

The Verbs mentioned in

§ 97 alter a to e :

gal

enter

geli

insert

ka'

awake

ke'i

awaken, arouse

D. The Particles.

124. Particles are used in Somali to correspond to various
English parts of speech, but cannot be actually translated, except
by reference to the context of the sentence in which they occur.
They cannot stand by themselves, but only in conjunction with
other parts of speech, nor are they subject to any inflexions of any
kind.

They may either have reference to a verb (Verbal Particles), or
they may correspond to conjunctions (Conjunctive Particles).

The Verbal Particles may correspond to certain adverbs or
prepositions.

The Conjunctive Particles may serve to introduce a principal or
subordinate sentence, or they may act as links between two co-
ordinate sentences or parts of speech.

1. Verbal Particles.

125. (a) Adverbial Particles.

wada altogether, completely

kala apart, separately

si that way

so this way

These may be used with any verb.

ACCIDENCE

Examples,

fardihi wada kena

la wada ghadei

kala durka

kala dufo

kala goi

si so'o go on

si j&so turn that way

si gal go in

so wada kahhai

bring all the ponies
they are all removed
move apart, separate
stretch out
cut apart

so so'o

so jSso

so gal

come on
turn this way
come in

bring all

Other Adverbial Particles are :

ha, yan, ma, an. Negative Particles. Cf. §§91, 145.

ma. Interrogative Particle. Cf. §§ 94, 145.

wa, ba, ya. Affirmative Particles. Cf. §§ 138 — 144.

Further idiomatic meanings of si and so should be noticed

si means "continue" an action

si shakhei continue to work

si baro continue to learn

so means " begin " to do something, or " go and " do... .

so ardri hdlaha go and water the flocks

so Ibso go and 'buy for yourself

so safei go and clean

126. (6) Prepositional Particles (ku, u, ka, la).

ku at, in, by means of, for
blyo galaska ku snub
ged bu ku hedna
'el bu ku da'ei
ga'anta ku ghobo
hadig ku hed
gel bannu ku dlrirra

u on account of:
mahhad u taktei P
to (a person) :
sirkalki u tag
Farah u gei

pour some water into the glass

he was tied to a tree

he fell into a well

hold with your hand

tie with a rope

we fight for camels

what did you go for?

go to the officer
take to Farah

PARTICLES 75

ka from, across, concerning :

mdsha ka kali come from that place

mSsba ka taga go away from there

ka ghob pour away

ka goi cut off

debbda ka talab go across the nullah

muska ka bdd jump over the fence

wanbas wabhba ka garan I understand nothing about

mayo that

la together with :
na la ra' come with us

wa ku la badleya I am talking with you

2. Conjunctive Particles.

127. (a) Introductory Particles.

s6, or sbo perhaps :
so magaladu jdga perhaps he is in the town

so garan maysid P don't you understand ?

mala, malaba (lit. thought) probably :
mala wa ararei he has probably run away

bal. The meaning of this is impossible to express. It is used
in the following constructions,

(i) With Imperative : bal kali well, come

bal an 6go let me look, then
(ii) With the particle in, introducing an indirect question :
weidi bal inei fdgtabai ask if it is far

(b) Conjunctive Particles.
iyo and (coupling two substantives)
o and (coupling two clauses).

-na and, also, (a suffix, usually introducing a fresh sentence)
-se but (a suffix).
ama, mise, either, or

.„a I these usually require the Subjunctive mood,
badi if J

Examples,

Farab iyo aniga, Farah and I.

6rod o s6 ghad, run and fetch it.

wa adagyahai o lagu goin kari mayo, it is hard and cannot be cut.

76 ACCIDENCE

adiguna mahhad ddnesa P and what do you want ?

isna wa t6gei, he too has gone.

dabed6dna, and afterwards.

wa jdgei, ninkuse ararei, 1 was there, but the man ran away.

am a tag am a j6g, either go or stay.

ma shegtei mise ilddei P did you tell or forget?

inad takto ban ddneya, I want you to go.

hadu yimado, i kali, if he comes, come to me.

E. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions.

128. With the exception of the radical particles given in the
last section, these parts of speech are represented in Somali by
substantival expressions.

129. Adverbs of Quality and Manner :
ain-ki kind, sort
ainkan, ainkas like this, like that
si-di manner

sida, sidas, or sas so, thus

si is also used with an adjective, forming an abstract substantive :

si wanaksan good manner

si hhun bad „

si 'ajis lazy „

Such expressions with the particle u become adverbial.
Examples,

si wanaksan u samei make properly

wa si 'ajis u shakheineya he is working lazily

The following nouns are commonly used in this way with u:

force, effort

hds downwards

miyir

prudence

dib backwards

khumati

straightness

hor forwards

kor

upwards

ghunyar slowness

CT J„„

also the verb root dakhso hurry

Examples,

ad u heji

hold tight

miyir u fill

ride carefully

dib u j6gso

stand back

dakhso u tag

go quickly

ADVERBS 77

130. Adverbs of Time and Place :

Time : gor-ti, kol-ki, mar-ki, had-di, wa-tfi. b6ri-gi, gelin-ki.

Place : mel-shi, hal-ki, hag-gi.

Time.

this time

gortan, kolkan,

another time mar dambe

markan

now

iminka, aminka

often

gor badan,
mar badan

now at once

haddan

sometimes

mar mar

now therefore

haddaba

again

mar kaleh

then

gortas, kolkas,
markas

at no time

kolla

soon

gor do

first

horta

later on

haddd, haddoto

once

kol, gor

before

kolki hbre, marki
hdre

twice

laba gor

afterwards

kolki dambe, marki
dambe, dabad6d

yet, still

wfcli

formerly

kol hbre, wagi hdre,

never

wdligi

b6rigi hdre

always

gor walba

Place.

here

halkan, meshan

above

dusha

this way

haggan

beneath

hbsta

there

halk as, halka, meshas

in front

h6re, horti,
ka hdre

that way

haggas

behind

dambe, ka
dambe, ka
daba

yonder

halkd, haggd

inside

gudaha

near

mel d6

outside

dibadda

far

mel f 6g

aside

ges

somewhere

mel, melun

on that side

gesta

everywhere

mel walba

around

harero

nowhere

mella

in the middle

dehhda

(For hours, days, months, etc., see Appendix.)

ACCIDENCE

131.

Interrogative Adverbs.

of what sort ? ainma P

how ? side P

how much ? inte P

why ? mahha u P (cf. § 195)

when ? gonna P

at what time ? hadma P

how often ? Imisa gor P

how long halkyo gonna P

where ? halke? hagge P melma P me P meyei P medei P

where
how far ?

inte?

132.

Prepositions.

The simple prepositions (to, for, from, with, etc.) are represented
by the Particles (cf. § 126).

Other prepositions are represented by Adverbial Nouns, the word
governed being placed in the possessive (cf. § 201). This may be
done by using the adverb alone, with the governed word following it
in the possessive position, as

sidi na's like a fool

gorti dagalki at the time of battle

Or the adverb is used with the possessive adjective, as

as, like

at the time

before

after

until

since

near to

far from

over, on

under

in front of

and,
except

akhalka hortlsi in front of the house
jbniad gudaheda inside a bag

sidi outside dibaddlsi

of gorti, kolki, marki beside gestisi

hortlsi

dabadlsi

hadyo inti

halkyo gorti

agtlsi

fdgtlsi

dushlsi

hdstlsi

hortlsi

mahai

around harerodlsi

between, among dehhdlsi

opposite

beyond

on this side of

instead of

for the sake of

behind

within

without laan

hortlsi

ka shish6i

ka sdkei

meshlsi

awadlsi

damblsi

gudahlsi

133.

interjections

Relative Conjunctions.

when

gorti, kolki, marki

until

hadyo inti, inti

while

inti

since

halkyo gorti

before

intan (= inti-an, negative)

where

meshi, halki, haggi

as much as

inti

sidi

Interjections and Salutations.

Interjections.

war

man.

, sir

woman, miss, madam

134.

Examples,

war, 'ss ka tag ! go away, man !

na, aya tahai P who art thou, woman ?

warya ! is used to draw attention.

-6 is added as a suffix to Proper Names in calling out to persons.
warya, Libano ! Hi ! Liban !
ha yes
maya no

hoi hoi ! a shout to attract attention
jog ! an exclamation of astonishment
Wallahh ! by God !

Sga, Wallahh ! lit. means " look, by God ! "
dega ! lit. means " listen !"

Wallahhi, iyo Billahhi, iyo Tallahhi. An Arabic oath
haurarsan all right

ha ahato so be it

watahai very well (lit. it is)

yelkis that's his business, never mind

'ss ka da let be

'ss ka eg look out

Illahhi mahaddi thank God
Illahhi ba 6g God knows

ko, kodi, haiye yes, well ?

80 ACCIDENCE

135. Salutations.

Nabad Peace

Greeting Beply

1 ma nabad ba ? \ i wa nabad

or \ is it peace ? \ or it is peace

sd nabad mlya P ] I nabad weiye

ma nabad gh6botaP have you wa nabad ghobta I have

peace ? peace

amahhad sh6gta P what do you nabad ban shega I tell peace

tell?

3 ma bariden P are you safe ? ba, barinei yes, we are

safe

sid6 tahai P how are you ?

'ss ka warran give news of yourself

mesha ka warran give news of the place

ma bukta P are you sick ?

ma buksanesa P are you getting better ?

ma ladantahai P are you well ?

wa ka si dara I am worse

1 The formal salutation.

2 The colloquial, informal greeting, " How do you do ? "
8 Corresponds to "Good morning."

PART III. SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES.

A. The Structure of a Simple Sentence.
1. Order of Words.

136. The usual order of a simple sentence, such as a command
or statement, is

1. Subject. 2. Object. 3. Verb.
Examples,

O. V.

sor na si, give us fond.

0. V.

faraska korei, saddle the horse.

S. 0. l\

nin ba libahh dilei, a man has killed a lion.

137. Adverbs may be placed anywhere except last, Adverbs
of Time are usually placed first.

«. 0. V.

haddatan aurta rera, load the camels at once.

o. a. v.

faraska dakhso u so kahhai, fetch the horse quickly.

a. s. v.

markasa ninki yidi, then the man said.

s. a. o. v.

habarti ba habenki dambe akhalki Suldanka so ag martei,
the old woman on the following night passed near the Sultan's house.

a. s. o. v.

'ashodi dambe ya habarti barlyo donatei,

on the following day the old woman begged alms.

s. o. a. v.

ninka holihlsi Burao bu gSineya,
the man is taking his flocks to Burao.

82 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

138. 2. The Particles wa, ba, ya.

These particles are of such universal occurrence, and so essential
to idiomatic speech, that a correct understanding of their use is
necessary at the outset. No one meaning can be assigned to
them, as each may represent at one time a pronoun, at another a
definite or indefinite article, at another the verb "is," "are," and at
yet another time an adverb.

Their meanings may be divided into two classes :

(i) All three, wa, ba, ya, are Particles of Affirmation, just as
ma is a Particle of Negation or Interrogation.

wa draws attention to, and precedes, the verb,
ba, and ya (especially ba), draw attention to, and follow,
the subject.

(ii) ba, and ya (especially ya), may be conjunctive or ad-
verbial particles, often to be translated by "and so," "and then."
This usage is found in narratives.

139. (i) As Particles of Affirmation.

If used without either a personal pronoun or a particle, a verb is
considered abrupt.

Compare ba and wa in the following examples :

(Note. In these cases ba and ya are synonymous, and either
form may be used equally, but ba is preferred by Eastern and
Central tribes.)

1. nin ba yimi a man has come

2. nin wa yimi a man has arrived

3. Farah ba yimi Farah has come

4. Farah wa yimi Farah has arrived

1, 3 mean respectively that "it is a man that has come," and
that " it is Farah that has come."

2, 4 mean respectively that " a man (as expected, or ordered)
has arrived," and that "Farah (as expected, or ordered) has
arrived."

In the first case the information relates to the individual who
has come ; in the second case it relates to the arrival of some known
person.

In short, ba emphasizes the identity of the subject, while wa
emphasizes the meaning of the verb.

WA, BA, YA

140. This explains the fact that wa may be used with a verb
when no subject is expressed, and ba may be used when no verb is
expressed.

Examples,
wa imaneya
wa wanaksanyahai
sadehhdas ba wanaksan
ma Arab ba ?
nin ba la dilei
hdlihi wa la da'ei

he is coming

it is good

those three are the best

is he an Arab ?

a man has been killed

the flocks have been looted

hdlihi rag Musa Ismail ba ka da'ei

Musa Ismail's men looted the flocks

141. ba thus distinguishes the subject from the object where
otherwise it would be doubtful.

Examples,
nin libahh ba ghobtei
nin ba libahh ghobtei

a lion caught a man
a man caught a lion

142. Special uses of wa.

(a) wa assists or emphasizes the meaning of the verb, but
especially emphasizes an affirmation in reply to a question, ex-
pressed or understood.

ma imaneya ? ha, wa imaneya.

Is he coming ? Yes, he is coming.

ma garanSsa ? ha, wa garanSya.

Do you understand ? Yes, I understand.

(b) wa means "is," "are," where the complement is a noun or
numeral, and not an adjective.

wa nin hhun
wa shabel
wa afar
wa kan
wa ke?
wa kuma ?
wa inte P
wa mahai P

he is a bad man
it is a leopard
they are four
here he is
which is it ?
who are you ?
how much is it ?
what is it ?

6—2

84 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

(c) Where the complement of "is," "are," is an adjective, wa
is used, but the verb aho (be) is also used, suffixed to the adjective.

hadalkas wa hhiinyahai that arrangement is bad

la'agti wa 'ultistahai the money is heavy

sirkalka wa ogyahai the officer knows

wayahai, watahai all right, so be it

(d) When the Preterite tense is used with wa it becomes a
Perfect or Completed tense.

wa yimi he has come

wa arkei I have seen

143. Special uses of ba and ya.

(a) ba, or ya, emphasizes the identity of the subject, especially
in reply to a question expressed or understood.

ya ku la ra'eya ? Farah ba i la ra'eya.

who is going with you ? Farah is.

'id ma timi ? ha, Jama ba yimi.

has anyone come ? Yes, Jama has.

Suldan ba inan laha.

(there was) a Sultan (who) had a son.

(b) When the subject of a sentence is a numeral it nearly
always requires ba, or ya.

soddon ba joga thirty are present

laba ba maghan two are absent

imisa ba jbga ? how many are present ?

(Note. Tn the following cases only ba is used, and not ya.)

ma aur ba P is it a camel ?

ma Arab ba ? is he an Arab ?

ma kaigi ba P is it mine ?

ma isaga ba ? is it he ?

ma laba ba ? is it two ?

\a) in affirmative sentences, where the complement is an
adjective, ba may be used, but the verb aho, be, is not then
employed.

WA, BA, YA 85

In this case ba may give a superlative sense to the adjective.
Illahhi ba 6g God knows

nin ba maghan one man is absent

bahalaha ghar ba hhun some animals are bad

sadehhdas kan ba wanaksan this is the best of those three

(e) ba, used after the object of a sentence, has a distributive
meaning.

nin ba mid si give each man one

ain ba mel goniah diga put each kind in a separate place

kol ba nin keliah ha yimado let one man come at a time

(/) ba may give an indefinite meaning to a word of time or
place; or is used with a verb, meaning "at all."

mel ba ku jira it is somewhere or other

wahhba doni mayo I don't want anything at all

ha tegin ba don't go at all

walba every

labadaba both

sadehhdaba all three

wahhad doneso ba whatever you want

meshi ad takto ba wherever you go

kolba ad doneso whenever you want

144. (ii) As Adverbial or Conjunctive Particles.

ba and ya, in this sense, correspond to the English particles
"now," "and then," "and so." Their position in the sentence
has no relation to the subject, object, or verb, but follows the first
phrase in the sentence.

("Phrase" here includes both unqualified nouns, or nouns with their
attributes, whether adjective or relative clause, or adverbial expressions.)

ba is apparently not used except when the phrase is an un-
qualified noun, usually one which has already been referred to in
the preceding sentence.

ya is always used after an adverb, or adverbial expression.

The examples illustrating these are taken from the stories, q.v.
Suldanka nag bu gursadei, suldanki ba hajki ghobtei.

(p. 145, 1. 2.)

86 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

Kolkasei tidi, "Berka genyoda fnankaga." fnanki'ba
suldanki u yedei. (p. 146, 1. 7.)

" Galabtaan ku so mermero." Galabti ba inanki genyodi
fulei. (p. 146, 1. 9.)

Mas ba lei hedei, maskas ba igu imaneya, o i 'uneya.

(p. 150, 1. 21.)
Dararti dambe, ya suldanku yimi. (p. 146, 1. 3.)

Duhurki kolkei ahaid, ya wlyishi timi. (p. 148, 1. 11.)
t sago gedka hurda, ya shanti Inan u yimaden.

(p. 148, 1. 16.)

3. Simple Interrogative and Negative Sentences.

145. The same particle ma is used in both kinds of sentences.
There are certain differences in its several uses.
The Negative ma is placed as near to the verb as possible,
while the Interrogative ma comes before any pronoun or particle
qualifying the verb (cf. § 236).
Examples,

jblyo ma ku jiran ? is there any water in ?

\blyo ku ma jiran there is no water in

fwahh ma lagu slyei ? has anything been given you ?

\wahhba lei ma sin nothing has been given me

When joined to the personal pronoun the interrogative particle
becomes mi-, while the negative particle is unaltered.
Jmiad araktei P did you see ?

\maad arkin you did not see

("mill ku shegei P did he tell you ?

\i mau shegin he did not tell me

In both cases the pronoun is often omitted when the person
referred to is obvious from the context.

i ma shegin (he) did not tell me

maarkin, or maarag (I) did not see
burta ma arkesa P do you see the hill ?

wahh ma ddnesa P do you want anything 1

Interrogative ma may be separated from the pronoun by another
word. In this case ban, bad, etc. are used (see also § 229).
ma halka bu t6geya P Is it there he is going ?

ma ninkan bu ku diftei P is it this man that struck you ?

QUESTIONS

Where the subject of an interrogative or negative sentence is a
noun, it is placed first in the sentence. Generally, in interrogative
sentences the personal pronoun is required as well, but need not
be used.

'ollku ma ka bahhai ? has the army left ?

ninku miu arkei libahha ? did the man see the lion ?

manta sirkalku Burao ma ghob6neya P

is the officer going to Burao to-day ?

146.

sho.

Questions expressing surprise are introduced by sd or

Examples,

la'agta badan so ddni maysid ?

so garan maysid P

so ma garanesa P

don't you want all this money ?
don't you understand ?
surely you understand ?

Questions introduced by Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs
Examples,

ya ku sh§gei hadalkas ?

wa kiima ? aya tahai ?

ayad araktei P

ninmad u dlbtei ?

mahha ka da'ei ?

'id ma la dilei P

aderka muhhu aurkas ka

sis6neya P
abbaha mahha la yidahha P
idinma warakhdan Burao

gSya?
farasma buka P ma ainabka P
mahhan la'ag ugu siya?

mahhad ugu hedantahai

mesha ?
'ollku gormu Kirrit ka bah-

haya ?
hagge hdlahaiga ka takten P

who told you that story ?

who are you ?

whom did you see ?

to whom did you give it ?

what has happened?

is anyone killed ?

what will your uncle give for

that camel ?
what do you call your father ?
which of you will take this

chit to Burao ?
which horse is sick? the black?
why should I give you any

money ?
what are you tied there for ?

when does the force leave

Kirrit?
where did you leave my

animals ?

ninkakan hagge bu ku diftei P where did this man hit you ?

SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

where is the mare? where is

the bay?
where is the officers' camp ?

how far is Bohotle from here?

how long was he absent?

how many rupees did he pay

you?
how does the country lie

beyond that hill?
how is it on this side ?
how heavy is that bag ?
how deep is the well ?

gSnyadi mSdei? hamarku

mdyei ?
herodi siraklshu fadfda wa

hagge ?
halkiyo Bdhotleh intdi jirta?
intu maghana wa inte ?
Imisa rubod bu ku bihhlyei P

hagga burta ka shishei sidu

dulyahai P
burta ka sokei sidei tahai P
joniada 'uleiskeda wa inte?
'elka dererklsu wa inte ? (or

intu derada?)
bahalkan wa ainma P what sort of an animal is this ?

In Negative questions introduced by "why?" (mahha u P) a
special idiom is used with the verb wan (§§ 117, 195).
mahhad u ddni weida inad why don't you want to go ?
takto P

4. The Verbs of existence, and attributive verbs.

147. These Verbs (be, live, stay, dwell, grow, exist, lie, be found,
become) have an equal variety of corresponding Somali expressions,
as aho, oil, j6g, jir, fadi, laho, nokho.

(i) The Auxiliary verb "be" requires a complement in the
form of noun, adjective or pronoun.

(a) This may be translated simply by wa, or ba, as shewn
in the examples of those particles.

(b) Or it is translated by aho, which is used independently
when the complement is a noun, or is combined with an adjective
when the complement is the latter, and forms an Attributive verb.
In the latter case wa is required as well, but pronouns are never
used.

Examples,
nin wein ban ahai
na's bad tahai (contracted

into bat'hai)
nin fi'an miu aha ?
Somali mlihid

I am a big man.
thou art a fool

was he a clever man ?
thou art not a Somali

VERBS OF EXISTENCE 89

askari maaha he is not a soldier

tollma tahai ? of what tribe are you ?

wa wanaksanyahai he is good

ma wanaksana he is not good

la'agti ma 'ulustahai ? is the money heavy ?

148. (ii) It may refer to the presence or existence of an
object in a certain place.

(a) jdg is used when referring to animate objects.

Examples,
ninki ma jdga P is the man here ?

aurti haggasei jdgta the camels are there

ragu Imisa ba jdga ? how many of the men are

present ?

(6) jir is used of inanimate objects.

Examples,

wahh kaleh ma jira ? is there anything else ?

halkan mahha kii jira P what is there here ?

wahhba ku ma jir an there is nothing

biyo wa ku jiran there is water in

oil (literally lie) is often used in this sense :

sanadukhdi halkan tal the boxes are here

akhalkaiga bu yal *it is in my house

kitabki meska dushlsi yal the book is on the table

biyo badan ba yalin there is plenty of water

Examples,
tollma halkan yal ? what tribe lives here ?

Burao-einu nil we lived at Burao

hagge olli jirten P where used you to live?

fadi is used with same meaning (lit. sit, abide) :

Examples,

magalodaan fadlya I stay in the town

Berberu fadlya he stays in Berbera

hagge sirakishu fadida ? where do the officers dwell ?

(d) When referring to the existence of animals or plants,
laho (possess) is used.

90 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

Examples,

meshasa ugad ma lehdahai P

is there any game in that place ? (lit. does that place possess game?).

gerenuk iyo ddro bei lehdahai,

it possesses gerenuk and dero (or g. and d. are found there).

b'e'id malaha, there is no oryx there.

mel walba aus bei lehdahai, there is grass everywhere.

dareiga Nogashu bei lehdahai, the fig grows in the Nogal.

(vi) nokho become

'ss ka dig pretend

Examples,

suldan bu nbkhdei

he became Sultan

nag bu 'ss ka dfgeya

he is pretending to be

a woman

B. The Parts of Speech.

I. The Article.

149. A noun, which in English is qualified by the indefinite
pronoun, a, an, or some, any, is used in Somali in its simplest
form in an indefinite sense.

Suldan ba inan laha a Sultan had a son

ei ba 'efyeya a dog is barking

kursi wein ban ddneya I want a big chair

fardo ba imaneya some horses are coming

gddo ban hai'sta I have got some grass

hdlo ma lehdahai ? have you any flocks ?

la'ag malihi I have not any money

150. The Definite article suffix (§ 28) is used to define nouns in
a particular or general sense.

151. -i is always used for the definite article where -u or -a are
not required by the following rules.

152. -a (i) is used primarily in defining nouns, referring to
objects or persons actually present, or in front of the speaker.

sandukha ghad remove the box (which is in front of us)

bein bu shSgeya ninka the man is telling lies

Note. Where the noun in this sense is the subject of the sentence, it is
more usual to use the demonstrative adjective -an this.

DEFINITE ARTICLE 91

(ii) It is also used with a noun in a general sense when in the
objective case (§ 153, (vi)).

(iii) With Definite nouns which are possessive, or adjectival :

akhalki ninka the house of the man

inanki Suldanka the Sultan's son
nin magaloda a man of the town

even where the Possessive adjective is used ;

sirkalka ghalabklsi the officer's luggage

(iv) With nouns used adverbially :

galabta this evening Isninta on Monday

153. u is used in the following cases :
(i) With well-known persons or objects of nature.
Wadadku the Mullah (i.e. Mohammed Ab-

dallah)
Sirkalku the Officer (i.e. as a soldier would

say, referring to his own officer)
oghashu shirka fadida the headmen sit in council

ghorahhdu wa kuliishahai the sun is hot
rbbku wa gadeya the rain is stopping

(ii) With persons or things already referred to, and about which
one is talking, as in the following example :

A man brings a complaint that another man has stolen his
camel ; the judge may ask :

hashu ma jdgta ? is the camel here ?
or the man may say :

ninku wa ararei, the man has run away.

In this way it is used when referring to a character in a story
who has already been mentioned, as :

Suldanku, Inanku, habartu, etc.

(iii) It is also used with the Personal pronouns in the Emphatic
forms,

anigu, adigu, adu, etc. (§ 55).

(iv) When a noun is used in a general sense, referring to all

92 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

members of a class, it is used in English with no article, but in

Somali usually takes the article -u.

siraklshu 'ano halad ma ja'ashahai? do officers like camel's

milk?
naguhu wa hadal badanyahai women are great talkers.

(v) -u cannot be used with a noun which is qualified by an
epithet. In such cases -i, or -a, only are found.

oghashi Habr Yunis the H. Y. headmen
sirkalki hakinkaaha the judge-officer

(vi) -u is not used with a noun in the objective case. If a noun
in one of the above senses is objective, -a is used (cf. supra).
gorma la ghoboneya Wadadka ? when will the Mullah be

caught ?

154. The Definite Article may be used with any noun, numeral
or pronoun, and is often used together with the Demonstrative
Adjective and Possessive Adjective suffixes, q.v.

Where a definite- noun is qualified by a numeral, it is the latter
which takes the article, and not the noun :

labadi nin the two men

2. The Noun,

(a) Case's.

155. There are no case inflexions in Somali, and the relation
of a noun to the rest of the sentence must be recognised from its
position or the context.

156. A general rule for subject and object was given in the first
section on syntax, but this is subject to colloquial variation, where
the meaning is obvious from the context.

Generally, the subject may be distinguished from the object by

the gender and number of the verb, and pronoun, if the latter occurs,

but only in cases where both are different.

ninki nagti bu dilei the man killed the woman

nagti ninki bei dishei) . . ... , .

■ t • »-i- i. ■ j- u -f the woman killed the man

or ninki nagti bei disneij

Suldanki ba gartei nagtlsi and the Sultan recognised his wife.

berigi dambe ya inan, Suldan dalei, ya inanti arkei Afterwards

a son of a Sultan saw the girl.

CASES 93

ba, ya (§ 141) help to distinguish the subject.

dabku ya maska iyo hhaska bakhtlyei the fire destroyed the
snake and the fence.

Here the subject is also denoted by the article -u.

The special forms of the pronouns, wuhhu, etc., following the
subject, are used to make it clear.

'ollki Habr Toljala wuhhu dulei Ali Naldyah, the force of
H. T., they attacked the Ali Naleyah.

Dative.

157. Some verbs may have two objects, one being in the dative
case, or indirect object.

The usual order is to place the direct object before the indirect.

Parah warakhdi sirkalki bu slyei Farah gave the letter to the

officer
gddo faraska si give the horse grass

ninba toban-an dlbei I gave each man ten

Motion to a person is expressed by the particle u, but motion
to a place requires no particle, the place being translated as an
indirect object.

Ali u tag go to Ali

aghilki igu yimi the headman came to me

aurti Sirkalki u g£ya take the camels to the

Officer
Burao ban tegeya I am going to Burao

Ali hblihlsi rerklsi bu gSineya Ali is taking his flocks to his

family

158. Nouns may be used adverbially, as in the last two
examples, with verbs of motion or rest, or expressing duration of
time. But if they are abstract nouns expressing manner or quality,
u is required before the verb (see § 129).

Burao ban fadlya I stay at Burao

laba 'asho beinu so'onei we marched for two days

159. The Ablative is expressed by the prepositional particle
ka.

magalodan ka imi I have come from the town

94 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

'ollku shaleito meshan ka bahhai, the army left this place

yesterday.

The Possessive Case (cf. § 45).

160. Nouns are used adjectivally, following another noun which
they qualify, expressing origin, quality, value, use, space of time.

nin magaloda a man of the town

nin dagal badan a great man for fighting
dagalki shalei yesterday's battle

If the noun expresses material, profession, or nationality, it may

be made into an adjective by the suffix -ah (being).

sandukh birah a box of iron

nin Tomalah a Tomal

laba nin o sirkalah, ) „

,,, • i -i f two officers

or laba nm o sirakil J

ninki askarigaaha the soldier man

If it expresses the contents, or features, the suffix -leh is used.
balli blyoleh a " pan " of water

nin gadleh a bearded man

Features or clothes may be used alone descriptively.
nin san wein a big nosed man

gholidi gambo 'as the party in red puggarees
nagta maro 'as that woman in a red tobe

burta figh der that high peaked hill

161. The Partitive Case. " Some of," " any of," " one of."

The noun expressing the whole is either placed first in the
sentence, parenthetically, or follows the noun expressing the portion,
separated by the particle o.

ragu in yer ba jdgta a few of the men are here

sadehhdas ki u wanaksana wa ka of those three that is the

best one
aurtaida mid ba dintei one of my camels has died

wahh badan o hdlahaiga plenty of my animals

(b) Number.

162. The plural of nouns is used as in English, wherever it is
desired to express plural number, except after numerals.

CONCORD 95

naguhu wa hadal badanyahai women are great talkers

wa askarr hhunhhun they are bad soldiers

oghal bei nbkhdan they become headmen

aurti timi the camels have come

163. After numerals the plural number is only used in the case
of feminine nouns, except those ending in -o (cf. § 42).

laba nin two men afar 'asho four days

lehh nagod six women sadehh halod three camels

164. In the Accidence (§§ 34, 76) it was noticed that the
Guttural, and Dental, definite articles of the singular nouns are
changed in the plural to Dental, and Guttural, respectively, except
in the case of masculine monosyllables.

fas-ki

axe

plur.

fasas-ki

busta-hi

blanket

bustyal-shi

'asho-di

day

'ashoin-ki

muda'-i

fork

nmda'yo-di

sirkal-ki

officer

sirakll-shi

lan-ti

branch

lamo-hi

This is more noticeable in irregular plurals, as :

aur-ki he camel plur. aur-ti

aghil-ki headman „ oghal-shi or aghilin-ti

Arab-ki Arab-man „ Arab-ti

11-shi eye „ indo-hi

This is comparable with, and is no doubt related to, the Arabic
broken plurals, which are always feminine.

165. The plurals of the 1st class are true plurals, and adjectives
and verbs always agree with them in number.

fasaska wa hhunhhunyihin those axes are bad
sumanki dadera wa hallaban the long straps are lost

In all other plurals, the adjective and verb should agree with the
noun according to the form of the linking consonant alone, and not
in number.

96 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

Compare the following examples :

nagti wa imanesa (3rd fem. sing.) the woman is coming

aurki wa imaneya (3rd masc. sing.) the camel is coming

nimanki wa imaneyan (3rd plur.) the men are coming

nagihi wa imaneya (3rd masc. sing.) the women are coming

aurti wa imanesa (3rd fem. sing.) the camels are coming

Sirkalki ghalabklsi (3rd masc. sing.) the officer's baggage

gabaddi bokhorkeda (3rd fem. sing.) the girl's sash

Siraklshi ghalabkeda (3rd fem. sing.) the officers' baggage

genyadi wa tan (fem.) there is the mare

aurki wa kan (masc.) here is the camel

aurti wa tan (fem.) here are the camels

sanadiikhdi weineid halkan tal the big boxes lie here

(3rd fem. sing.)

jdniadihi madana wa ku jira the empty bags are in

(3rd masc. sing.)

oghal ba fadida (3rd fem. sing.) some headmen are sitting

Note. The following case of false analogy is interesting, as shewing how
in the Somali mind the article is the important factor to be considered in
the concord of nouns with adjectives and verbs.

fardihi (the horses) is often contracted to fardi. In the latter case the
feminine concord is most usual, as to the ear it appears that the article
suffix is -di, the original masculine suffix -hi having been lost.

Example,

fardihi wa ka'dleineya (3rd masc. sing.)!

- ,. i (ji • /o j e \ f the horses are trotting

fardi wa ka dleinesa (3rd fem. sing.) J °

166. The plural nouns, biyo, 'ano, gedo, nolo, timo, are

treated as true plurals.

biyo ma yalin there is no water

'anihi wa kuan here is the milk

wahhba (nothing) is usually considered plural :
wahhba ku ma jiran there is nothing there

167. Adjectives qualifying plural nouns, when used indefinitely,
usually agree in number (see note to Table in § 76).

nago wawein some big women

Yibruhu wa niman hhunhhun the Yibirs are bad men

CONCORD 97

168. When the noun is qualified by a numeral special rules for
concord apply.

If the subject is indefinite (the numeral having no article suffix)
the verb is used in the singular.

The masculine may always be used, but if the plural is feminine,
and would take a dental linking consonant if definite, the feminine
form of the verb may be used.

shan aur mlyigi ku bakhtlyei, or bakhtidei,
five camels died in the jungle.

laba nin ba yimi, two men came.

afar nago ba yimi, four women came.

If an adjective qualifies the noun as well, it is used in the
plural.

shan aur o hhunhhun ya bakhtlyei, five bad camels died.

If however the noun is definite, the verb may be either singular
or plural ; if it is singular it may agree in gender as with indefinite
nouns.

shanti aur mlyigi ku bakhtidei, or bakhtiyen,

the five camels died in the jungle.

Where the noun refers to persons, the verb is usually used in the
plural.

When the subject of the verb is a plural pronoun alone, or
when the pronoun wahhai is used, the verb is always plural.

The following examples are taken from passages in the stories
given in this book, and in Schleicher's Somali Texte.

shanti gabdod e kaleh wahhai ku diftan shan inan o hodanah,

the five other girls struck five rich young men.

shanti inan u yimaden, the five boys came to him.

labadas u sarr^yen, those two were in command.

wahha ugu yimi abahed iyo walalked,
there came to her her father and brother.

lehh aur ka hadei, six camels were left.

lehhdi aur, o lehh libahh 'unesa,

the six camels which six lions were eating.

shan iyo labaton nin, o habsiga kii jirei, wahhai ghaten...

twenty-five men, who were in gaol, took... (Schl. p. 13, 1. 12.)

sirkalka wuhhu direi askaro aur ku jogta,

the officer sent soldiers on camels. (Schl. p. 13, 1. 18.)

k. 7

98 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

markasa sagalki walalahed tashaden,

Then her nine brothers considered. (Schl. p. 22, 1. 18.)

afarti walalaaha ya tashadei,

the four brothers considered. (Schl. p. 29, 1. 21.)

labadi odei ya yidi, the two old men said. (Schl. p. 30, 1. 13.)

3. The Adjective,
(a) Grder and Syntax.

169. It has been seen in the Accidence (§ 69) that adjectives
follow the substantives they qualify, and are inflected to agree with
them in gender and number (§ 75).

170. When a noun is qualified by more than one adjective,
the second is coupled by the particle o (and).

kitab yer o mado a small black book

rag kaleh o wan&ksan other good men

dagahhanta wawein o 'ul'ulus the big heavy stones

The adjective is coupled by o, if the noun is also qualified by a
numeral. .

lehh halod o hhunhhun six bad camels

afar bakhalod o wawein four big mules

laba nin o Habr Yunis two 'men of the Habr Yunis

Note. When the word kaleh (other) is one of two epithets qualifying
a noun, it is coupled by e instead of o.

o kaleh has a special meaning. Cf. § 177.

Example,

lehh gabdod e kaleh six other girls,
but, lehh gabdod o kaleh would mean, six similar girls

Where nouns are used adjectivally they follow the same rule.

sadehh nin o askari three soldiers
todbba nin o sirakil seven officers

boghol, and kun, are treated adjectively also, and require o
following them when more than one hundred or thousand is
referred to.

laba boghol o askari 200 soldiers
sadehh kun o adi 3,000 sheep

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 99

171. Attributive verbs are formed from adjectives, by the
particle wa, and the verb aho, which is suffixed to the adjective
(see Conjugations, §114, and 142 (c)).

faraskan wa wanaksanyahai this horse is good
sandukha wa fududyahai the box is light

radadkan wa gabgaboyihin these tracks are old

ba may be used with the adjective, without aho, but gives a
superlative sense (§ 143 (d)).

kan ba wanaksan this is the good one

ushatan ba fudud this stick is the lightest

Adjectives in -leh, -la may be split up into their component
parts, the suffix being represented by the verb laho.

garad bu lehyahai he is sensible

oghbn bu lehyahai j ...

or wa oghbn lehyahai J he 1S W18e

garad malaha, ]

or wa garad an lahain } he 1S foollsl1

(6) Comparison of Adjectives.

172. The particle ka is used before the adjective, and means
"more than."

The object of comparison is treated adverbially, and is dis-
tinguished from the subject by its position, relative to the latter, in
the sentence.

The adjective, describing the quality in which the comparison is
made, is treated as part of the verb.

If the Subject of comparison is the subject of the principal verb,
it precedes the Object of comparison.

If the Subject of comparison is the object of the principal verb,
it follows the Object of comparison.

Types of simple Comparative Sentences.

S. Adv. 0. V.

rninkan halkan akhal bu diseya

(this man here a house he is building

rninkas halka akhal bu diseya

(.that man there a house he is building

7—2

100

SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

Adv.

jakhalkan
Ithis house

akhalkas

ka wein

than that house

(is) bigger

jninkan
(this man

akhalkas

akhal

ka wein bu diseya

than that house

a house

bigger he is building

{

akhalkas

akhal

ka wein so dis

than that house

a house

bigger build

jakhalkan
(this house

akhalkas

ma ka wein ?

than that house

(is it) bigger ?

jma

akhalkas

akhal

ka wein disesa P

than that house

a house

bigger are you building?

173. In simple statements of comparison, the verb aho may be
used with the adjective, or omitted.

kas ma kan gabanyahai ? is this shorter than that ?

ragakan ragas ma ka badanyahai P are these men more
numerous than those ?

ragas innagu ka badan, we are more than those men.

sanaddi h6re ragi j6gei, kana ka badan, there are more
people here now than last year.

In three of these examples the usual order is inverted, owing to
the subject being a pronoun, which is placed near the verb.

174. Certain words have a comparative meaning without the
particle ka.

dama better.

shiikhulka shukhul dama sameya, do better work than
that.

yerei make less kordi l make more( increase.
badi J

u yerei, make it less.

mushaharodaida ma i kordinesa ? will you increase my
pay?

175. ka may be used with certain attributive verbs, such as
fogo be far.

inad A. ka fogado ddni mayo, I do not wish you to go
further than A.

faraskagu faraskaiga ka ma der6yo, your horse is not faster
than mine.

SIMILARITY 101

176. The superlative may be expressed by sa ( = sida) or the
particle ba, or most commonly by u, or ugu.

wa sa wanaksan, it is best.

sa sa wanaksan, that is best.

sadehhdas kan sa der, | ^ ig j of thoge thrQQ

or kan ba der, J

waranka ba fudud, that spear is lightest.

fsagu wa ugu wanaksanyahai, he is the best of all.

ragakan ki u yera, the smallest of these men.

inanti ugu yereid, the youngest girl.

biladki Somalida hdlihi laga dofiya mahha u badan P of
the things which are exported from Somaliland, what is the chief?

177. (c) Similarity.

sida so, in the manner, as :
aurtayada sida aurti waweineid blyo badan dbni mayso,

our camels do not want so much water as the big ones.
wa wanaksanyahai sidadu o kaleh, he is just as good as

you.
Jama sida Abdi u wanaksanyahai, Jama is as good as Abdi.
sida u ma weina, sida kagi wahh badan ghadi mayo,

it is not so big, and will not carry so much as yours.

6 kaleh the same as :

bahalka wein aur 6 kaleh weyei, that big animal is just

like a camel,
dagahhas mid 6 kaleh, another stone like that.

leheg resembling :
gedkasa lehh aur bu lehegyahai, that tree is as high as

six camels.
bakhashi faraska bei lehegtahai, the mule is equal to

the horse,
kabahan ma iss-lehega, those shoes are not a pair.

iss ku or 'ss ku the same (equal to one another) (cf. § 250) :

kala different (cf. § 239).

These qualify adjectives or abstract nouns :

wa 'ss ku ib, they are the same price.

labadatan wa 'ss ku der, these two are the same length.

102 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

'ss ku mid, the same.

rakabyada wa kala hds, the stirrups are of different length.

sanadukhda wa kala 'uleis, the boxes are of different

weight.
wa kala wanaksan, they are not as good as one another

(are separately good).

Special idioms.

doliskas 'elka ma gadeya ? will that rope reach (be long
enough for) the well ?

aurkasa aurkaigi la h6g maaha, that camel is not so strong
as mine (literally, that camel is not of strength with my camel).

4. The Numerals.

178. The number of nouns qualified by a numeral and the
position of the latter has already been dealt with in the Accidence
(§§ 42, 47), and in the Syntax (§ 163).

The concord of adjectives and verbs with numerals is dealt with
in Syntax (§ 168).

179. The numeral in Somali is considered as a substantive,
and may take any of the suffixes. Nouns which in English are
qualified by a numeral are considered in Somali as qualifying that
numeral adjectivally (§ 170).

sadehhdas aur o hhunhhun those three bad camels

afartan nef these four animals

afartanka nef the forty animals

sagalkaigi aur my nine camels

180. When a numeral qualifies a pronoun, the possessive
adjective is used in Somali suffixed to the numeral.

labadlni you two

afartayada we four

lehhdddi they six

181. " One " when qualifying a noun is not translated.

one man nin

one animal nef

101 men bogh61 iyo nin

101 animals bogh61 iyo nef

PERSONAL PRONOUNS 103

k6 is only used in counting consecutively.
mid is an indefinite pronoun, = "one."

182. Fractions. In describing a fraction of anything the
Possessive Adjective is used.

half a bag jdniad badked

give me a quarter of the camel hashi wahhdeda i si

a third of that belongs to me inta dalolked ban lehahai

5. The Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives.
(a) Persons.

183. The 2nd persons, singular and plural, are each strictly
used according to the number of persons addressed. If only one
person is spoken to, the 2nd sing, must be used.

There are two forms of the 1st person plural,

-einu, innagu (possess, -en) (inclusive form) include the 1st
and 2nd, or 1st, 2nd, and 3rd persons ;

-annu, annagu (possess, -aya) (exclusive form) refer only to
1st and 3rd persons, and are not used when the 2nd person is
included.

Iliahhlna, annagunalllahhayaga, innagu Illahhenabu nokhda,
your God and our God is the God of both of us.

184. The pronoun of the 3rd person singular has masculine and
feminine forms. As the 3rd pers. fern. sing, and 3rd pers. plur. are
the same, there is no question as to which pronoun is to be used in
reference to a feminine plural. Where reference is made to a plural
noun with the masculine article, when the pronoun is used in the
presence of the noun, either singular or plural form may be used
(see § 164 sqq.).

(b) Simple Personal Pronouns.

185. The Subjective Personal Pronouns (§ 53) are usually
expressed with the verb, in addition to a nominal subject. They
may be in their simplest form -an, -ad, etc., suffixed to any word in
the sentence, or may be combined with the particles, wa, ba, ya,
in the forms wan, ban, yan, etc.

yan, yad, etc., and ya ? are often lengthened into ay an, ayad,
etc., and aya P or ayo P, but these seem to have no special meaning
or use.

104 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

186. When the simple form is attached to a word ending in a
vowel, this final vowel is usually dropped in speaking, especially
in the conjunctions gorti, halki, hadi, etc.

gortasu yidi then he said

inankuse gSnyu (genyo-u) lehyahai but the boy has a mare

gorm'u (gorma-u) yimada P when does he come ?

kolk'annu (kolki-annu) 'ollki aragnei when we saw the army

nagti Suldank'u (Suldanka-u) la he made friends with
sahhebei the Sultan's wife

187. As stated in Accidence (§ 54), wan, etc., is only used at
the beginning of a sentence, while ban, yan, etc., are never used
at the beginning but only in the middle, and usually as close to the
verb as possible.

wan, ban, yan, are not used in Dependent or Relative clauses,
the simple suffixed form only being found, attached to the con-
junction, or, in Relative Adjectival clauses, where there is no
relative pronoun, to the antecedent.

ninkad u yedei yimi the man you called has come

188. The objective pronouns (§ 60) are placed between the
subjective and the verb.

la'ag ban ku slneya I will give you money

gormu idin no (na-u) direi ? when did he send you to us ?

"it," "him," are usually omitted in Somali.

i si give it to me u gei faraska take%him the horse

(here u is the particle and not the pronoun, cf. § 125).

189. When there is more than one verb in a sentence whose
subjects are the same person, the pronoun is omitted with the
second verb as in English. But if the subjects of the two verbs are
different, the forms anna, adna, isna, etc., or aniguna, etc., are
used (§ 56).

gortasan ka daba so'odei o so ghobtei,
then I followed after him and caught him.

kolkasan so marei, isna halkasu si so'odei,
then I came this way, and he went on there.

190. The Emphatic forms (§ 55) may be used followed by the
simple pronouns or not.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS 105

anigu wa shakheineya I am working

anigu ddlada ban ka sha- as for me, I am working for
khelneya the Government

/ myself, etc., are translated by certain words meaning "self,"
with the Possessive adjective.
naf-ti life (ghud-di sole, single mhb-hi spirit)

anigu naftaida ku arkei I saw you myself

naftaidan ka shakheista I work for myself

annagu ruhhayaga magaloda we have seen the town our-
yannu so aragnei selves

191. To do a thing for oneself is expressed by the derivative
verbs in so (cf. § 121).

samei make sameiso make for yourself

Ibi buy Ibso buy for yourself

192. The compound forms wahhan, wahhad, etc., and
mahhan, mahhad, etc., are important (§§ 57, 58).

The Somali likes to be very careful that he has the listener's
attention, before he says what he has to say, and the forms
wahhan, etc., serve to introduce a quotation or statement of an
event, preparing the listener for the nature of the statement to
follow. Thus in quoting a remark, after several interjections,
as warya ! i degeiso ! kddi, he will proceed with, ninkasu yidi,
wuhhu yidi, . . . that man said, this is what he said, . . . and then will
follow what he really did say.

These forms may be used with any kind of verb.

gortasannu tagnei, wahhannu tagnei, Olesan,
then we went, this is where we went to, Olesan.

They are nearly always used with verbs such as ddn, malei.
wahhan ddneya, inan manta tago I want to go to-day
wahhan u maleineya, inu arari I think he is going to
ddno run away

193. The 2nd person of this compound form is used to
introduce instructions as to what a mau is to do, followed by the
Aorist indicative of the verb, as in the common expression to an
interpreter (cf. § 217).

wahhad tidahhda this is what you are to say

wahhad yesha this is what you are to do

106 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

194. mahhan, etc., are interrogative forms.

mahhad ddnesa P what do you want ?

mahhan y£la P what am I to do ?

195. Followed by u, ku, these pronouns mean, 'Why V 'This
is why.'

wahhas mahhad u tidi ? why did you say that ?

wahhan ku idi this is why I said it

mahhad u ddnesa hadig P what do you want rope for ? I

wahhan ku doneya, inan want it to tie up the things

ghalabka ku hedhedo with

If the verb after wahhan u, or mahhan u, etc., is negative,
the verb wah is used (see Conjugation, § 117).

mahhad igu sheg weida ? why do you not tell me ?

not, mahhad igu shegi maysid ?

wahhan kugu shSgi wai this is why I do not tell you

196. The pronoun iss is both Reflexive and Reciprocal,
wu iss dilei he killed himself

wa iss leineyan they are fighting together

iss is used with ku and ka in special idioms (§ 248).

197. The Definite Article suffix has already been dealt with in
the Accidence and Syntax (§§ 29, 151 — 154).

The Linking Consonant, which is necessary to all, has also been
described in the Accidence (§§ 24 — 27).

198. The three suffixes, Definite Article, Demonstrative and
Possessive Adjectives, may each be used alone, or any two or all
three may be attached to one noun.

The following are the possible combinations.
(a) Demonstrative and Definite Article (§31 (ii)).
The latter is attached without a linking consonant,
ninkanu, gSdkasa, kolkasi.

(6) Definite Article and Demonstrative (§31 (i)).

The Demonstrative when following the article takes a linking

IMPERSONAL PRONOUNS 107

consonant, which however is always k for masculine words, and t for
feminine words. Only the a form of article is used,
ninkakan, ghorigakan, gabaddatan.

The Possessive adjective always requires a definite article suffix,
except with names of relationship. The 1st and 2nd sing, and 1st
(exclusive) plur. are the only persons which take the linking
consonant.

ghalabkaiga, holahagu, ninkai, inantlsi, etc.

(d) Possessive and Definite Article and Demonstrative.
The Demonstrative may be added to the above.

aurkaigakan this camel of mine

shukhulklsakan this work of his

(d) Impersonal Pronouns.

199. All the suffixes may be used independently as pronouns
with the linking consonant k or t (§§ 62, 63). The Definite Article
may be attached to the Demonstrative or Possessive Pronoun.

ki weina the big one

kan ma aurkaigi ba P is this my camel ?

tan kaleh this other one

tasu wa mid that is one

kayaga ba wawein ours are the biggest

tlsi wa ta his is there
" There it is " is translated by wa ta, or wa ka.

200. All the suffixes have the same form whether attafthed to
a singular or a plural noun, but the Demonstrative and Possessive
Pronouns have special forms in the plural :

kuan, tuan ; kuer, tuer ; kuas, tuas ; kuaigi, kuagi, etc.

The plural form of the Def. Article pronoun is kuer, or kua, kui.

The latter may take the Demonstrative suffix, as kuakan,
kuakas.

(e) The Possessive Adjective.

201. The Possessive Adjective has certain special functions,
(i) It translates the Possessive case (§ 45).

ninki akhalklsi the man's house

habarta ninked the old woman's husband

108

SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

(ii) It is used with adverbial nouns to form Prepositions (§ 132).

sandukhi dushlsi on the top of the box

meska hostlsi underneath the table

joniada gudaheda inside the bag

Such possessives, used with adverbs alone, translate a personal
pronoun governed by a preposition.

hortlna in front of you

dehhddda between them

sidada like you

(iii) Where in English a personal pronoun is qualified by a
numeral, in Somali the numeral takes the possessive adjective,
labadayada we two

afartini you four

In the same way the possessive adjective is used with indefinite
pronouns (§§ 67 and 206).

intina k&leh the rest of you

The difference must be noticed between the examples,
labadaidi aur, or labadi aurtaidi my two camels
aurtaidi laba two of my camels

(iv) It is used with the following words :

run right bein lie

wa run it is right wa bein it is a lie

wa runtai I am right wa beintai I am lying

wa runta thou art right wa beinta thou art lying

wa runtls he is right wa beintis he is lying

wa runted she is right wa beintdd she is lying

wa runtSn we are right wa beint&n we are lying

wa runtaya we are right wa beintaya we are lying

wa runtin ye are right wa beintin ye are lying

wa runtbd they are right wa beintdd they are lying

(/) The Interrogative Pronoun and Adjective.

202. -e may be used either as a suffix (Interrog. Adj.) or as an
Interrogative Pronoun, with the consonants k and t.

akhalke P what house ?

ke ? which one ?

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 109

•ma is only used as a suffix (cf. § 65).
ninma ? what man ?

ninma ku shdgei ? what man told you ?

ya ? ay a ? ayo ? what ? who ? whom ? (cf. § 185).
ya ku slyei ? who gave it to you ?

ayad araktei P whom did you see ?

mahha ? what ? (objective).

mahhad donesa ? what do you want ?

mahhad ku falesa P what are you doing it for ?

-ma suffixed to a pronoun, means " which of ? "
idinma ? which of you ?

annama ? which of us ?

kuma ? who ? (impersonally)

203. The Possessive Pronoun and Possessive Interrogative
Pronoun may be formed with the verb root leh having (cf. § 116).

aniga leh it is mine (or ana leh)

isaga leh it is his

etc.

These are more idiomatic than wa kaigi, wa klsa.
yaleh ? kumaleh ? whose ?
faraskan yaleh P whose is this horse ?

(g) Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives.

204. (i) la is a pure pronoun, and is used to translate the
passive voice of the verb (see § 118).

205. (ii) Substantival words, "some," "any," "all," "alone"
(§§ 67, 68).

nin ba yimi someone has come

'id ma ku taghan P does anyone know you ?

wahh ma donesa P do you want anything ?

sadehh ghof ba dintei three persons have died

'idla unaccompanied, alone

halkan ghar ba yal some lie here

daur ba hadei some are left

daur iyo labaton twenty odd

110

SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

in rSg ba jdgta
inti saka timi
nin hebel
war, hebel O P

some men are here

those that came this morning

a certain man

you, what's your name ?

206. When used with a Personal Pronoun in a descriptive
sense, the Possessive adjective is suffixed (cf. § 201 (iii)).

intlna kaleh

gharkdda

ninki keligi tegei

annagu keligayaga sameinei

gidigdd, damantod

kulligeni

isagu goniglsi si so'odei

the rest of you

those few

the man went alone

we did it by ourselves

all of them

all of us

he went on separately

207. weli-gi never, is used in the same way with possessives.
weligai maan arag I have never seen it
weligln arki maysan you will never see it
weliga hau nokhon never do it again

208. "Some," "a few," etc., in a partitive sense are trans-
lated as follows.

intlna ghar ba hhun some of you are bad

inta barlska ba hadei, or thus much of rice is left
inta barlskaah

(iii) Indefinite Adjectives.

209. " Many," " little," " few," " other," " every," " all."
These are usually used qualifying an indefinite pronoun (only

badan and yer agree with the Definite Article).

wahh badan o barls la kali bring us plenty of rice

wahh ka yer i si give me less

rag badan
raga badan

ragi badna

fardo yer

nin un, mid un

inta kaleh aur gdniah u sara

fardu o dan

many men

all those men (i.e. those many

men)
the many men
a few horses

any man, anything at all
put the rest on a separate camel
all the horses

MOODS AND TENSES 111

wahh hoga o ragas a few of those men

in yer o sanadukhda a few of those boxes

nefka gonigaah that animal apart

210. The Indefinite Pronouns are made negative by the suffix
-na, but the verb is also used in the negative form.

ninna ma iman no one has come

'idna i ma arkin no one saw me

midna maan tabin I did not touch one

wahh is used with ba :

wahhba doni mayo I do not want anything

wahhba heli mayso you will get nothing

6. The Verb.

(a) The Moods and Tenses.

211. The Imperative Mood has only one tense, and expresses a
command, wish, or permission.

The 2nd pers. sing, is the Verb Root, from which are formed all
other parts of the verb.

The 2nd pers. plur. is formed by adding -a (2nd conjugation -da)
tag, taga; jogso, jogsoda; shakhei, shakheya.

For the other persons the Aorist Subjunctive tense is used, with
particles an (1st pers.) and ha (3rd pers.) in the Affirmative.
an tagno let us go

ha yimado let him come

212. The particle bal is very commonly used with the Im-
perative, but is hardly translatable.

bal en ego let me look then

bal kali come then

It is not used with the 3rd person.

213. The Negative Imperative may be emphasized by the
particle ba :

ha t6gin ba see that you don't go at all

or by weliga never

w£liga wahhas ha tabin never you touch that

112 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

214. The Infinitive is only used with auxiliary verbs,

ddn will jir be accustomed to laha would kar be able

wa ku shegi ddna I am going to tell you

halkas an fadlyl jirei that is where I used to live

{Note that the accent is placed on the last syllable of the Infinitive
before jir, and, in the 2nd and 3rd Conjugations, before laha.)

ainkas ma ghob6n lahaid P would you have done like that ?
ma so'on karta P can you walk ?

The auxiliary and principal verbs are treated as one, and are not
separated by any particles at any time.

ku ma arki karo I cannot see you

Somalidu ainkas ma ghobon Somalis cannot do like that
karto

In the Future Definite, the auxiliary is often dropped,
wa yeli I am going to do it

u shSgi I will tell him

The Infinitive is the basis from which all Imperfect tenses and
most Negative tenses are formed.

215. The Verb-Adjective and Verb-Noun have been described
in Accidence (§§ 15 (b), 72).

216. Aorist Indicative.

This tense ordinarily expresses a habitual or customary act,
without the emphasis on the habit implied in the Present Habitual.

Siraklshu timir ma 'unta P do officers eat dates ?

Tomalidu iyo Midgu wa iss Tomals and Midgans intermarry

gursada

rSrkayaga gu walba 'elasha- my family is accustomed to draw

tan ka so damin jira from these wells every summer

217. It also indicates what is to be done, or can be done :

hagge 16 mara Burao P how (by what way) does one go

to Burao ?
hilibmagalodamalagalbsoda? is meat to be bought in the town?
haggeinu tagna ? wahhaidin where are we to go ? you are to
taktan, Bohotleh. go to Bohotleh (cf. §§ 192, 193).

MOODS AND TENSES 113

wahhad tidahhda you are to say this, or, do you say

this?
ma tura P am I to throw it away ? or, shall

I throw it away?
ma ku kena ? shall I bring it to you ?

218. The 3rd person of this tense is used to translate the
Present Participle, or relative clause.

nin af yaghan a man knowing the language

shimbir forida a singing bird

isago gddka hurda while he was asleep by the tree

219. The Preterite expresses a completed act in past time,
shalei bu yimi he came yesterday

Farah i shdgei intanad iman Farah had told me before you

came

220. Or an act just completed at the present time (usually
found with wa) (§ 142 <I).

sirkalku wa tegei manta the officer has gone to-day

shalei sirkalku tegei the officer went yesterday

221. The Present Continuative expresses either a continuous
action in present time, or an intention or willingness, as in English.

hagge t6gesa P where are you going ?

akhal ban dfseya I am building a house

nag ban gursaneya I am going to marry a wife

la'ag ban ku slneya I will give you money

mahhad iga slsonesa ? what will you give me for it ?

ma garanesa ? do you understand (what I am

saying) ?

but, af Somali ma garata ? do you understand Somali ?
(Aorist)

222. The Past Continuative expresses a continuous, or
incompleted action, in past time.

faras ban fuleyei I was riding a horse

223. The Future Definite is a deliberate statement of what is
about to happen.

wa tegi ddna I am going to go

mahhad y&li dbnta ? what are you going to do ?

k. 8

114 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

224. The Present and Past Habitual express a usual occur-
rence or habit.

subahh walba Farah ba auski Farah usually fetches the grass

so ghadi jira every morning

bSrigi hdre Somalidu fardo formerly the Somalis used to

badan lahain jirtei possess many ponies

225. The Conditional is used whenever a condition exists,
whether expressed or understood. It refers to all times, and cannot
be used except in the Principal sentence.

wa ku sin laha I should, or should have given you

hadan arko wa garan laha if I saw him I should recognise

him

226. The Potential expresses suggestion, possibility, or proba-
bility, and is often used euphemistically for the Future Definite.
It is very common in songs.

mala iman ddne he may probably come

insha Allahh wa la hele please God, we may find it

an walalka dilne we might kill your brother

iman ddne iyo iman mayo, he may come or not, I don't know

war ma hayo

wahha kasta ad araktide, ha whatever you may see, do not stop

jogson

in kasta ha jirte, wa gadeya however far it may be, I will

reach it

227. The Subjunctive tenses are only used in Subordinate or
Relative clauses, and will be dealt with in the sections referring to
them.

(b) The Persons.

228. The 2nd pers. and 3rd fern. sing, are denoted by t, or s,
in the tense termination.

The 1st pers. plur. is denoted by n.

The 1st pers. plur. of the verb has only one form for both the
inclusive and exclusive pronouns.

The 2nd pers. plur. must always be used in addressing more
than one person.

NEGATIVE TENSES 115

Concord of verbs with nouns has been described already under
Syntax of Nouns (§ 165).

229. The Emphatic pronouns anigu, aniga, etc. (§ 55) have
different constructions.

After the -u form ;

the verb is regularly inflected to agree with the various

persons,
the particle wa is usually employed in Affirmative Sentences,
the particle ma, in Interrogative sentences, follows the
pronoun.
anigu wa tegeya I am going

adigu wa t6gesa thou art going

Idinku ma t6gesan ? are you going ?

iyagu t6gi mayan they are not going

After the -a form ;

the 3rd pers. sing, is used for all persons except the 1st pers.

plur.
the particle ba is used in Affirmations,
the Interrogative particle ma precedes the pronoun,
aniga ba shakhdineya it is I who am working

adiga ba shakhSineya it is thou who art working

annaga keligaya ba hadnei we alone were left
ma adiga arkei P was it thou who sawest ?

ma iyaga t§geya ? is it they who are going ?

230. The Negative particles are,

ha used in 2nd pers. Imperative,
yan „ 1st and 3rd pers. Imperative,
ma „ Indicative mood, in Statements,
an ,, Subjunctive mood, Dependent or Relative clauses, and

Questions.

Forms of the Verb.

231. (i) The Aorist Indicative (statements) is conjugated like
the Definite Subjunctive Affirmative, with the particle ma, and
no Personal Pronouns.

ma j6go he is not here

8—2

116 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

232. (ii) Conditional 1 n is added to the Affirmative Poten-
and Potential. J tial. This is conjugated with ma

and the Personal Pronouns.

maan garten I should not understand

233. (iii) Imperative, Preterite and Aorist Subjunctive (state-
ments), n is added to the Infinitive (in the 2nd and 3rd Conjuga-
tions the Infinitive already ends in n, and is therefore unaltered).

This is not conjugated in the persons, except in the Imperative,
in which the 2nd pers. plur. takes -a in the 1st conjugation, -ina in
the 2nd and 3rd conjugations.

ha shSgin (2nd sing.) do not tell

ha dilina (2nd plur.) do not kill

ha jdgsonina (2nd plur.) do not stop

yanu (contracted to yu) dilin let him not kill

yanai ( „ yai) gursan let them not marry

maan tegin I did not go

inanad t6gin ban ddneya I want you not to go

maainu so'on karin we were unable to walk

234. (iv) The Continuative tenses of the Indicative and
Subjunctive have already been described in § 92.

235. (v) In all Negative Interfogative tenses (except the
Conditional), the particle an is used.

Simple tenses (Aorist, Preterite, Aorist Subj.) have the simple,
Infinitive, form as in (iii).

Continuative tenses have the form used in Past Continuative
(statements) and Continuative Subjunctive.

mianan ku sh£gin ? do, or, did I not tell you ?

mianad Sirkal la jogin P are, or, were you not with an

officer ?
mianu imaninin P is, or, was he not coming ?

Imisa nin an teginin P how many men are not coming ?

Imisa nin busta an lahain P how many men have no blanket ?

PARTICLES

117

7. The Particles.

(a) Order.

236. The Verbal Particles and the Personal Pronouns are all
placed in front of the verb. Where more than one are found to the
same verb, they follow a strict rule as to their relative positions,
having, so to speak, separate values, or affinities with the verb, so
that the particle or pronoun having the greatest affinity with the
verb is placed immediately before the verb, the others preceding it in
the order of their affinities, as in the following table.

(A has the greatest affinity, H the least.)

ma?

(§ 145)
wa

(Neg.)

Pers.
Pron.
(subj.)

Pers.
Pron.
(obj.)

(Neg.)
(§ 145)

kala
wada

VERB

Examples,
H G F E D B A

mi-an-ad na la so wada kahain ?

B A
so kala diga

F E C B

lei (la i) ma so dlbin

H D

ma kii jira P
D c
ku ma jiro

FED

mahhad igu sheg-weidei P

did you not bring all
with us ?

put down here separately

it has not been handed me

is it there ?

it is not there

why did you not tell me ?

(6) Uses.

237. Particles have been divided (§§ 124—127) into Verbal
and Conjunctive.

The Syntax of Conjunctive Particles will be found in the
section on Coordinate and Subordinate sentences (Part iv).

118 SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

The Verbal Particles may be Adverbial or Prepositional. Ad-
verbial particles, as the name implies, qualify the verb. (i) They
indicate Affirmation, Interrogation or Negation (ha, ma, an, yan,
wa, ba, ya). These have all their special uses and constructions,
(ii) They may correspond to certain simple adverbs or prepositions.

The latter are used in close relation with a verb, and are an
essential feature of the language. By suitable combinations a
number of changes may be rung, a variety of meanings given to one
verb, and expressions which would otherwise require paraphrasing
put more concisely.

238. wada (all, whole) may be used with the verb alone, or in
addition to the indefinite parts of speech, kulli, gidi, 6 dan, etc.

sanadiikhdi 6 dan wada k6na bring all the .boxes to-

gether
Somalidu 6 dan wa ku wada taghan all the Somalis know you

239. kala apart, in different ways

siraklshi iyo aurti wa kala the officers are travelling apart

dahhaisa from the camels

side la kala garta P how does one distinguish them ?

ninki hhuma iyo ninki wanak- do you know the difference be-

sana ma kala taghan P tween a good and a bad man ?

wa kala jerebeya fardaha I am trying the ponies (for

comparison)

It may be used with verbs, adjectives, or nouns (cf. § 177).
kala bihhi unfold, expand

kala ddro take your choice

wa kala dereyan they are not as fast as each

other
wa kala der they are different lengths

240. si, so (§ 125) are used with the Verb Nouns as well as
with other parts of the verb.

si so'odki the march out

so nokhodki the return

PARTICLES 119

(d) Prepositional particles (ku, u, ka, la).

241. These cannot be treated as true prepositions, as they do
not govern a noun, but only qualify the meaning of a verb in such
a way as to render a preposition unnecessary.

tag go Farah u tag go to (approach) Farah

mesha ka taga go from (leave) that place
u tag go to (him), and ka tag depart, may be used alone, without
any object being expressed.

These particles are not attached to the noun governed by the
English preposition to which they correspond, while on the other
hand they cannot be separated from the verb by any part of speech
except other particles or a personal pronoun.

Examples,

ka taga mesha leave that place

sandukha (the box) ghalabka take out the things from the

ka bihhi box

mahhad ku falesa hadiga what are you doing with that

(rope) P rope ?

wahhba lagu ma falo nothing is done with (it)

These particles are so much a part of the verb with which they are
used that in many cases new meanings may be derived.

Example,

ka tag (leave, depart from) is used in the sense of leaving an
object at a place.

lehh nin ba mesha laga tegei, literally, one went from
six men there, i.e. six men were left there.

haggu ka tegei gela ? where did he go from the camels ?
i.e. where did he leave the camels ?

Other similar cases will be quoted under each particle.

242. ku (i) at, upon, in, into.

magaloda agt&da bu ku arkei near the town he saw six girls

lehh gabdod o 'el ku maid6neya washing at a well
gdd bu ku hedna he was tied to a tree

nin faras ku jdga a man on a horse

120

SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

'anihi yu sibrar ku lissei
(ii) with, by means of.
ha mindi ku tabin
wahhba laugu ma falo
banadukhdi bei ugu dishei

the milk he milked into a skin

do not touch it with a knife
nothing is done with it
they shot them with the rifles

243. ku, or u for, on account of, for the sake of.

244.

he is gone for water

then they died of thirst

I am going to kill the mare for

your stepmother
I am owed two rupees by you
why did you go ?

u is used with certain nouns in an adverbial sense.

blyo bu ku maghanyahai
kolkasei harad u bakhtlyen
genyoda yan u ghaleya ayoda

laba rubod ban ugu lehahai
mahhad u taktei P

speak up
sit back
go quickly

go to the officer
teach

where have you come from ?
take the thing out of the box
my flocks have been looted
from me

wherever I looked, I could not
find it
kolkei mesha ka dgen, wa ka when they looked there, they

waiyen could not find her

mahhad ka baghatei P what are you afraid of?

ka tag go from, i.e. leave, is also used in the sense of leaving a

thing at a place.
lehh nin ba m£sha laga t6gei six men were left there
fnanki ba Inanti uga t6gei wan the boy left the girl a ram

across, over, through.
ka talab step across

ka bdd jump over

ad u hadal
dib u fadlso
dakhso u tag

u to (a person).
sirkalka u tag
udig

245. ka from, out of, off
hagge ka timi P

ghalabki sandukha ka so ghad
hdlahaigi leiga hadei

Idiomatic uses of ka.
mel walba an ka ddneyo, ka
wai

PARTICLES 121

hdggi darta bei ka so dustei she came through the hole in

the wall
about, concerning, as to.

war ma ka haisa ninka P have you news of the man ?

war ka ma hayo I have no news (of him),

dolada ban ka shakhdineya I am working for the Govern-
ment

lug ban ka jabei I have broken my leg

mahhad uga hadlesa ? what are you grumbling at ?

manhad iga sls6nesa P what will you give me for it ?

246. kaga upon, against

kolkasu madaha kaga diftei then he struck it upon the head

wahhai rlyotei lyadu laba shim- she dreamed that two birds sat

birod labada lugod kaga jbgta upon her two legs

kaga rid shoot

nin sirkal rasas ba ku da'dei, a bullet struck an officer, and

b6dodi kaga da'dei hit him on the thigh

247. la together with

In addition to having the simple meaning of the preposition,
la is used in certain euphemistic and other phrases,
la tag }

la so'o I steal, loot (literally, go off with)
la bdb J

la kali bring (a thing)

la sorod (so 6rod) bring (a person)

la jbg halt, cause to halt

la bahso escape with, save

la jbg, la fadiso live with (as a servant)

248. The reflexive pronoun iss is used with the particles ka,
ku, u. It is usually contracted to 'ss ka, 'ss ku (pronounced ska,
sku).

249. iss ka, 'ss ka,

used in abrupt commands.

'ss ka tag go away !

'ss ka bahha get away with you !

'ss ka eg look out !

'ss ka da never mind !

122

SYNTAX OF SIMPLE SENTENCES

With other tenses it may be translated by "just," " simply."
wa 'ss ka fadlya I am just sitting down

wa 'ss ka dintei he simply died (i.e. a natural

death)

250. iss ku, 'ss ku, iss u

iss ku dowada !

'ss ku lablab

'ss ku tbl

iss u gei

iss u dar, or 'ss ku dar

tollollki wa iss u jiran

It is the opposite of kala (cf.
sidei iss ku yihin P
'ss ku mid
'ss ku toll
'ss ku aba
'ss ku lb

with one another, together.

close together !
fold up together
sew together
bring together
mix together

the tribes are all together
(mixed up)
§§177 and 239).

how do they compare ?

the same

of the same tribe

(children) of the same father

of the same price

PART IV. SYNTAX OF COMPOUND
SENTENCES.

251. Compound Sentences consist of more than one simple
sentence, and may be Coordinate or Subordinate.

A. Coordinate Sentences.

252. Coordinate sentences are principal sentences, not de-
pendent on one another, but connected by simple copulative or
conjunctive particles, as "and," "or," "but," and having their
verbs in the same mood.

Conjunctive Particles.

253. iyo and (used only between two substantives).
Farah iyo aniga Farah and I

or, in the following cases :
laba iyo sadehh two or three, i.e. a few

hadad takto iyo hadi kaleh if you go or otherwise

inei fdgtahai iyo in k&leh so find out if it is far or other-
hubso wise

254. o and (not used to connect substantives).

kolkas askarrti dibadda u bahh- then the soldiers turned out
dei o '6ridei and drove them away

It is also used,
(i) between two epithets governing one noun.
niman badan o wawein many big men

laba faras o wan&ksan two good horses

laba askari o faras ku jdgta two soldiers on horseback

124 SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES

(ii) with the Indicative tenses of the verb to translate the
English participles.

wahhai arken inanti o dlrti they saw the girl sitting in the

fadida trees

rerkbdi o la da'ei bu arkei he found his family looted

hblihlsi an ka ghadno, isago let us loot his flocks while he

(isaga o) shirka ku maghan- is away at the council

yahai

(iii) as meaning because,
wa lo takhslrei o iyagu shiik- they were punished because
hulki ghobon waiyen they would not do the work

(iv) in the idiom o mahai without (Conditional).
ha s6 nokhon o bandukhi heli do not come back without

mahai finding the rifle

aniga o fasahhi mahai ha ka do not leave the enclosure

t6gina heroda without my leave

255. -na and, usually introduces a new subject.
adiguna mahhad donesa P and you, what do you want ?
dabadedna and afterwards

midna wa wanaksanyahai, one is good and one is bad
midna wa hhunyahai

-na followed by a negative verb means " no."

ninna ma jbgo no one is here

midna ma tegin not one went

256. For other particles, see § 127, and Syntax of Compound
Sentences, Final and Conditional.

B. Subordinate Sentences.

257. A Subordinate sentence is one which depends on, or
represents some part of speech in, the principal sentence, and is
connected with it by a conjunction or relative pronoun. It may
represent

Substantive, Adjective, or Adverb.

ADJECTIVAL SENTENCES

125

1. General Rules.

258. In all Subordinate sentences, if the verb is in Past time,
the Indicative mood is used, except in Conditional sentences. In
Present or Future time the Indicative or Subjunctive may be used.

The Subjunctive is used to express uncertainty, or what is in
the mind of the speaker, while the Indicative is confined to definite
facts.

The negative particle in all Subordinate clauses is an (cf. § 274,
note).

2. Adjectival Sentences.

259. In English these sentences are usually introduced by a
relative pronoun, "who," "whom," "which," etc., but the Somali
has no such pronoun.

The clause therefore follows directly after the Antecedent, as in
many cases in English.

Where the English relative pronoun would be the subject of the
relative clause, no personal pronoun is used in Somali as subject to
the verb in the clause.

nimanka, halkb fadlyan, u yed

askarrti, hujuddas samelsei,
takhslr 'ulus bei lehdahai

ninki, aminkan1 arkeyei, haggu2
ka'ei ?

fardihi, shalei ni^jorku Ibshei3,
wa la'ag badna4

hdlihi, saka la kenei, ma la so
wada arbriyei ?

dadka, gellsi la da'ei, wa yimi

ninki, ai5 akhalklsa fadidei,
yu ku yidi

call those men, who are sitting

over there
the soldiers, who committed

that crime, deserve a heavy

punishment

where has the man gone, whom

I saw just now ?
the ponies the major bought

yesterday cost a lot of money

have the animals, which were

brought this morning, been

all watered?
the people, whose camels were

looted, have come
he said to the man, whose

house she was in

1 foajafa an. 2 hagge u.

3 Cf. note to Table III. § 105. * Cf. § 114.

6 Pronounced as one word ninkyai. ai=she.

126

SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES

wilki, an waranki ka ghadei,

wa adaneya
ninki, an hbla lahain, wahhba

ma taro
faraski, an blyo badan ddnin,

biladkan ku wanaksanyahai1

the boy I took the spear from

is angry
the man, who has no property,

is of no use
the horse, which does not want

much water, is good for this

country

260. The particle e, followed by the Indicative mood, is used
apparently as a relative pronoun, where the latter is the subject of
the verb in the clause, usually when the antecedent is also qualified
by another epithet, such as an adjective or numeral.

shanti fnan, e gabdihi gursadei, the five boys, who married the

u yimaden
Inanka H. B., e gabaddaidi ye-

reid gursadei, yan u dlbei

hukumka

girls, came
I have given authority to the
boy H. B., who married my
young daughter

261. The Conjunction o is used with the Indicative mood to
translate the English participles, or an adjectival clause, when it is
literally only a coordinate sentence.

wahhan arkei lehh gabdod o 'el

ku maid6neya
wahhai arakta labadi shim-

birod, o labadi lugod kaga

joga
rerkddi o la da'ei bu arkei, o

'oil da'ei
wahha ugu yimi afar nin, intas

o midna an u garanin

I saw six girls washing at a

well
s"he sees the two birds sitting

upon her two legs

he found his family looted,

looted by an enemy
there came to her four men,

none of whom recognised her

262. The Subjunctive mood is used in Present or Future tenses,
where the relative clause refers to a group, clasSj sort, or purpose.

ninki shukhul dbneyo ha yi- the man that wants work let

mado him come

geli la ibfneyo mid ka kahhaiso take for yourself one of the

camels that are for sale

1 Pronounced wan&ks6nyahal.

ADVERBIAL SENTENCES 127

mindi la kali an kibisti ku bring a knife for me to cut

gogoiyo the bread with

blyo an 'abo i ken bring me water to drink

263. "He who," "they who," etc., are translated by the
definite pronouns, ki, kuer, etc.

ki shalei la Ibsotei wa h6g the one that was bought yester-
weinyahai day is strong

kuer saka yfmaden wa jdgan those who came this morning

are here

kuer an busta lahain, iyo kuer those who have no blanket,
lehyihin and those who have

264. "That which," "something which," "what," are translated
by wahh, wihhi.

wahhan ku idi yel do what I told you

wahhad kento i tus shew me what you bring

wahh lagu fadlsto i ken bring me something to sit on

wihhi ad heshei i si give me what you found

3. Adverbial Sentences.

265. (a) Temporal and Locative sentences.

These are essentially adjectival clauses qualifying an adverb
of Time or Place,

meshi akhalki la diseya bu he is sitting where the house

fadlya is being built

mahhad iss tidi markad wahhas what were you thinking of when

sameinesei P you did that ?

kolkan imaneyei libahh ban while I was coming I saw a

arkei lion

meshian 'ashodi doweida jdgei unload the kit where I stopped

ghalabka diga the other day

266. The Subjunctive is required when referring to any future
time, or when the sense is general or indefinite.

kolki hukumka leidin1 shego when you are given an order,
wahhba weidina* don't ask questions

i la ldin.

2 Negative particle ha may be omitted after negative words, as wahhba,
wellga, etc.

128

SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES

kolku yimado i so sheg when he comes, tell me

mel wanaksan-einu degno so go and find a good place for
ddn us to camp

267. " while " is translated by inti or o.

intei habasha ghodeyen, yei ka

gurgiiratei
fsago hajki ku maghana, ya

nagtlsi dadabtei

while they were digging the
grave, she crawled away

while he was away on the
pilgrimage, his wife had a
dream

268. until, as far as, inti.

intan so nokhdo mesha jdgsoda wait there until I come back
fadi inti shekada damaneso wait until the story is finished

intad so'on karto so'o go as far as you can

269. before that, intan (inti-an).

(Here an is the neg. part., and the Verb is used in the negative.)

intanan so nokhon ha ka t6gina don't go away before I come

back
inteidinan deginin, ana wa idin I will catch you up before you
gadeya halt

270. after, kolki...dabaded.
kolkan Badwein ka tegei, da-
baded mahha ka da'ei P

kolkad BSrberah timid, daba-

d£dto wa la helei
kolkad sida yesho, dabad6d

akhalka gal

after I left Badwein, what
happened ? (When I left B.,
afterwards what happened ?)

it was found after you came to
Berberah

after you have done that,
enter the house

271. (b) Final sentences : " in order that," in.

Always used with the Subjunctive.
magalodan' ghobdneya inan I am going to Berberah to
barls iyo timir so dbnto fetch rice and dates

magiloda an.

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 129

nimanka igu yeda, inan la call those men that I may

hadlo talk to them

mesha 'ss ka dumo, inan lagu hide there that you may not

arkin be seen

272. (c) Conditional Sentences.
If, hadi.

A Conditional sentence consists of two parts,

the Protasis, or Condition or Assumption, and the Apodosis,
or Conclusion.

273. (i) Assumptions. Indicative mood in both.

hadad moskhln tahai, mahhad if you are a pauper (as you

u shakheison weida ? say), why do you not work ?

hadanad moskhln ahain, mahh- if you are not a pauper, why

ad u shakhefsata ? do you work ?

hadad magaloda tegesa, Sul- if you are (really) going to the

danka u tag town, go to the Sultan

hadanu imaninin, sugi mayo if he is not coming, I will not

wait
hadad jdgtei, mahhad ark- if you were there, what did

esei P you see ?

hadanad jdgin, sidad dgtahai ? if you were not there, how do

you know ?

274. (ii) Future Definite Condition, or Promise.
Protasis — Aorist Subjunctive.

Apodosis — Future Indicative or Imperative,
hadu yimado, u shegi ddna if he comes, I am going to tell

him
hadad tegi weido1 (or hadanad if you do not go, you will be
tegin), wa lagu ghoboneya caught

275. (iii) Present or Past Unfulfilled condition {Imaginary).
Protasis — Aorist Subjunctive.

Apodosis — Conditional.
hadeinu Berberah jdgno, la'agti- if we were in Berberah, I should
an ku sin laha give you the money

1 The verb wan (§ 117) is often used in Conditional sentences to translate the
negative verb, in place of the particle an with a negative tense.

130 SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES

hadaneinu BSrberah jbgin, if we were not in Berberah,

wahha badan maan ku I should not give you so

slyen much

hadad shalei takto, wa u if you had gone yesterday,

ghobon lahaid you would have caught him

hadanad Adan olli jirin, wah- if you had not been living in

has maad garaten Aden, you would not have

understood that

276. (iv) Future Indefinite Condition, or Suggestion.

Protasis — Continuative Subjunctive.
Apodosis — Conditional, or Neg. Pres. Continuative.
hadannu berrl t§geno, ninki- if we were to go to-morrow,

annu ghob6n lahain we should catch the man

hadanannu teginin, ghobon if we were not to go, we
mayno should not catch him

Note. In a long sentence the Conjunction, Neg. Part., and
Pronoun, may be split up.

hadiad shukhulka an ddneya if you do not do the work I
anad gh6bonin, shukhul- wish, you are no good to
kaiga ku ma wanaksanid me

277. Whether... or... is translated by hadi...iyo hadi....
hadad doneso iyo hadanad whether you want to or not, go

ddninin, iss ka tag

or by ama...ama, followed by the Imperative.
ama ha samado ama ha hhu- whether it is good or bad, do it
mado, yel

278. "unless," "without," may be translated by o...mahai.
ha s6 nokhon, bandukhi o heli do not return, without finding

mahai the rifle

279. (d) Causal sentences.

There is no conjunction meaning "because," but o is used in the
following way.
wa lagu takhslrei o adigu shuk- you were punished because you

hulki ghobon wai would not do the work

wahhan ku adadei, o lyagu laba I was angry, because they were

aa'adod ka ragen two hours late

SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES 131

280. (e) Concessive sentences (although).

There is no conjunction, but they may be translated as the last,
or paraphrased.

halkanad tillen, haddana daugi you do not know the road,
ma taghanin although you have lived here

281. The conjunctions ending in -soever are Concessive.
They may be used with Subjunctive or Potential or Imperative,
wihhi kasta ad sameineso, whatever you may be doing,

mesha ka kali come away from there

o is usually added to the Imperative,

wahh kasta makhla-o, ha so whatever you hear, do not

nokhonina come back

dal kasta ghobo-o, si so'o however tired you are, go on

wahh kasta ha ku shego, ha whatever he tells you, do not

makhlin listen

'id kasta ha gursado, wahhba whomsoever he marries, I will

u sin mayo give him nothing

In the following the Potential Tense is used,
wahh kasta an arke, jdgson whatever I may see, I will not

mayo stop

in kasta ha ahaden, wa 'eriyena however many they may be,

we will defeat them
in kasta ha jirte, wa gadeya however far it may be, I am

going to reach it
wahh kasta ad araktide, ha whatever you may see, do not
jdgson stop

4. Substantival Sentences.

282. These sentences stand in relation to a Principal sentence,
as Substantives, and may be either the subject or object of the
principal verb (or an Indefinite Pronoun or Adverbial Noun). They
are introduced by in (that), followed by the Subjunctive in Present
or Future time, by the Indicative in Past time.

283. (a) As Subject.

in la jedlo ma wanaksana it is not good to be whipped

inad hilibkas 'unto wa haran it is unlawful for you to eat

that meat

9—2

132

SYNTAX OF COMPOUND SENTENCES

284. (b) As Object.

(i) Indirect statement, thought, wish, etc.
wahhannu ddnena inad sor we want you to give us food

na slso
wahhan ddneya inan Adan

tago, or inan Adan tago ban

ddneya
wa u maleineya in rdbku di'i

ddno
kolkasu oghadei in rag u yimi

inanti
kolkasa wadadki dama'ei inu

araro

I want to go to Aden

I think the rain is going to fall

then he learned that men came

to the girl
then the priest tried to run

away

285. (ii) Simple indirect questions.

inu yimi so hubso

bal inei fdgtahai so weidi

inu tSgeyo iyo in kaleh war '

ma hayo
moyi inanu fulan oghbn iyo

inarm ddnin

find out if he came

go and ask if it is far

I do not know if he is coming

or not
I do not know if he does not

know how to ride or if he

does not want to

286. (iii) Indirect questions, introduced by interrogative
pronouns.

'id u yahai so ddn

hadanad oghbn 'iddi goi'sei,

mahhan ku sameyaP
wuhhu ddneyo weidi
weidi bal wahhai ka bagha-

neyan
i sheg wahhai u shakhein

wayen

287. (iv) Indirect questions, introduced by interrogative
adverbs.

hdluhu intei yihin ma ku did he tell you how many
shegei ? animals there are ?

1 =1 have no news.

find out who he is

if you do not know who cut

them, what am I to do?
ask what he wants
ask what they are frightened of

tell me why they would not
work

ORATIO OBLIQUA 133

so eg inti tambukhi leheg- go and look how big the tent is
yahai

meshas int6i jirto war ma how far that place is I do not

hayo know

mel u jiro garan wai I do not know where it is.

gor u si so'6neyo war ma do you know when he is going

haisa P on ?

5. Oratio Obliqua.

288. In narrative there is no oratio obliqua in Somali, but
after the verbs, ' say ' ' tell ' (odo, sheg), the oratio recta is re-
peated.

The pronouns, wahhan, etc., are generally used.

wuhhu yidi, " libahh ban he said he had seen a lion

arkei "

wuhhu yidi, "wa idin ka he said he would follow on

daba so so'oneya " after you

wahhad na tidi, " gel badan you told us we should get many

beidin h§lesan " camels

wahhad tidahhda, " sor ban tell him I want food

ddneya "
wahhad tidahhda, " 'ss ka tell them to go away

taga"

289. In place of wahha, wa ti is often used with the
pronouns.

watan ku idi, " s6 nokho " I told you to come back

watad tidi, " 'ss ka j6g " you told me to stay

warakhdi me ? wa ti la gubei where is the letter ? that was

burned

APPENDIX I.

Seasons in Somaliland.

Jilal January — March

(Kalil) April

Gil May— June (S.W. Monsoon)

Hagar July — October (Karif on the coast)

Dair November — December (N.E. Monsoon)

Names of months (corresponding to the Arabic).

Arabic. Somali.

Moharram Dago

Safar Durahh hore

Rabia al Awal Durahh dambe

Rabia al Akhir Rajal hore

Jumad al Awal Rajal dehhe

Jumad al Akhir Rajal dambe

Rajab Sa buha

Shaaban Wa barls

Ramadhan S6n (or Soukad)

Shawal S6n fur

Dhul Kada Sidatal

Dhul Hijjah Arafo

Days of the week are the same as Arabic.

Monday Isnin-ti Friday Jima'-i

Tuesday Salasa-di Saturday Sabti-di

Wednesday Rabuhh-i Sunday Ahad-di

Thursday Khamis-ki

APPENDIX I

135

Times of the day and night.
The Arabic times of prayer are freely used.

a.m. 6

wa beri )
arorti '

sunrise

6—8

subahh-di
barghaddi hore
barisaddi hore

early grazing
early rice

8—9

barghad-di
barisad-di

grazing time
rice time

^gelinkahore

9—10

barghaddi kululeid

hot grazing

10—12

marki hadki so

koreisa

p.m. 12—2

had-ki /
gadid-ki )

noon

■ 'asho-

2—3.30

duhur-ki

\ galab-ti,

3.30—6

asar-ki

- gdlinka

makhrib-ki

sunset j dambe

6—7

fldki

7—10

aweisin-ki

10—12

sakhdi hore

a.m. 12—2

2—4

sakhdi (dehh)
sakhdi dambe

► haben-ki

4—6

arorti hore )
saladdi >

The

time of day, etc.

arorta

in the early morning

sa ka

this morning

galabta

this evening

manta

to-day

awa

to-night

shalei-to

yesterday

halei-to

last night

haben hore

the night before last

shalei galab

yesterday evening

dorrad-to

the day before yesterday

'ashodi hore |
'ashodi doweidj

the other day

berrl-to

to-morrow

berri arorta

to-morrow morning

sa dambe

the day after to-morrow

sa kub

the day after the day after to-morro1

haben dambe

to-morrow ni

ght

APPENDIX II.

la'ag-ti

mushaharo-di

hisab-ti

sarrif-ki

dahab-ki

rubiad-di

rubi-gi

b61ad-di

antln-ti

gambo-di

beisad-di

ardi-di

Money.

money, silver

wages

account

small change

gold

rupee (pi. rubod)

\ rupee, 8 annas

4 annas

2 annas

anna

2 pies

1 pie

Weight.

misan-ki

weight, scales

rodol-ki

pound

nus rodol

\ pound

waghed-dj

4 oz.

Measure.

ba'-i "fathom" (roughly 5 ft. 10 in.) used in

measuring rope
gedi-gi a camel's march (about 9 miles)

laba gedi a day's march

nus gedi a half march (4 or b miles)

138

APPENDIX III.

A knowledge of the chief tribes of Somalis is important, in
order to identify individuals, as, in any official description of a man,
the native custom of describing him by name and sub-tribe is
adhered to. The relationships of the tribes are also most important
in any dealings with the people. These are very confusing at first,
as, for instance, three brothers may correctly describe themselves
respectively as Abdallah Ismail, Hersi Bareh, and Rer Sugulli, at
first sight three different tribes.

The following are only the better known tribes ; for further
details, Cox's Genealogies may be consulted.

The inhabitants of the country are divided into

ASHA, or GOB ISHHAK

(Noble birth)

DARUD
DIR ESA

GADABURSI
SAB (outcast) HAWIYA

TOMAL

MIDGAN

YIBIR

None of these eight tribes have any known relationship with one
another, within the history of Somalis as a race, except perhaps the
TOMAL, who are said by some to be a branch of the DARUD ;
and the DIR, who may be a branch of the ISHHAK.

The ISHHAK are divided into four, or usually five, great
divisions, called

HABR AWAL

HABR GERHAJIS (EIDEGALLA

lHABR YUNIS
ARAB
HABR TOLJALA

140

APPENDIX III

The ARAB are a small tribe, and, though genealogically
distinct, are more or less adopted into the HABR GERHAJIS.

HABR means "old woman," or "wife of."

ARAB, and EIDEGALLA are nicknames, the other are
proper names, of the sons and grandsons of Sheikh ISHHAK.

The HABR AWAL are divided into
/ Makahil

( Saad Musa -

Hussein Abokr
Jibril Abokr
Abdarahhman
V Abdallah Saad

Mohammed Esa

, Esa Musa { Abokr Esa

\ Adan Esa

f Musa Jibril
I Abokr Jibril

Damwadaga
Abdurabbman
Rer Idleb
Rer Farab
Rer Odowa

Ba Abdarahhman
Rer Wais

The EIDEGALLA are divided into

( Abokr Musa
Rer Yunis Abdurabbman
Ba Delo
Gasbanbur
Damal Yera
Rer Esa

The HABR YUNIS are divided into
Isbhak

( Arreh Said J Musa Arreb

k Ali Said

L Ismail Arreh

Abdillab Ishbak
Kassim Ishhak
Jibril Adan
Musa Adan
Mohammed Adan
Ali Adan
V Hassan Musa
Saad Yunis
Musa Ismail

j Idris
Abdallah Ismail - Musa Abdallah

[ Omar Abdallah

APPENDIX III

141

The Omar Abdallah are important as the Sultan's tribe, or
Royal House, and are divided into a number of important sub-
tribes.

Omar Abdallah

Ugad Omar— Rer Hussein
Gambur

Adan Omar

Ba Dolbohanta

Said Hersi

Hersi

Barreh ] Abdi Hersi

Ainanshe

Rer Warsama
(RerWaraba)
Rer Weid
Rer Abdi

Rer Ainanshe
Rer Sugulli

The ARAB are divided into

■ Rer Othman
Abdallah

k Rer Ali

I Ahmed Abdallah

- Rer Ali

i Adan Waraba

The HABR TOLJALA are divided into

( Omar Abokr

I Musa Abokr
{ Jibril Abokr Mohammed [ A*a* Madoba

I Abokr J Yessel

Nuh

| Ahmed Farah
Dahir Farah

etc.

The chief divisions of the D ARUD are

OGADEN

BARTIRI

ABSGUL

HARTI MIJJERTEIN

WARSANGELI
DOLBOHANTA

142

APPENDIX III

The DOLBOHANTA are divided into

(Jama Siad
Ogarien Siad

( Rer Jibril
r Naleyah Ahmed -J Ali Naleyah

[ (incl. Ba Idris)
( Nur Ahmed
r Aligheri
Ahmed Garad I Ararsama (incl. Rer Wais Adan
[ and Rer Hagar)

Garad Farah i Mohammed Garad — Rer Naleyah
or Ba Ararsama
Barkad Garad
v Abdi Garad — Rer Khair

Note. Ba Idris, Rer Wais Adan, Rer Hagar, are three small sub-tribes
which have intermarried with HABR TUNIS, and live with them in the
district of Burao. They are included among the tribes friendly to the
British Government, the other Dolbohanta having largely sided with the
Mullah.

EXAMPLES OF PROSE AND VERSE.

The following stories and songs were dictated to ine by Somalis
of the Habr Toljala and Habr Yunis tribes1, living at Burao.

The language used in the Prose Stories is exactly in the style of
modern colloquial speech.

The sentences are very short and simple, and in ordinary
conversation, especially in narrative, the speaker would hesitate
after each one, in order that the listener might reply with some
ejaculation expressing his attention or surprise. Such ejaculations
are Kod, Kodi or Haiye, Weiye, meaning "Yes," "I see," "Go on" ;
or Dega, Wallahh, meaning "Really," "By God." Wallahh is
usually replied to again by Ega wallahh.

Example,

A. B.

A complainant I am. Well ?

Mashtaki ban ahai. Weiye.

A camel someone from me has stolen. Yes.

Hal ba leiga hadei. Kod.

Yesterday it was lost. Yes.

Shalei bei ka halladei. Kod.

There beyond, the flocks were grazing. Yes.

Hagga ka shishei, hdlaha wa dajeyei. K6d.

When we were returning it was stolen. Yes.

Gorteinu ka so nokh6nenei leiga hadei. Kod.

1 I — IV were told by an educated Somali, Mohammed Jibril, of the Habr
Toljala, Mnsa Abokr, then serving as an office clerk.

V — IX were told me by a professional poet and story-teller of Burao, Ismail
of the Habr Toljala, Her Ahmed Farah.

X was told me by an interpreter called AH, of the Habr Yunis, Musa Arreh.

144 EXAMPLES OF PROSE AND VERSE

There with it went two men, on
Wahha la tegei laba nin, c
j6ga.

horseback-
> faras ku

-By God !

Wallahh !

and rifle carrying.
o bandukh sita.

By God !
Wallahh !

See by God !
Ega Wallahh !

Well?
Haiye.

There it is. (That is all.)
Wa inta.

What do you want ?
Mahhad donesa P

I want,

Wahhan ddneya,

Yes.
K6d.

that one may catch those men.
in la ghobsoto nimanka.

Where they went ?
Haggei u ka'en ?

They are here, in the town they
Wajdgan, magalodai

stay.
fadiyan.

Really !
Dega!

By God etc this morning I saw (them)

Wallahhi iyo Billahhi iyo Tallahhi ! saka-an arkei.

Very well. A man soldier accompany, and shew him.
Wayahai. Nin sibaihh la ra', o u tus.

All right. Go away
Haurarsan. 'ss ka ta

now.
g, haddaba

Very well.
Watahai.

In the fables and narrative which follow, these exclamations are
omitted, but no Somali could tell a story, nor could another listen,
without introducing them.

In a native court, or banjad, it is not uncommon for the counsel
on one side to repeat the speech of his opponent sentence for
sentence, or bit by bit, in order apparently to gain sufficient time to
digest the full meaning properly. Repetitions are frequent and
tedious, owing to this necessity for short, clipped sentences, and the
absence of relative pronouns.

A speech or story is usually concluded by the expression Wa sida,
or Wa inta There it is, That is all.

An excellent collection of some forty-five Somali tales, with
German translations, is to be found in Schleicher's Somali-Texte.

PROSE 145

I. HABIYO BUTIYA1.
LAME HABIYO.

Suldan hi jirei, fnan bu laha2. Inanka hoyodlsi ya dimatei.
A Sultan there was, a son he had. The son his mother died.

KolkasaSuldanku3 nag bu gursadei. Suldanki ba hajki4 ghobtei
Then the Sultan a wife he married. The Sultan the pilgrimage made.

Nagti Suldanka5 ya Yuh6di la sahhebei, fnanki Suldanka ya
The wife of the Sultan a Jew with was friendly, the son of the Sultan

Yuh6digi la 'oll6bei6. Nagti ya Yuh6digi kuyidi7, "fnanka
the Jew with was at enmity. The woman the Jew to said, "The boy

an dilno." Kolkasei sorti sun ugu dartei. Inankuse
let us kill." Then she the food poison with it mixed. But the boy

genyu8 lehyahai, wahh walba taghan9, kolkasa genyodi fnanki
a mare he possesses, which everything knows, then the mare the boy

ku tidi, "Ha 'unin sorta." Kolki sorti lo10s6 digei, ya fnanki
to said, " Do not eat the food." When the food was placed, the boy

sorti dldei. Malinti dambe ya Yuh6digi u yimi11 nagti
the food refused. The day following the Jew came to the wife

Suldanka, wuhhu yidi, "Kolka Suldanki yimado, wahhad

of the Sultan, he said, "When the Sultan comes, do you

1 This is a good example of ordinary narrative style with its broken short
sentences. It is also an excellent exercise in the uses of ba, ya, the adjectival
clause, and the concord of plural nouns, upon which special notes are not given
in many cases.

2 laho means "have in possession," or "own," and is different from hai,
have in the hand, hold.

3 Note article u, for " the above-mentioned Sultan."

4 i.e. the Mecca pilgrimage.

5 Article a for possessive case.

6 §99.

7 address, ku is the particle. Cf. wahhad ku tldahhda below, ylttl is
masc, and therefore the subject is Yuhddigl, and not nagti.

8 genyo u.

9 From ogho. The Aorist is here used for Present Participle.

10 la u.

11 u to (a person).

K. 10

146 PROSE

tidahhda, ' Wa buka.' Kolku ku yidahhdo, ' Mahha ku dawaa1 ? '
say, 'I am sick.' When he to you says, 'What you will cure?'

wahhad tidahhda, 'Genyoda berkeda.' " Dararti dambe ya
do you say, ' The mare her liver.' " The day following

Suldanku yimi, kolkasei san gogoshei, o wahhai hosta ka
the Sultan came, then she a skin laid on the bed, and she underneath

gelisei2 'alen beirda. Kolkei ku sehhotei, ya 'alenti

inserted a leaf of a fig-tree. When she on it slept the leaf

jababa' tidi, kolkasa Suldanki yidi, " Mahha ku haya3 ? " Kolkasei
crackled, then the Sultan said, "What you has?" Then she

tidi, "Fedaha han6neya." "Mahha ku dawaa?" Kolkasei tidi,
said, " My ribs are hurting." " What you will cure ? " Then she said,

"Berka genyoda fnankaga." Inanki ba Suldanki u yedei,
"The liver of the mare of your son." The boy the Sultan called,

wuhhuyidi, "Genyodadayan ughaleya ayoda." Kolkasu

he said, " Your mare I will slay for your stepmother." Then he

yidi, "Haurarsan. E galabta-an ku so mermero4." Galabti

said, " All right. This evening let me on it take a walk." In the evening

ba inanki genyodi fulei, .kolkasu abihi ku yidi, "Abo,
the boy the mare mounted, then he to his father said, " Father,

nabad," o genyodi la tegei. Wuhhu tegei, magalo-u tegei.

goodbye," and with the mare went. He went, to a town he went.

Magaloda agtedi bu ku5 arkei lehh gabdod o6 'el ku maidtfneya7.
The town near he saw six girls a well at washing.

Inanti ugu yereid ya araktei, kolkei ninki araktei, bei 'elki
The girl youngest saw, when she the man saw she the well

ka so bahhdei, ninki bei ka hish<5tei. Kolkasu genyoda

from came, the man she concerning was ashamed. Then he the mare

saintdda gubei, kolkasa genyodi 'erka taktei. Inanki ba wuhhu
her tail burned, then the mare to the sky went. The boy he

'ss ka diga nin adinla, magaloda bu galei. Wuhhu la
pretended to be a man crippled, the town he entered. He lived

1 dawa, 1st conjugation. The Aorist here means, "is to,'' or "can."

2 geli. Causative verb derived from gal enter, § 123.
8 i.e. what is the matter with you?

* go and take a walk. B at.

6 gabdod is qualified by a numeral and therefore the relative clause is
coupled by o.

7 3rd singular after Indef. plur., § 168.

PROSE 147

fadistei1 nin. Berigi dambe ya gabdihi Suldanka ya

as servant to a man. The time after the daughters of the Sultan

yidi, "Wa gursonena." Suldanki ba durban ku diftei2, wuhhu yidi,
said, " We will marry." The Sultan drum beat, he said,

"Gabdahaiga ya gurs6neya." Kolkasa inamodi h6dna ya
" My daughters will marry." Then the young men rich

iss u yimi, kolkas gabdihi ba la kenei, meidanki ragu
together came, then the girls were brought, in the plain the men

j6gei. Kolkasa gabdihi la yidi, "Raga dbnesan3 ma wada
stood. Then the girls were told, "The men you wish are they all

j6gan ? " Kolkas inanti yereid ba tidi, " Ninkan doneyei ma
here?" Then the girl young said, "The man I wanted is not

jogo." Ad6nihi raga u yedeyei ya la yidi, " Raga

here." The slaves (who) the men were calling were told, "The men

magaloda wada j6ga u yeda." Kolkasa fnanki adinkalaa4,
(that) in the town all are call." Then the boy cripple,

e Habiyo Butiya, yu5 u yedei. Kolkasa Suldanki gabdihi weidiyei,
Habiyo Butiya, they called. Then the Sultan the girls asked,

"Ragi ma wada j6ga?" Kolkasei yidahhden, "Ha." Gabdihi
" The men are they all here ? " Then they said, "Yes." The girls

ya lo dibei lehh habadod6 o linah. "Wahha la yidi, "Inan
were handed six oranges. It was said, "Girl

walba ninkei doneso ha ku dffato." Shanti gabdod e kaleh7
every the man she wants let her strike." The five girls other

wahhai ku diftan, shan inan o hodanah, inanti yereid ya ku difatei
they struck, five young men rich, the girl young struck

Habiyo Butiya. Kolkasa nahhdinti-ai ka nahhen ya abahed
Habiyo Butiya. Then with horror they were astonished her father

iyo hoyoded indo belen. Inanki ba inanti yereid giirsadei.
and her mother eyes lost. The boy the girl young married.

1 lit. sit with. An idiom meaning u be servant to.'- la jog has the same
meaning.

2 difo is used with ku, meaning "strike."

3 The pronoun is omitted.

4 adinla is inflected to agree with article -W.

5 ref. to addnihl.

6 " articles," often used in this way with numerals.

7 kaleh is the second epithet, but o is not used as o kaleh has a special
meaning, § 177.

10—2

148 PROSE

Dararti dambe ya la yidi, " Suldanka iyo nagtlsa wahha u
The day following it was said, " The Sultan and his wife there

dawaa 'ano wlyiled." Inamodi shanti gabdod gtirsadei,

cures milk of rhinoceros." The young men the five girls married,

shan faras o wanaksan ba la slyei, fnankina Habiyo Butiya dabeir
five ponies good were given, and the boy Habiyo Butiya a donkey

ba la slyei. Kolkasa inagaloda-ai ka behhen1.
was given. Then the town they from departed.

fnanki Habiyo Butiya, ya genyodlsi sainti u gubei, genyodi
The boy Habiyo Butiya, his mare the tail he burnt, the mare

ba u timi,. kolkasu darklsi dahabkaaha iyo sefti intas u
to came, then he his clothes of gold and the sword that he

gashodei2.
put on.

Kolkasu genyodi fulei. Kolkasa genyodi dtishei, 'erkas yei
Then he the mare mounted Then the mare flew, that sky she

gh<5botei. Kolkas wuhhu taga mel wiyili ku dashei,

reached. Then he goes to where rhinoceros was born,

wlyishi yereid bu dohhei, santi bu kala bahhai, 'o'ob bu

the rhinoceros young he skinned, the skin he stretched out, a figure he

ka sameyei. Duhurki kolkei ahaid ya wlyishi timi,
from it made. The afternoon when it . was the rhinoceros came,

fnanki Habiyo Butiya ya 'ss ka digei dalkeda, 'anihi yu
the boy Habiyo Butiya pretended to be her young, the milk he

hohhdi3 sibrar ku lissei, gudulkina sibrar ku lissei.

the first part a skin in milked, and the second a skin in (he) milked.

Wiyishi ya gedo donatei, kolkasa fnanki 'o'obki 'ss ka

The rhinoceros grass sought, then the boy the figure threw

turei, 'anihi bu ghadei, ged bu tegei, genyodi bu ku hedtei.
away, the milk he took, a tree he went to, the mare he to it tied.

Isago 4 gedka hurda, ya shanti fnan e gabdaha
While he at the tree was sleeping, the five young men who the girls

1 from hahh.

3 reflexive verb from gal. Verbs in 1 usually change 1 to sh in forming these
derivatives.

3 the first part that is milked, and not so rich as the second, or gudul.

4 Iuaga o, § 218.

PROSE 149

gursadei u ylmaden, kolkasei yidahhden, " Salam aleikum." Habiyo
married to him came, then they said, "Salam aleikum." Habiyo

Butiya ku yidi, "Aleikum salam." Kolkasu yidi, "Haggad ku
Butiya said, "Aleikum salam." Then he said, "Where do

so'otan?" Wahhai yidahhden, " 'Ano wiyiled bannu donena."
you go to ? " They said, " Milk of rhinoceros we want'

Kolkasu yidi, " 'Ano wiyiled ana haya, mahha iga sis6-

Then he said, " Milk of rhinoceros I have, what to me for it will you

nesan?" Kolkasei yidahhden, "Wahhad donesid." Kolkasu yidi,
give?" Then they said, "What you wish." Then he said,

"H6lo d6ni mayo, ninkinba1 maga'aiga yan futada kaga
"Goods I do not want, each of you my name I the buttock upon

dijmeya." Kolkasei yidahhden, "Haurarsan." Maga'isi yu futadi
will print" Then they said, "All right" His name he the buttock

kaga wada2 dijiyei shanti nin ba. Kolkasa 'anihi hohhdaaha3
upon all printed the five men. Then the milk the first

u siyei, gudulkina Habiyo Butiya ghatei".
he gave, and the second Habiyo Butiya took for himself.

Magalodi Suldanki jogei yei tegen o 'anihi geyen.
The town the Sultan dwelt in they went to, and the milk took.

'Anihi, shanta nin sfdatei, ya Suldanki indihisi logu shubei,
The milk, the five men carried, the Sultan his eyes was upon poured,

wahhba tari waiyen5. Darar dambe ya Habiyo Butiya

nothing to be of use it failed. A day following Habiyo Butiya

'anihisi nagtisi u si dibei, wuhhu yidi, " Abaha iyo hoyoda
his milk to his wife he gave, he said, " Your father and your mother

yanei ku arkin, kolkad ku shubesid.'' Kolkasei 'anihi

let them not you see, when you in pour." Then she the milk

geisei, kolkasei ku shubtei. Indihi Suldanka iyo indihi hoyoded
took, then she in poured. The eyes of the Sultan and the eyes of her mother

ya u8 dila'ei. Kolkasei fnanti so arartei, akhalkedi bei timi.
opened. Then she the girl ran away, to her house she came.

1 you men, cf. §§ 200 (iii) and 206.

2 Note order of particles, § 236.

a ah may be added to any noun used adjectivally or descriptively.

4 from ghado take to yourself.

5 plural agreeing with 'ano, which is a plural noun.

6 i.e. by reason of it.

150 PROSE

Kolkasa Suldanki oghadei in Habiyo Butiya indihi u dila'ei.
Then the Sultan learned that Habiyo Butiya the eyes opened.

Suldanki ba u yedei inamodi kaleh e gabdihlsi gursadei,
The Sultan called the young men other who his daughters married,

wuhhu yidi, " fnanki Habiyo Butiya e gabaddaidi yereid gursadei
he said, "The boy Habiyo Butiya who my girl young married

yan u dlbei magalodaida hukumkeda. fdinkuna eidan u
I have given my town its government. And ye servants to

n6khda." Habiyo Butiya dabad^d Suldan nbkhdei.
him be." Habiyo Butiya afterwards Sultan became.

II. INANKI MASKA DILEI.

fnan iyo fnan wa walalaaha. Lo' bai jiren, mel 'idlaah bai her
ku ahayen. Inankuna lo'du ra'l jirei, Inantuna akhalka yei fadiyf
jirtei, habenki bei heroda iss ugu iman jiren. lnanti ba ghorohh
badatei, rag ba weidistei, fnanki ba u dldei in la gursado Inanta.
Malin dambe ya niman akhalki lnanti ugu ylmaden. Kolkasei la
hassawen, fnanki e walalaahayen Inanta, ya galabti so hoidei. Kol-
kasu oghkdei in rag u yimi lnanti, o iss ka am us. Mklinti dambe ya
nimanki lnanti u so n6khden, wahhai yidahhden, " An walalka dilne,
gormu daganyahai ? " Kolkasei lnanti tidi, " Kolku lo'di lisseyo."
Habenki bei ylmaden, kolku lo'da lisseyei, muski bei ka so b6den.
Kolku arkei 'ollki, yu sefti .labahhai, kolkasa walashi timaha
gh6botei, kolkasu timihi u goiyei, muski bu ka bddei. Odi bai
ghorihisi ka goisei. Kolkasu bahhsodei, wuhhu taga magalo agted,
wahha1 ku hednaged Inan. Wuhhu yidi, "Nayktahai?" Kolkasei
tidi, " Suldknki magkloda ya i dalei." Wuhhu yidi, "Mahhkd ugu2
hedantahai mesha ? " Wahhai tidi, " Mas ba lei hedei, maskas ba i
imaneya o i 'uneya." Kolkasu yidi, "Gormu yimada?" Kolkasei
tidi, " Asarka." " Kolku yimkdo muhhu sameineya masku ? "
Wahhai tidi, "Biyuhu8 'abeya marka hore, dabad^dto-na anigu4 i
'uneya." Kolkasu yidi, "Watahai." Kolki maski yimi yu blyihi
ku da'ei, kolkas Inanki sefti labahhai o madaha kaga diftei, kolkasa
maski dintei. lnanti bu kahaistei, magalodi bu geyei. Dadki

1 Note this use of wahha — There was tied to a tree, a girl.

2 mahhad u mesha ku hedantahai ?

8 blyaha u. * anlga u.

PROSE 151

magklodi j6gei ya ku so ararei, isago inanti wada. Wahha la yidi,
"War, wk side?" Kolkasu yidi, "Maski ban dilei." Kolkasa
Suldanka lo geyei, o lei yidi, " Ninkasa maski dilei." Kolkasa
Suldanka yidi, "Inantaida giirso." Halkasa inanki inanti ku
gursadei.

III. fNANTI LUGAHA1AEID.

Suldkn ba inan laha, fnanta ghorknka lo digi ' jirei. B^rigi dambe
ya Suldknki hajki ghobtei, inanti bu amkneyei nin wadkdah, o yidi,
" fnantas ghorknka u si dig3." Wadkdki ba inanti iss ka dama'ei
inu ka simeisto, inanti ba didei. Darkrti dambe yei tidi, " Berri i
kkli." Darkrti-ai mudeisten yei sallknki kkhalki ka ghadei, halki
wadkdki ka so full jirei. Abahed yu warkhad u direi, wuhhu ku
ghorei, " Inantkdi dilo' ei nokhotei." Suldknki ba hajki ka yimi.
Inanti bu u adkdei, wuhhu u dibei niman adomaah, wuhhu yidi,
"fnantas ghorta ka so goiya." Adbmihi ya inanti kahhayei, wahhai
geyen mel dirleh. Inanti bei lugaha ka goiyen, kolkasei habashedi
ghoden. Intei habkshi ghodeyen, yei ka gurguratei, mel dirleh yei
gashei, o kaga dumatei. Adomihi kolkei habkshi ghoden yei
meshiei fadidei ka egen3, wa ka waiyen, Kolkasei dero dilen, digi
deroda ghar6rad ku shuben. Suldknki bei u geyen digi, o yidahhden
" Inanti dilnei." Mklin dambe ya skfar meshi so marei, meshi
inanti fadidei yu degei. Duhurki kolki safarku aurti rertei, yei
inanti o dirti fadida arken. Inanti ya nin so ghadei, aur bu so
skrei. Magklodi-ai yimaden yu kenei. Inanti ya ninki so ghadei
akhal fadisiyei. Beri dambe ya inan Suldan dalei ya inanti weijigedi
arkei, weijigedi o wankksan4 ya inanki arkei. Ninki-ai akhalkisa
fadidei yu ku yidi, ''An inanta ka giirsado." Ninki ba yidi,
" Inanta wa lugolkdahai." Kolkasa inanki Suldknkaii yidi, " Ana
gurskneya, i si." Kolkasu yidi, " Haurkrsan." Inanti ba inanki
Suldknka gursadei. Laba inan yei u dashei. Iyadu urleh ya
inanki yidi, " Hajki ban ghobdneya." Inanki ba inanti uga tegei

1 teach.

2 continue to teach.

3 ka fcgen. Note the use of ka in these expressions, meaning, to look for in
a place, or being unable to find in a place.

* The Possessive adjective suffix -gedi is treated as an epithet, and therefore
the particle o is required for the second adjective wanaksan.

152 PROSE

wan1, o hajki ghobtei. Isago hajki ku maghan, ya nagtlsi dadabtei,
wahhai riyotei lyadu labada lugod laba shimbirod kaga j6gta, o
lugihi u behhen, o hajki ghtfbotei. Arorti kolki wagu berlyei, ya
wahhai arakta labadi shimbirod o labadi lugod kaga j6ga, o lugihi u
behhen. Arorti kolkei ahaid, yei labadedi fnan iyo wanki iyo labadi
shimbirod kahhaisatei, hajki bei gh<5botei. Dar dauga dehhdeda yei
taktai, wahha ugu yimi abahed iyo walalked iyo wadadki iyo
ninkedi intas o midna an u garanin. Inamodedi yei u shekeisei,
dawodi iyada heshei yei ugu shekeisei, abahed ba makhlei iyo
wadadki, kolkasa wadadki dama'ei inu araro, kolkasa Suldanki
yidi, "Fadi inta sheltado damaneso." Suldanki, fnanta abahed, ya
wadadki ghorti ka goiyei, fnanti iyo abahed iyo ninkedi inti wa leiss
wada ra'ei. Hajki ba la tegei. fnanti iyo abahed halki yei iss ku
girten.

IV. HdGGI DlRTA.

Suldan ba fnan laha, fnanki ba yidi, "Wa gursaneya." Suldanki
ba h6la badan slyei, markabna wa siyei. Inanki Suldanka ya d6fei
magaloii tegei. Magalodi kolku tegei, yu nin Suldan la sahhebei
Suldanki ba dar siyei, darti u ku jirei fnanku iyo darti Suldanka ya
iss u daldliyei. Nagti Suldanki2 la sahhebei. Malinti dambe yu
nagti Suldanka Inanki ku yidi, " Sorti ninkaga adu sam^in jirta o
kaleh i samei." Suldanki ba fnanki u tegei, wuhhu yidi, "Awa
anad wahh i la 'unese." Suldanki wuhhu yidi, " Haurkrsan."
Inanki ba nagti Suldanka ku yidi, " Awa kolka anigu iyo Suldanku
annu sorta 'uneno, wahhan d6neya inad sorta na sisid." Nagti ba
tidi, " Suldanki ya i garaneya." Kolkasu yidi, " Ku garan mayo,
ana ku odan wa nagtaidi." Nagti ba tidi, " Hadu i garan waiyo,
adiga yan ku ra'i d6na, o nag ku nokhon." Habenki ba Suldknki
akhalki yimi, darkisi bu ghatei, fnanka akhalkisi bu yimi. Nkgti
ba h6ggi akhalka ka so dustei3, Inanka akhalkisi bei timi. Kolkasei
Suldanki iyo fuanki sorti sisei. Suldanki ba gartef nagtisi, kursigi
bu ka ka'ei, akhalkisi bu u ka'ei. Intanu akhalki gadin yei nkgti
h6ggi ka dustei, gogoshedi yei ku fadisatei, Suldanki ba arkei.
Kolku arkei yu haddana akhalki fnanka ku so nokhdei, h6ggi bei ka

1 lit. went from a ram for her, i.e. left a ram for her.
« Suldanka u. 3 come through.

PROSE 153

so dustei nkgti, nkgti bu haddana arkei. Inanki, u 'untoda la
'uneyei, ya Suldanki ku yidi, " Ma nagtatan sorta inna slnesa miad
nagtadi modei ? " Inanki ba yidi, " Nkgtu wa nagtaidi." Suldanki
ba '8S ka fadlstei. Ar6ryodi dambe ya fnanki Suldanka ku yidi,
" Wa d6feya." " Haurkrsan," bu yidi. Nkgti Suldanka ya fnanki
la ballamei, o yidi, " Arorta halkas ka so dus, wa d6feya." Nkgti
ba halki ka so dustei, fnanki yei u timi, markabki bu geyei, wa la
d6fei, fnanki ba nkgti Suldanka gursadei, kolku la bahsodei.

V. MAGALODI HOLAHA DADKA KU 'UNA.

Wahh lei yidi, nin ba faras fulei, wuhhu1 yimi habkr, wabhai
tidi, " Haggad ku so'ota?" Wuhu yidi, " Magklodas an ku so'-
oda." Wabhai tidi, "Magkloda dadka lagu3 ghasha, yan lagu
ghalonine, ha gelin." Wuhhu yidi, " Kulli wa geleya." Wahhai
tidi, " Magkloda nin Suldknah bei lehdahai, ninka Suldknka fnan
bu lehyahai, fnanta bokhorkeda wa mas, masku dadka 'una. Aurna
isagu dadka 'una, kkhalka hortisa yu fadista, halko golgol ku fadista."
Wahhai tidi, " War, nino, hadad magkloda tegesa3, fnanta Suldanka
dalei akhalkeda <5rod o gal." Wuhhu yidi, " Ninki bei yidi4, Eiga
dadka 'una, iyo aurka dadka 'una, iyo maska dadka 'una, haggan ka
dan d6na? " Iyadi bk tidi, " Gedaha ghado o5, aurki yu ku 'unine,
kolkad dafiso kkhalkiad ku so'oto, gedaha afka u geli, yu ku 'unine.
Ei'gana 'adka ghado o, eiga agtisi dig o, ha 'uno, yu adiga 'unine.
Maskana wa kan fnanta dehhdeda ku duban, ghoriga ghado o, maska
madahisi sar, dabad^d maska u diman d6na. Kolkad sida yesho
dabaddd kkhalka gal o fnanta u tag, dabad^d fnanta ghrso." Kol-
kasu isagu fnanta gursadei.

1 wuhhu here represents wahha u, in which u is the particle = to. It means
literally therefore, There came to (him) an old woman.

2 la ku. ku in, and refers to the town, ghalonine. The usual form is
ghalon for the negative Imperative. This must be some Continuative form,
but I have not met it elsewhere.

3 Indicative mood, i.e. If you are (as you say) going.

4 bei = ba i. Who is the man referred to is not clear. There must be some
omission in the rendering of the story.

5 The conjunction o is frequently used like this with the first coordinate
sentence, instead of introducing the second.

154 PROSE

VI. NASIB.

Wahh lei yidi, nin ba dan rerei, danki bu kahhayei, 'elki bu
geyei, wa ka so danshei1. Kolku so danshei yu aurti 'ss ku so
hedishei. Kolkiu dehhdi j6gei ya lehh aur ka hadei, lehhdi kaleh
so kahhayei. Kolku mel f6g jogei yu lehhdi ka hadei wai. Kolkasu
dib u so 6rdei. Lehhdi aur o2 lehh libahh 'unesa ayu gu yimi,
kolkasu iss kaga yimi. Lehhdi aur 6 kaleh o8 lehh libahh 6 kaleh
'unesa ugu yimi. Kolkasu sibrar bu ka ghatei aurti, gurig6di yu
yimi, rerk6di o2 la da'ei bu arkei, o 'oil da'ei.

VII. NAGTI WANAKSANEID.

Nin ba fnau laha. fnanki ba yidi, abihi ku yidi, "Abo, wahhan
dbneya, nag an gursada." Kolkasu yidi, " Wahhad so kahhaisata
nag armali." Kolkasa armalidi so kahhaistei, kolkasu yidi, "Gurso."
Kolkasu gursadei. Kolkasu yidi, ;< Hadig ku hed, kolkei ku la
hadasho hadiga ka fur." Kolkasu hadiga ku hedei. Nagti ba tidi,
"Wahhan3 maan arkf jirin, mahhad nogu4 sameinesa ? " Kolkasu
hadigi ka furei. Arorti yu abihi bu yimi, kolkasu yidi, " Mahhai ku
tidi ? " Kolkasu yidi, " Wahhai i tidi, ' Wahhan maan arkf jirin,
wahhas mahhad nogu sameinesa ? ' " Kolkasu yidi, " 'ss ka 'eri."
Tasu wa mid.

Inanki ya abihi bu yidi, "Nag kaleh so kahhaiso, fnan wein so
kahhaiso." Kolkasu yidi, "Awa hadig ku hed. Kolkei ku la
hadasho ka fur." Kolkasu hedei, kolkasei tidi, " Wahhan maan u
makhli jirin, mahhad wahha nogu hddesa?" Kolkasu ka furei.
Arorti abihi u yimi, kolkasu yidi, " WTahhai tidi, ' Wahhan maan
makhli jirin, mahhad hadiga nogu sameinesa ? ' ' Kolkasu yidi,
" Tanna 'ss ka 'eri." Tasna wa mid.

Kolkasu yidi, " Wahhad so kahhaisata fnan yer o wanaksan."
Kolkasu so kahhaistei. Kolkasu yidi, " Awa hadig ku hed, kolkei
ku la hddasho hadiga ka fur." Kolkasa fnanki 'ss ka sehhodei,
habenki 6 dan yu 'ss ka hurdei. Kolki arorti ahaid manti yei
inanki ke'isei, kolkasei tidi, " Hadigi-ad igu hedtei wa iga da'ei, o
igu ma hedna, hadiga igu hed." Arortina abihi yu u shegei, " Abo,
wahhai tidi, ' Hadiga iga da'ei, o igu ma hedna, hadiga igu hed.' "
Kolkasu yidi abihi ba yidi, " Tas haiso, tasa ba wanaksan." Ti
dabad^d yu 'ss ka gursadei.

1 from Uinao, of. § 104. 2 Adjectival sentences with o, cf. § 261.

8 This thing. 4 na u ku.

PROSE 155

VIII. DADKU IYO WARABUHU.

Wahha lei yidi, Warabuhu h6lah£ laha, Dadku wahhba ma
lahain. Bengi dambe ya Dadku h61aha Warabaha u ilaliyei,
Warabahana wa shirei. Be>igi dambe aya Dadku tashadei, wuhhu
yidi, "An Warabaha h61aha ka ghadno, fyaga o shirki Warabihi ku
maghanyahai." Ya Dadki holihi 6dei. Habenki u yimi, kolki-u
yimi ya laga 'eriyei. Warabihi ya ghailo tegei, bahalihi kaleh ugu
tegei, wuhhu yidi, " War, lei da'ei." Kolkasei yidahhen, " An
dulno." Mel bei so maren, balli biyo ku jiran yei yimaden. Sakaro
lab aya yidi "Balli hadeidinan i dein, ka 'abi maysan." "War, wa
ka 'abena, naga tag," yei yidahhen. Biyihi yu 'idi ku shubei,
kolkas biyihi idladen, kolkas harad u bakhtiyen, kolkei biyo waiyen.

IX. HASHU IYO H6LAHEDA.

Wahha lei yidi, Hal wahh wada laha, mas iyo hhas, iyo dab,
iyo dad, iyo libahh, iyo ghaiyano, iyo amin, wa toddbodas ya hashi
ka dahhaisei. 'Ashodi dambe ya ghaiyanodi tidi, " Libahha hasho
wein inna ka ghadne, an libahha dillo." Kui kaleh ya yidi, " Side
u dilla ? " Kolkasei tidi, "Maska libahha ha ghanino. Kolkad
ghaninto, hhaska gal." Kolkasa yo1 ghaninei, kolkasu hhaski galei.
Kolkasei tidi, " Dabka 0, hhaski iyo maska gublabadaba." Kolkas
hhaski iyo maski dabki ya gubei. Kolkasei tidi, " Dabku iya maska
iyo hhaska bakhtiyei, dadkuna dabka ha bakhtiyo." Kolkasei kminta
tidi, " Dadku biirta ma maro, dehhda un bu mara, an innagu hasha
burta la marro." Kolkasei burti la maren. Kolkasei tidi ghaiyanodi,
"An hasha ghalono." Kolkasei ghashen, kolkasei 'adka bisleisaten,
'adki bei lukhoten. 'Adki mahai wahh kaleh ka ma 'unin, 'adki ya
ku mergadei, 'ad wein bu aha, afkina u mari wai. Kolkasei
bakhtiyen.

X. NINKI INDAHALAA.

Mesha rag badan ya wada hadleyei. Laba nin, midna wa
indalayahai midna ma indalaa. Ninki indahalaha2 aya yidi,
"Mahhad nin indala kala hadlesan ? Wahhba arki mayo." Ki
indahalaa3 ba yidi, " Ya nin indala u4 taghanin ? " Inti kalehto ya

1 ya u.

2 Note inflexion of adjective, nin indaleh a man with eyes, but ninki
indahalaha the man with eyes.

3 nin indala, ninki indahalaa.

* By what do you know a blind man ?

156 PROSE

tidi, " Wahhannu ninki indahalaa u naghan, ninki an wahhba
arkenin." Markasu ki indahalaa yidi, " Wahha indala, ninki an
ogh6n lahain, ya indala."

The following is an example of the pure narrative style, being an
account of Col. Swayne's expeditions against the Mullah, from the
raising of the levy in November 1900 to the battle of Erigo in
October 1902. It was taken down by me from the mouth of a
Somali native officer with the force, Nur Jama, Habr Awal.

Note the use of iyanna, iyu, etc. for the pronouns yannu,
yu, etc. The Present tense is freely used for the Past.

The raising of the Levies.

Kolkas " Swayne " ba im^neya, askarr badan bu ghorfneya
(enlist). Kolkas " Swayne " so bahhai, Harrar bu nogu yimid.
Kolkasu yidi, "Askarr ban d6neya." Markas Oskar Garad,
"Imisad d6nesa?" bu yidi. Markasu yidi, "Boghol fardoleh ban
d6neya." Markasu yidi, " Bogholki lagu sineya." Bogholki aya
la siyei. Kolki la siyei, iyannu so so'ona. Adadleh iyannu nimid.
Sided kumbaui (company) iyannu nokhonei. Kolkas iyannu
ayarsina (drill), bil keliah iyannu fadinei. Kolkasu 'ollki "Swayne"
no yimi, Burao-na ka so so'onei, Ber bannu tagnei.

"Col. Swayne" iyo "Col. Phillips" labadas u sarreyen (were
in command). Wadadku wuhhu yal Olesan. Kolkas iyannu nimid
Uduwein. Halo la direi, wadadki, so ego1 la yidi. Dabaded wahha
lei yidi, wadadki bahhsei2. Uduwein iyannu ka gurrei (started).
Dabaded wahhannu tagnei Olesan. Wadadki wuhhu jirei Nogal.
Olesan bannu ka gurrei, dabadddto Wad&mag6 ilalo iyannu ka
dirrei. Ilalodi iyei rero so araktei, hal iyo aur iyei so heshei.
Faraski iyo Rakubki iyannu ka dulinei (sent to attack), dabaded
'ollki kolku dulei iyannu ka daba gurrei. Kolkas laba dararod
iyannu so'onei, kolkas Haridig (Sanala) bannu degnei. Rakubki
iyo Faraski sided kun o gelah3 iyei kenei. Kolkas " Swayne " iyu
yidi ; " Laba kumbani iyei halkan fadiyesa, gelina halkas iyei laga
ka tegi" (will be left). Kolkas kurabanaydga u so hadei, iyo geli.
Kolkasa 'ollki "Swayne" u tegei.

1 in la so ego. 2 cf. § 104, note.

3 After sided kun o, gel is made adjectival by the termination ah.

PROSE 157

MacNeUVs zariba (Sanala).

"Capt. MacNeill" iyo "Murray" iyei heroda laga ka tegei.
Kolkas ilalodi wadadka iyannu aragnei. Malinti labada sa'adod
(2 o'clock) 'ollkisu no yimid. Kolkannu 'ollki aragnei, iya sirkalku,
" Zaribada so gala," bu yidi, dabadddna iyannu wererrei (fought),
kolkas iyannu iss lei'nei (slew each other), dabad^dna afar sa'adod
(for 4 hours) iyannu dagalla (fought). Lehhdi sa'adod (6 o'clock)
iyannu ka 'ennei (chased) kolka dabaddd zaribada gudahi iyannu iss
ku fadisona. Kolkasu dabad^dto todobadi sa'adod habenki iyannu
wererrei, laba sa'adod bannu dagalla, kolkasa sagalki sa'adod iyannu
'ennei. Haddana k6di bei so nokhden, haddana sa'ad keliah iyannu
dagalla. Kolkas iyaga iyannu leina, dabad^dna wa araren (they
ran away). Kolkas waga iyo beri (in the early morning) tod6badi
sa'adod iyei so nokhden, kolkasannu iss leina, kolkasannu derewishti
iyannu wada leina.

Intanei so dowanin (Before they came close) gidliganki (the
Maxim gun) iyu lei. Kolkei so dowaden askarrti banadtikhdi iyei
ku dishei. (Gidliganki wa wanaksanyahai, wa bahal, wa shaitan).
Kolki nimanki fogeyen iya gidliganki lagu si dayei, kolkas rag badan
ka lai (died), kolkas dabaddd haggi zaribada iyei ku so ya'ei (fled).
Afar nin o askari wadad1 w&ranki iyu ku dilei. Kolkas iyannu
'ennei, afa'rton nin iyannu gh6bonei.

"Capt. MacNeill" iyu aniga u yedei, wuhhu yidi, " Inti wadadka
laga dilei so tiri." Wahhan kahhaistei t6ban askari, wahhannu ka
dignei afar bdghol iyo lehhdon inti diinatei. Annaga labadi
kumbani sagal nin iyei ka dilen. Kolkas "MacNeill" ba yidi,
wuhhu yidi, " Ragi derewishki dintei mel iss u gei." Kolkas iyannu
mel keliah so kennei. Kolkasa 'ollki " Swayne " iyu no yimid,
wad^dki wahhba isagu ka ma helin.

Ferdiddin.
'Ollki o dan iyu Bohotle iss ugu yimid. Dabad^dna ilalo iyannu
ka dinei. Kurmis iyei gel badan ku so araktei. Ilalodi ba so
nokhotei, gel badan iyannu aragnei, 'ollki o dan iya gurei, dabadedna
Kurmis iyannu tagnei. Allegheri gel badan laga so ghadei. Shan
iyo t6ban 'asho iyannu fadinei. Dadki hdlahalaha ba no yimid.
Dadki iyu " Colonel "-ki u yimaden. Wuhhu yidahhei, " Edinkannu
idin ra'ena, adigi iya lo 'elin " (will be recovered). Kolkasu yidi,
" Hadeidin ra'esdn adigi iyan idin ku 'elfneya. Reraha o dan so
rera o agteda kena." Kolkasi Allegheri na ra'ei. Kolkasu yidi,
1 waddd here used for a Mullah's man.

158 PROSE

" Wadadki bannu idin la d6nena." Dabad^d iyannu gurrei. B6hotle
iyannu nimid. Ragi buka o askarrtaaha iya B6hotle lagu rebei
(were left behind), dabadddna Bohotle iyannu ka gurrei. Wahhannu
degnei Wudwud, dabaddd ilalo Wudwud iyannu ka dirrei. Wahhai
yidahhen, "Wadadku wa f6gyahai." Kolkasannu ka gurrei, shan
haben iyo shan dararod so so'onei. Dararti dambe iyannu 'ollki
wadadka iss hellei (met). DabadM iyannu dirirrei. Wahhai kaga
dilen shan iyo t6ban askari iyo sirkdlki af-Arabed (i.e. Capt.
Friedrichs). " Dickinson " sahib rasas ba ku da'dei, b6dodi kaga
da'dei. Shan iyo labaton askari iyei rasasti ku da'dei, an dimanin
(without being killed). Kolkas iyannu biyo wehna (could not find)
o so nokhonei. Wahhannu ka so baghanei, askarrti hadanei biyo
haison, wa bakhtiyesa. Shan iyo t6ban 'asho iyannu Berberah u so
dahhnei. Kolkannu halkan nimid, askarrti gel badan la siyei,
hawildarki sadehh halod iya la siyei, ninki jemadarkaaha afar ba la
siyei. Askarrti fasahh, nin ba bil fasahh iyu helei.
" Force "-kan halkas iyu ku damadei.

Las Idleh raids.

'Ollki labad iyu Burao wa so yimi. Burao-na dabaded afar bflod
fadfna, kolkas ilalo laga direi. Ilalodi Ali Naleyah iyei u taktei,
wahhai tidi, " H6lo badan iyannu so aragnei." Afar kumbani iyo
"Col. Cobbe " iyo "Col. Swayne " iyannu ku so'onei, wahhannu
tagnei Las Idleh. Las Idlehna faras badan nogu yimid. Kolkas
iyannu ilalo dirrei. Ilalodi iyei tidi, " Holo badan iyannu so
aragnei." Kolkasannu Las Idleh ka gurrei, kobyo-thban haben u si
so'onei. Jid Ali iyannu Ali Naleyah u tagnei, kolkasu kumbani
waliba mel marei. "Col. Swayne" iyo kumbani badki iyannu mel
kaga tagnei. Kolkas iyannu Ali Naleyah we>errei, habenki iyo
dararti wa h6lihi ka da'nei. Kolkas holihi iyannu zaribadi i so
kennei, wihhi-annu rag aragnei iyannu leinei. Kolkasannu ka so
gurrei. Wahhannu tagnei, Las Idleh shan iyo toban haben iyannu
u so dahhnei. Kolkas askarrti ba adi la siyei, ninki askari aha
labyo-toban adi la siyei, ninki hawildarka iyo naikka labaton la
siyei, jemadarki iyo " color-havildar "-ki soddon ba la siyei. "Col.
Cobbe " iyo " Col. Swayne " Berberah ku nokhden. " Maj. Petrie "
iyo afar kumbani Burao-annu so nokhonei, kolka bil fadmei Burao.
Kolkasa "Col. Swayne" iya no yimid. Wuhhu yidi, " Force "-ku wa
bahhaya, wadadka iyannu d6nena. Reidka Somalida gel maawinah
i kena," bu yidi. Kolkasi Habr Awal iyo Habr Yunis gholi walba

PROSE 159

sided boghol o halod iya lo kena, Habr Toljala lehh boghol o halod
lo kena.

The Nogal Campaign.

Kolkas 'ollki iyu dakhkghei. Kumbanaykga sided dararod naga
dambeyei. Kolkasu Rakhbki iyo Faraski Berberah ka yfmaden, o
Burao nogu yimaden. Wahha u sarreyei " Capt. Osborne." Kolkas
annu 'ollki ka daba tagnei. Shan dararod dabad^d Bohotle iyannu
ghobonei. Kolkannu Bohotle ghobonei, "Col. Swayne" iyo 'ollki
iyannu u tagnei. Kolkasa ilalo laga direi, ilklodi iya toban haben
iyei naga maghana. Ilklodi wa so nokhotei, wahhai yidahhen,
"Wadadki maannu arag." Kolkasa " Colonel "-ku ba yidi, "Wa
dulena." Nogal iyannu ku dullei. Kolkas iyannu tagnei Gerowei.
H6lo badan iyannu Mohammed Garad ka ghadnei. Gerowei labaton
haben bannu fadinei. Ilklo iya la direi. Ilklodi wadadki iyei Mudug
ugu taktei (went to Mudug for the Mullah). Ilklodi ba no timid,
ilklodi ba tidi, " Wa omaniaha, o biyo heli mayno." Kolkas iyannu
Bari gh6bonei. Halin bannu gh6bonei. Naleyah Ahhmed holo badan
iyannu ka so ghadnei. Kolkasa sirkklku yidi, "Wa nokhonena."
Labyo-t6ban 'asho bannu so so'onei, kolkasannu Gaulo nimid, kolkas
" Colonel "-ku yidi, " Laba nin o sirakil, iyo waranlaha iyo h6laha
ha nokhdan." Kolkasa h61ihi iyo waranlihi iyo laba sirkal iyei
nokhden. Skdehh kun o geli iyu " Colonel "-ku so rebei.

Erigo (Oct. 6, 1902).

Kolkas ilklo la direi, wahhai taktei, wadkdki iyei u taktei.
Kolkasei tidi, " Wadkdku Mudug bu fadiya." Kolkasannu ku
gurrei, kolkasu shan haben bannu dahhnei, 'ashodi lehhad arorti
Erigo derewishti iyannu iss ku hellei. Kolkasu mel bannu fadisona,
kolkasa dabade"dto derewishti iyei nagu so dakhaghdei. " Mile "
kolki no &6 jirei, sirkklku yidi, " Inna la dfriri mayan, aurta rera,
inna dakhkghna." Kolkasannu ku dakhkghnei. Mesha wa mel
ainah. Kolkas kumbani walba " extend " ba lo dakhkjiyei, sida-
annu so'onei o kol keliah l'yagu " fire " nogu ridei. Kolkasa berka
iyannu dulka digna, kolkas iyannu dirirrei. Afar kumbani wa teg,
iyei haggk ka bkghatei, o krarei. Sadehh kumbani iyannu dagkllei,
inti kkleh wa bkghatei. Kumbanaykga iyo lkba kkleh skdehhda
kumbani ba dagklen.

Zaribadi iyannu so gallei, kolkas derewishti iyei timid. Sadehh
kumbani iyei dibadda u bahhdei o '^ridei. Dabade"d Bohotle iyannu
nimid.

TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES.
I-XI.

I. HABIYO BUTIYA (LAME HABIYO).

There once was a Sultan who had a son, whose mother was dead. But
the Sultan married another wife, and went on a pilgrimage. Now a certain
Jew was a friend of the Sultan's wife, but the Sultan's son and the Jew
were enemies. The Jew said to the woman, " Let us kill the boy." So she
mixed some poison in his food. But the boy had a mare, who knew every-
thing, and the mare said to the boy, "Don't eat the food" ; and when the
food was put before him, the boy refused it. The next day the Jew came
to the Sultan's wife and said, " When the Sultan comes back, say you are
sick, and when he asks what will cure you, tell him the liver of the mare."
The next day the Sultan came. Then she laid a skin on the bed and
placed under it some fig leaves, and when she lay down the leaves crackled.
Then the Sultan said, " What is the matter with you ? " and she said, "I have
a pain in my ribs." " What will cure you ? " he said ; and she answered,
" The liver of your son's mare." The Sultan called the boy and said, " I
intend to kill your mare for your stepmother." And the boy said, " Very
well but let me take a ride on her this evening." In the evening the boy
rode the mare, and said to his father, "Good-bye, Father," and departed
with the mare. He went to a town, and near the town he saw six girls
washing at a welL The youngest of the girls saw him ; and when she saw
the man, she ran away from the well, being ashamed before the man. Then
he singed the tail of the mare, who went up into the sky. The young man
then pretended to be a cripple, and went into the town, and there became a
servant.

Later the daughters of the Sultan said, "We wish to marry." The
Sultan beat his drum, and announced, "My daughters wish to marry."
Then the rich young men came together, and the girls were brought, and
the people stood in the plain. Then the girls were asked, " Are the men
you want all here ? " And the young girl said, " The man I wanted is not
here." The slave girls who were summoning the men were told to call all
the men in the town, so they called the young cripple, Lame Habiyo. Then
the Sultan asked the girls, " Are the men all here ? " and they said, " Yes."

TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 161

The girls were given six oranges, and they were told, " Let each girl hit the
man she wants." The five other girls hit five rich young men, the young
girl hit Lame Habiyo. Then her father and mother were so struck with
hoiTor, that they lost their sight ; and the young man married the girl. On
the next day they were told, " That which will cure the Sultan and his wife
is rhinoceros' milk." And the young men who married the five girls were
given five good horses, and Lame Habiyo was given a donkey, and they left
the town. There came to Lame Habiyo the mare, whose tail he had burned,
and he put on his gold dress and sword and mounted the mare. The mare
flew up and reached the sky. Then he went to a place where rhinoceroses
are born. A young rhinoceros he cut open, and opened out the skin and
made a figure from it. In the afternoon the mother rhinoceros came, and
Lame Habiyo pretended to be the young one. The first portion of milk he
milked into one skin and the second portion he milked into another skin.
Then the rhinoceros went to graze. Then the young man threw away the
figure, and took the milk. He went to a tree and tied his mare to it. While
he slept under the tree the five young men who married the other girls
came to him, and said, " Salam Aleikum " ; and Lame Habiyo said, " Aleikum
Salam." Then he said, " "Where are you going ? " And they said, " We are
looking for rhinoceros' milk." Then he said, " I have some rhinoceros' milk.
What will you give for it ? " And they said, " Whatever you wish." Then he
said, "Wealth do I not want, but I will brand my name on the buttocks
of each of you." Then they said, "Agreed." So he branded his name on the
buttocks of all five. Then he gave them the first milk, and the second milk
Lame Habiyo took for himself. They went to the town where the Sultan
lived, and took the milk. The five young men carried the milk, and it was
poured on the eyes of the Sultan, but was of no use. Another day Lame
Habiyo gave his milk to his wife and said, " Let not your father and mother
see you, when you pour it in." Then she took the milk and she poured it
in. And the eyes of the Sultan and her mother were opened. Then the
girl came running away and came to her house. Then the Sultan learned
that Lame Habiyo had opened his eyes, and the Sultan called the other
young men that married his daughters, and he said, " To the young man
Lame Habiyo, who married my young daughter, have I given authority
over my town, and you, be his servants." Afterwards Lame Habiyo became
Sultan.

II. "THE DRAGON-KILLER."

(A variant of the story of Perseus and Andromeda.)

There were a brother and sister who kept a cow. They dwelt in a
deserted place, and the brother used to go with the cow, while the sister
used to sit in the house, and at night they met in the zariba. The sister
was of great beauty, and men asked for her, but her brother refused to let
the girl be married. One day some men came into the house for the girl,

K. 11

162 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES

and they conversed ; and the brother came in in the evening and found
that men had come for his sister, but he said nothing. The next day the
men returned to the girl and said, " We think of killing your brother ; when
is he engaged ? " And the girl said, " When he is milking the cow." In
the evening they came as he was milking the cow and leaped in over the
fence. When he saw the enemy, he drew his sword. His sister seized
his hair, but he cut it off, and jumped over the fence, which cut off his
genitals ; and he escaped. He went near a town where there was a girl tied
to a tree, and he said, " Who are you, girl ? " And she said, " My father is the
Sultan of the town." And he said, " Why are you tied up here ? " And she
said, " I am tied up for a dragon, which will come and eat me." Then he
said, " When does it come ? " And she said, " In the evening." And he said,
" When the dragon comes, what will it do ? " And she said, " First it will
drink the water, and afterwards eat me." And he replied, "Very well."
When the dragon came, it went down to the water, but the young man
drew his sword and struck it on the head, and it died. Then he led away
the girl, and brought her to the town, and the people of the town came
running to him, as he led the girl, and they said, " What is this ? " And he
said, " I have killed the dragon." Then he was brought to the Sultan, and
they said, " This man has killed the dragon." And the Sultan bade him
marry his daughter. So thereupon the man married her.

III. THE GIRL WITHOUT LEGS.

A Sultan had a daughter, and the daughter used to be taught the Koran.
One day the Sultan went on a pilgrimage, and entrusted his daughter to a
priest, and said, "Continue to teach that girl the Koran." The priest
coveted the girl, wishing to lie with her, but the girl refused. One day she
said, " Come to me to-morrow." On the day arranged she removed from the
house the ladder by which the priest used to ascend. He then sent a letter
to her father, and he wrote, " Your daughter has become a harlot." The
Sultan returned from the pilgrimage, and he was angry with the girl, and
he handed her over to some slaves, and he said, " Cut that girl's throat."
Then the slaves took the girl, and they brought her to a wooded place, and
they cut off her legs, while they dug her grave. While they were digging
the grave she crawled away, and went into some trees and hid. When the
slaves had dug the grave they looked in the place where she had lain and
could not find her. Then they slew a gazelle, and the gazelle's blood they
poured into a bottle, and brought the blood to the Sultan, and said, " We
have slain the girl." One day later a caravan passed by the place, and
camped where the girl lay. In the afternoon as the party were loading up
the camels, they saw the girl sitting under a tree. A man took the girl,
and put her on a camel, and brought her to the town they came to. The
man who took the girl put her to live in a house. Later on the son of the
Sultan saw the girl's face, and the young man saw that her face was

TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 163

beautiful, and he said to the man whose house she dwelt in, " Let me
marry that girl from you." And the man said, "The girl has no legs."
Then the Sultan's son said, " I will marry her, give her to me." And so
the man said, " Well and good." And the Sultan's son married her. She
bore two children, and while she was with child the young man said, " I am
going on a pilgrimage," and he left her a ram, and went on the pilgrimage.
While he was away on the pilgrimage his wife had a dream, and she
dreamed that two birds sat upon her two legs, and her legs had grown out,
and that she made the pilgrimage. In the morning at break of day she
saw the two birds sitting upon her two legs, and the legs had grown out.
After daylight she took her two children and the ram and the two birds,
and went on the pilgrimage. She came to a building at the half-way, and
there came to her her father and her brother and the priest and her
husband, none of whom knew her. She told stories to her children, and
she related all that had happened to her, and her father heard, and the
priest. Then the priest tried to run away, but the Sultan said, " Sit down
until the story is finished." Then the Sultan, the girl's father, cut the
priest's throat, and the girl with her father and husband went on and
made the pilgrimage. And so the girl and her father were reconciled.

IV. THE HOLE IN THE WALL.

There was a Sultan who had a son, and his son said, " I want to marry."
So the Sultan gave him many presents, and also a ship. The Sultan's son
set sail and came to a town, and when he arrived at the town he became
friendly with a Sultan, and the Sultan gave him a house. The young man
made a hole between the house he was in and the Sultan's house, and he
became friendly with the Sultan's wife. One day the young man said to the
Sultan's wife, " Make some food for me just as you are accustomed to make
it for your husband" And he went to the Sultan, and said, " To-night will
you take food with me 1 " And the Sultan said, " Well and good." And
the young man said to the Sultan's wife, " To-night when I and the Sultan
are having our food, I want you to serve us with the food." And the woman
said, " The Sultan will know me." Then he said, " He will not know you,
I will say you are my wife." And she said, " If he does not know me, I will
go with you and be your wife." At night the Sultan came home and
dressed himself, and came to the young man's house. And his wife passed
through the hole in the wall, and came to the young man's house. Then
she served the food to the Sultan and the young man. The Sultan recognised
his wife, and got off his chair, and went to his house. Before he reached
his house, the woman passed through the hole and sat upon her bed, and
the Sultan saw her. When he saw her he straightway came back to the
house of the young man, while the woman came through the hole, and still

11—2

164 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES

he saw her. The young man, who was dining with him, said to the Sultan,
" Did you think this woman who is serving our food was your wife ? The
woman is my wife," he said, and the Sultan sat down. The next morning
the young man said, " I am sailing." " Very good," he answered. And the
young man arranged with the Sultan's wife and said, " In the morning come
through that place, I am sailing." So the woman passed through and came
to the young man, and he took her to the ship, and sailed. And the young
man having run away with the Sultan's wife married her.

V. THE TOWN OF MAN-EATERS.

There is a story that a man was riding a horse, and there came to him an
old woman, who said, " Where are you going ? " And he said, " I am going
to that town." And she said, " In that town people are slain and eaten ; do
not go in, lest they slay you." And he answered, " Still I am going in."
Then she said, " The town has a Sultan, and the Sultan has a daughter, and
the daughter's sash is a snake, and the snake eats the people. And there is
a camel who eats the people, he sits in front of the house, over there upon a
bed." And she said, " See, my man, if you are going to the house, run and
enter the house of the Sultan's daughter." And he said, " The man told me,
The dog eats the people, and the camel eats the people, and the snake eats
the people. How am I going to pass them ? " And the woman said, " Take
this grass, and let not the camel eat you, but when you pass the house you
are going to, put the grass in at the door, lest it eat you. And for the dog,
take this piece of meat, and put it near the dog, and let him eat it and not
you. And for the snake, which is tied round the girl's waist, take this stick,
and place it on the snake's head, and then the snake will die. After you
have done this enter the house and go to the girl, and then marry her." So
he married the girl.

VI. MISFORTUNES.

There is a story that a man once loaded his water-camels and took them
to the well, and went to draw water. When he went to draw water he tied
his camels together. When he was in the nullah he left six camels behind
while he led the other six. When he was some distance off, the six camels
that were left behind were not to be seen. So he ran back, and came up
to find six lions eating the six camels. Then he left them, and returned to
the other six camels, and found six other lions eating these. Then he took
a waterskin from the camels, and came to his home, to find his family looted
by an enemy.

TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 165

VII. HOW TO CHOOSE A WIFE.

A man had a son, and the son said to his father, " Father, I want to
marry a wife." Then his father said, " Do you take a widow." So he took a
widow, and his father said, " Marry her." So he married her. Then his
father said, " Tie her with a rope, and when she speaks to you, untie the
rope." So he tied her with a rope, and the woman said, " This is not what
I have been accustomed to see. What are you doing with me ? " Thereupon
he untied the rope. In the morning his father came and said, " What did
she say?" And he answered, "She said to me, This is not what I have been
accustomed to see. Why are you doing that to me ? " Then his father
said, "Send her away." That was one.

The father said to his son, " Take another wife, take a grown girl."
Then he said, " To-night tie her with a rope, and when she speaks to you,
untie it" So he tied her, and she said, "This is not what I have been
accustomed to hear, why are you tying me with that ? " So he untied her.
In the morning he came to his father, and he said, " She said, This is not
what I have been accustomed to hear, what are you doing to me with
the rope ? " Then his father said, " Send her away too." And that was
another.

Then his father said, " Do you go and take a nice, young girL" So he
took one, and he said, " To-night tie her with a rope, and when she speaks
to you untie it." So the young man did so, and went to sleep, and was
asleep all night. In the early morning the girl woke him up, and said,
" The rope with which you tied me is fallen off and is not tied to me, tie it
upon me." And in the morning he told his father, " Father, she said, The
rope has fallen off, and is not tied to me, tie it upon me." Then his father
said, " Keep that one, she is the right one." So she was the one he after-
wards married.

VIII. MAN AND HYAENA.

It is said that the Hyaena owned flocks and Man had none. One day
Man was looking after the Hyaena's flocks, and the Hyaena went to the
Council After this Man thought, and he said, " Let us steal the Hyaena's
flocks, while he is away at the council." So Man put the flocks in a zariba,
and night came, and when it was night, they were driven off. The Hyaena
howled, and went to the other animals, and he said, "See, I have been
looted." Then they said, " Let us attack." They came along, and arrived
at a pool of water, and the male Dikdik said, " If you do not let me come to
the pool you shall not drink." " Sir, we will drink, leave us," they said.
Then he scratched sand into it, until the water was gone, and they died of
thirst, when they found no water.

166 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES

IX. CAMEL AND HER FOLLOWERS.

It is said that a Camel possessed altogether a Snake, a Zariba, a Fire, a
Flood, and a Lion, and Deceit, and Honesty. Those seven the Camel
owned. One day Deceit said, "We might steal the Lion from that big
Camel, let us kill the Lion." The others said, " How are we to kill him ?"
Then she said, " Let the Snake bite the Lion, and when you have bitten him,
go into the Zariba." So he bit him and went into the Zariba. Then she
said, " 0 Fire, burn up both the Zariba and Snake." So the Fire burned
both Zariba and Snake. Then she said, " The Fire has killed the Snake
and the Fence, let the Flood too put out the Fire." After this Honesty said,
" The Flood does not travel on the mountain, but only in the nullah, let us
travel on the mountain with the Camel." So they travelled on the mountain,
and then Deceit said, " Let us slay the Camel." So they slew her, and cooked
the steak, and gulped down the steak, and except the steak nothing else
of the Camel did they eat. And the meat stuck in their throats, for it was
a big piece, and could not pass through their mouths. So they died.

X. THE BLIND MAN.

In a certain place many men were talking, and there were two men, one
of whom was blind and the other was not blind. The man with sight said,
" Why do you talk with a blind man ? He can see nothing." And the
blind man said, " How do you know a blind man ? " The other one said,
" We know a blind man, he is a man who sees nothing." Then the blind
man said, " He that is blind is the man who knows nothing, he is blind."

Then Swayne came and began to enlist many askaris. Then Swayne
left and came to us at Harrar. Then he said, " I want askaris." Then
Oscar Gerard said, " How many do you want ? " Then he said, " I want a
hundred horsemen." Then he said, "The hundred shall be given you."
The hundred were given. When they were given we marched and came to
Adadleh. We made eight companies. Then we drilled, and we stayed for
one month only. Then Swayne's force came to us, and we left Burao and
went to Ber.

Col. Swayne and Col. Phillips were in command. The Mullah lived at
Olesan. Then we came to Uduwein. An illalo was sent and told to look
for the Mullah. Afterwards it was said to me, the Mullah had fled. We
left Uduwein. Afterwards we went to Olesan. The Mullah was in the
Nogal. We left Olesan, and afterwards at Wadamago we sent out illalos.

TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 167

The illalos found some karias, and captured camels, female and male. We
sent the horsemen and camel corps to attack. Afterwards when the force
attacked we loaded up and followed. Then we marched for two days, and
then halted at Haridig. The Camel Corps and horsemen brought in 8000
camels. Then Swayne said, "Two companies will stay here, and the camels
will be left there." Then my company was left with the camels. Then
Swayne's force went.

Capt. MacNeill and Murray were left at the zariba. Then we saw the
Mullah's illalos. At 2 o'clock in the day his force came to us. When we
saw the enemy the Sirkal said, " Come inside the zariba," and afterwards we
attacked and then we slew each other and fought for four hours afterwards.
At 6 o'clock we chased them away. After that we sat down together inside
the zariba Then later on, at 7 o'clock at night, we attacked and fought for
two hours, and at 9 o'clock drove them away. Now at 1 o'clock they returned
and this time we fought for one hour only. Then we slew those men,
and afterwards they ran away. Then the next day at 7 o'clock they came
back, and then we fired at each other, and then during the day we shot all
the dervishes.

Until they came close the maxim shot them, when they came close the
askaris shot them with their rifles. (The maxim is a fine thing, a wild
beast or devil.)

When the people went further off and the maxim was let off at them,
then many people perished. After that they fled up to the zariba A
Mullah man killed four askaris with his spear. Then we chased them and
caught 40 men.

Capt. MacNeill sent for me and said, " Count for me all the Mullah men
that are hit." I collected 10 askaris, and we counted 460 dead. Of our two
companies they killed 9 men. Then MacNeill said, " Put the dervish dead
men together somewhere." Then we brought them to one place. Then
Swayne's force came to us, it had got nothing from the Mullah.

The whole force came together to Bohotle. And afterwards we sent out
illalos, and they found many camels at Kurmis. The illalos came back
and we saw many camels ; the whole force loaded up, and we went to
Kurmis. The Allegheri were looted of many camels. We stayed fifteen
days. The owners of the animals came to us. The people went to the
Colonel and said, " We will follow you, and the sheep will be brought back."
Then he said, "If you follow I will get you back your sheep, load up all
your karias and bring them close in." Then the Allegheri followed us. Then
they said, " We will look for the Mullah with you. Afterwards we loaded
up and came to Bohotle. The askaris who were sick were left behind at
Bohotle, and then we left Bohotle. We halted at Wudwud and afterwards
sent out illalos from Wudwud They said, " The Mullah is far off." Then
we started and marched for five nights and five days. On the next day we
met the Mullah's force. Then we fought, 15 askaris were killed, and the
Sirkal who talks Arabic. Dickinson sahib was struck with a bullet, he was
struck in the thigh. Twenty-five askaris were struck with bullets, but not

168 TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES

killed. Then we found no water and came back. We were afraid, if the
askaris have no water they will die. We spent fifteen days marching to
Berbera. When we came here the askaris were given many camels. Every
havildar was given 3, every jemadar 4, milk camels. The askaris received
a month's leave.

There was the end of this force.

The second force came to Burao, and we stayed at Burao for four months
afterwards. Then illalos were sent out and they went to the Ali Naleyah.
They said, " We have found many animals." We marched there, four com-
panies under Col. Cobbe and Col. Swayne. We went to Las Idleh, and at
Las Idleh many horses came to us. Then we sent illalos, and the illalos
said, " We have seen many animals." Then we left Las Idleh and marched
on for eleven nights. We went to Jid Ali, to the Ali Naleyah. Then each
company went its own way. We left Col. Swayne and half a company.
Then we attacked the Ali Naleyah, and during the night and day looted the
flocks. Then we brought the animals into the zariba Any men we saw
we slew. Then we left. We reached Las Idleh in fifteen nights. Then the
askaris were given sheep, each askari was given 12, a havildar or naik 20,
jemadar or colour-havildar 30. Col. Cobbe and Col. Swayne went back to
Berbera. Maj. Petrie and our four companies came back to Burao. Then
we halted for a month at Burao. Then Col. Swayne joined us. He said,
"The Force will go out; we will look for the Mullah. Let the Somali
people bring camels to help," he said. Then the Habr Awal and Habr
Yunis each brought with them 800 head of cattle, the Habr Toljala 600.
Then the force moved My company remained behind for eight days.
Then the Camel Corps and horsemen came from Berbera to Burao under
the command of Capt. Osborne. Then we followed after the force. In
five days we reached Bohotle. Then we joined Col. Swayne and the force
at Bohotle. Then illalos were sent out. The illalos were away for ten
nights. The illalos came back, and they said, "We have not seen the
Mullah." Then the Colonel said, "We will advance." We advanced into
the Nogal. Then we went to Gerowei. We looted many animals from the
Mohd. Gerad. We stayed at Gerowei twenty nights. Illalos were sent
out, they went to the Mullah at Mudug. The illalos came back to us and
said, "It is a dry place, and we shall get no water." Then we made
east and reached Halin. We looted many animals from the Naleyah
Ahmed. Then the Sirkal said, " We will go back." For twelve days we
marched and then came to Gaulo. Then the Colonel said, " Let two officers
with the spearmen and animals go back." Then the animals and spearmen
and two British officers went back. The Colonel left 3000 camels behind.
Then illalos were sent. They went to the Mullah, and then said, "The
Mullah is staying at Mudug." Then we loaded up and marched for five
nights. On the sixth day in the early morning we met the dervishes at
Brigo. Then we halted somewhere. After that the dervishes made a
move towards us. When there was a mile between us, the Colonel said,
"They will not fight with us, load up the camels and move." Then we

TRANSLATIONS OF THE STORIES 169

moved. The country was thick with trees. Then every company was
extended ; thus we moved, and all at once they sent a volley into us.
Then we lay our bellies on the ground, and we fought. Four companies
departed. They were frightened and ran away. We three companies
fought, the rest ran away. The three companies that fought were mine
and two others. We came into the zariba, then the dervishes came.
Three companies went out and drove them away.
Afterwards we came to Bohotle.

SONGS.

In the songs a distinctly poetical style is noticeable, also a
number of words, not found in colloquial Somali, many of which
are absolutely unintelligible by themselves to an unpoetical native.
Many of these words are coined by the author, but many are pro-
bably old words handed down from generation to generation. It is
necessary therefore in many passages for the author himself, or a
fellow poet (of whom there are many, both professional and amateur),
to explain the real meaning. Several of those which I collected I
have not published here, as I could get no satisfactory rendering or
explanation even from interpreters.

Those translations which I have given are necessarily free in
many places and by no means literal. They are interesting as
examples of style, rather than of grammar.

Songs are divided into three classes, known as
Gerar, Gabei, and Hes1.

The Gerar is sung on horseback, and usually relates to raiding
and fighting.

The Gabei is a chant of a more peaceful nature, and is often a
love song. It is usually sung round the fire in the evening.

The Hes is the Dancing-song, and always accompanies a dance.
It is often in parts for men and women, and is usually of an
amorous nature.

1 Paulitschke (n. Cap. 2) describes six kinds of songs, and gives numerous
examples.

SONGS 171

All three seem to have a somewhat similar rhythm, which runs
as follows :

Hal wa | I sa'ab|ghad,

wa | I sul|danka ajmanti,

siradlki Berber | ad,

lyti | wa hal|da subahh | joga,

The length of the whole line may vary considerably. An essential
point is the alliteration of one letter throughout the song, each line
of which must contain a word which contains that letter. Thus one
song may have g, another d, and so on ; in a "g" song this letter
occurs in some word in every line. The songs usually consist of solo
and chorus, often sung in parts. Besides these, there are certain
well-known chants which are sung while watering or grazing animals,
marching, loading or unloading. Many of these are very old indeed.
The watering chants vary for the different animals ; camels, horses,
and sheep have each their special chants sung to them, which again
vary in different tribes, and are adapted to the nature of the well in
order to suit the action of drawing the water.

I. Gerar, in s.

Greeting to Sultan Nur on his visit to the Habr Toljala.
? 1885.

Somali. English.

Halna1 wa iga2 salan3, First we salute thee,

Halna wa iga sa'abghad, then we shake thy hands,

Halna wa iga sual. then we ask a question.

Hal wa i sa'abghad, First is our handshake,

wa i Suldanka amanti, is praise to our Sultan,

siradki Berberad, the light of Berberah,

iyo wa halda" subahh j6ga, who is as an ostrich standing in the

morning,

1 A poetical word meaning "one thing," " item," similar to kodl in prose.

2 from me. The sing, pronoun is used for the plural.

3 salaam.

172

SONGS

balashi kala saide',
wahh la sisto la wah2.

Halna wa iga salan.
Gela, Senyo3 iyo Lan3,
sangayasha ghar&stei,
gabdaha surta la m6da4,

iyo seyahhainu ku jifna.
Sadada nabad ba leh.

Halna wa iga sual.
Suldanki bokhronado,
hor mahhau so'oten,
sedka ainu 'uneno5 ?
Rabi ya inna slyei,
sadehhdeni Ishhak6,
hadanan ku salughin,
adiga 0 Suldano,
salo yanna ka ye din7.

shaking out his wings,
beyond compare.

Again we salute thee.
The camels, Senyo and Lan,
(and) the stallions have become fat,
the young girls are like straight

sticks,
and we lie in the dew.
The tribute is one of peace.

And again we have a question.
The Sultan who reigns,
why hast thou come forth,
that we should eat the sinews ?
God granted to us,
us three (sons of) Ishhak,
if we do not make trouble with thee,
thee, 0 Sultan,

that thou shouldst not bring com-
plaint against us.

II. Gerar, in g.

The singer's tribe has been severely looted, and he demands
justice.

Somali.
Ma8 sidi gel6ga,
o guluf mel ku daremei,
yan gam'i wai haben.
Sidi arka iyo g5sha,

English.
Like the bustard,

who has seen an enemy somewhere,
I cannot sleep at night.
Like the lion and lioness,

1 The Potential tense is often used in songs for the Indicative.

2 This literally means, "nothing can be found to be given for it," i.e. no
price.

3 names for camels.

4 lit. " is thought," an idiom meaning " is like." Cf. la bida in Yibir, q.v.
8 i.e. have the poor parts of the animal to eat.

6 i.e. Habr Gerhajis, Habr Awal, Habr Toljala, the three Ishhak tribes.

7 for lnanad salo naga yeain.

8 appears to be frequently used in songs without necessarily asking a question,
especially in introducing similes.

SONGS

173

o gabnihi laga layei,
gurhan ma igu bdte.

Sidi G6dir irman,
o elmihi ka ghalen,
garti mau ulule.

Sidi ganleh shisheyei,
tollkei ma iss ugu gdftei.

Ma sidi nin gabobei,
o nagu, gunyo ka dibei,

ku geshiyeya hhumatei,
yan ugu hantameya.

Web her gerida jdga,
ma gel annu lahain,
e gudub nogu maghana,
0 haghi so gudbiya1.

Nabsi2 wa ma ghabdbei,
herna3 wa ma gtidan,
Guli wa wahh ma mogi,
g6bina4 wa warranta.

Gelan manta haino,
henya godonkbda,
iyo wag^rki wadana,
hadano gudfdin
labadiba an gdine,
mia no garaten* ?

whose young have been slain,
I would make much clamour.

Like Godir, when with milk,
whose young have been slaughtered,
I would groan for justice.

Like enemies apart,

my tribe is divided among itself.

Like an old man,

whose wives, for whom he paid

much,
have grown bad and lazy,
I am angry at it.

For the lives that were taken,
camels that were ours,
whose fine has not been paid us,
0 bring out the "diya."

Fortune has not grown old,

and law is everlasting,

God is all-knowing,

and the high-born have the news.

Let us have the camels to-day,
their genitals,
and heart,

let us cut both,

do you decide for us ?

1 The price of a man's life is 100 camels, whether it takes place in a tribal
fight, or raid, or in a private affair : this is the Arabic " diya," or Somali
" hagh."

2 Nasib. 3 Somali custom.

4 gentry, or well born, opposed to tribes of doubtful origin, Esa, Gadabursi,
Hawiya, and outcasts.

5 The general meaning of this stanza is clear, but 1. 27 I cannot translate.

174

SONGS

III. Gerar, in gh and g.
To my
Somali.
Hamar 0, ghorohhdado !
Hamar 0, garadado !
Hamar 0, guwidado !
Hamar 0, ghofalkago !
Hamar 0, gadankago !

Hamar 0, ghorohhdado !
ghaili ' dof laga k^nei,
iyo ghanfirka Hfndi,
gh labkan ku arkei,
g^suhugu dfnta2.

Hamar 0, guwidado !
gharidi Milmilad3
rati4 ghaib ugu nahhai
ghorigi Berberad
markab, ghaid u sugaya,
ghun u j6ga, miya5.

Hamar 0, garadado !
ghalimali libahh,
iyo saryen ghortu u ba'dei,
iyo wlyil ghorah, miya.

Hamar 0, ghofalkago !
suryadan kaga rabto,
ghalbigu ka garta,
gelafdidka hawen,
iyo wayel haj u gh6btei,
an iss ku gh6nsan, miya.

Hamar 0, gadankagu !

Bay Pony.

English.
0 Hamar, your beauty !
0 Hamar, your strength !
0 Hamar, your size !
0 Hamar, your obedience !
0 Hamar, your price !

0 Hamar, your beauty !

a cloth brought from over the sea,

and Indian raiment,

things which I look at,

(and) die of astonishment.

0 Hamar, your size !

}as a camel which has grown very fat
on the sand of Milmil,
\ as a ship at the pier of Berberah,
J waiting for orders,
stands fast.

0 Hamar, your strength !

as a black-maned lion,

and a bull oryx with broad neck,

and a bull rhinoceros.

0 Hamar, your obedience !

the path which I desire

your heart understands,

as a dutiful wife,

and an elder gone on a pilgrimage,

without grumbling.

0 Hamar, your price !

1 a bright tartan cloth, most worn by Dolbohantas.

2 for gesana ugn flinta, lit. I die of astonishment at the thing I look at.

3 Milmil, in S. W. Somaliland.

4 Dolbohanta for "camel."

8 This word like ma is often used in similes. Perhaps it is only " eh ? "

SONGS

175

gholidan la halelo
mama gas ka ma h6io'.
Ma gasanad Sirkalku *
ghaib u $6 ballagha ?

(from) the tribe I fight with,
never can enemy take (you) away.
Can the Sirkal !
who scatters his money so lavishly?

IV. Gerar, in d.

The singer tries to persuade two tribes to make peace.

English.

Somali.
Wa innagi dan wadagta3,
iyo iss ku dolad ahain,
jini yu idin diifsan.
War, tollo, inna4 daya!

Mel e ghailo daluntei,
ma nago urleh la d6hhai5,
o guriihi dab la rubei,
an dunyo so dakhdaghaghin,
bal dugeda hissaba6,
wahh ku daida halkasa.
War, tollo, inna daya !

Wayelka ya dad aslahha,

dalintase ka dida.
Bal da'danahai, dai,
bal ddrkan talinayo,
iyo dawodeda hissabo,
wahh ku daida halkana.
0 war, tollo, inna daya !

We are all of one salt,
and under one government,
a spirit entices you to evil.
Ye tribes, desist !

The place you raised your shout,
like women with child ripped up,
whose homes are burned with fire,
who have no property to move,
0 think how old it is,
consider somewhat there.
Ye tribes, desist !

The elders settle the affairs of a

people,
but the young men disobey.
See then, how old am I,
how fairly I will decide,
and weigh the case,
consider somewhat here too.
0 ye tribes, desist !

1 Among the Somalia, a mare, a well and a woman belong to the tribe,
and cannot be parted with without the consent of the tribe. Hence the singer
here says " No one can take you from our tribe."

2 refers to British Officer.

3 la wadago take meat together. The 3rd sing, is used, just as the 3rd
sing, of a verb is used after a pronoun with ba, e.g. idinka ba shakheineya.

4 or naga, is often used in such expressions, without necessarily referring
to " us."

6 A custom fairly common among the Somalis until recently. The Mullah
has often practised" it on his raids against the Ishhak.
6 i.e. it is so long since it occurred.

176

SONGS

Matani la dagughei1,
iyo fardi ghad ku dulbelei,
iyo debilihi la kahhayei,
gashan kun2 la dareyei,
ma dim6ne wahhas,
o tollimdno ka ddrne.
o samir bannu3 dedallei,
wahh ku daida halkasna.
0 war, tollo, naga daya !

Hadi tana la dido,
o laga d6rto 'olladda,
annana3 wa dfrirra,
'olio, ha inna dulin !

V. Gerar, in g.

Somali.
Nefka gadada weinleh
amantis garan mayo
Ma Haud4 gedaleh ba?
'Erku o galab hore
gabdankisa, miya ?
Libahh mel f6g ka guhha
gabnihisi, miya?
Gela,GedosiyoLan5
ganihisu, miya ?
Ana, Ged6 iyo Hohhad7,
gerarkeigu, miya?
Afartlsi gundod
dulka ugu gara'a,
ma sidi gabad wein,
o geyaukeda8 la slyei,

The wells are shut down,

and the horses are sore-backed,

and the camels are driven off,

milk is drawn on to shields,

we must not forget that,

and must choose to be of one tribe,

and wish for peace,

consider somewhat there too.

0 ye tribes, desist !

If this is refused,

and enmity preferred,

we too must fight,

ye armies, do not attack us !

To my Pony.

English.

My broad-chested beast,

how to praise him I know not.

Like grass-covered Haud ?
"I Like the pattering
J rain from last evening's sky ?
\ Like«the cubs of a
/lion roaring afar ?
) Like the foals of the
/camels, Gedo and Lan ?
'I Like my own song
/of Ged and Hohhad ?

His four hoofs

clatter over the ground,

like a grown girl,

who has been given her husband,

1 lit. covered with stones. Wells out of use are shut up by their owners,
by covering them with wood and stones.

2 upon. This means that there is only enough to fill the hollow of a shield.

3 refers to "we, the singer's people," and not to the others. The pronoun
innagl in line 1 includes the people addressed.

* The district S.W. of the Nogal Valley.

8 Names of camels. 6 The spring winds. (Hagar.)

7 The summer wind. (Karif.) 8 means the " betrothed."

SONGS

177

o guyo1 wein lagu dibei,
darka ti gana'leh,
iyo garbasarka haridah,
iyo gashali huwatei,
o gor ga lidka hadkeda,
ninkiyo gama'san,
gasinka u sita
o kabihi gadda lo'ada',
gara'^sa miya ?

VI. Gerar, in s.

Somali.
Faraskeigu soyan,
midabkagu ma s6 kan 'ad
Sifahagu guy^dna
ma sagal gu jir ba ?
Ma sidi nin sirkalah ?
Intan ku salahho,
sankarkaga tura,
golahan salebeya,
o saharka ka idleya,
an gedo kugu saya.
Halki senyo ku s6fto,
adigo wahh ku sema3,
o sfema iga rid mahai,
sunka ka de'b'in mayo.
Wahhba ha i la sula'an,
o salogiga ghunyar4.

and has received great flocks,

who, with most costly robe,

and silken raiment,

and dress, has clothed herself,

and at the time of mid-day shadows,

to her sleeping husband,

brings his food,

as with the shoes of cow's hide

she clatters ?

To my Pony.

English.

My fine horse,
ba? your colour, is it not white ?
Your manners and age
are they not nine years ?
Are you not like a gentleman ?
As I groom you,
I throw away the dirt,
I clean the stable,
and remove the dung,
while I put down grass for you.
Where camels graze,
with you I must attack,
and until I get my share,
I will not loosen girths.
Do not prance with me,
and neigh softly.

VII. Gerar, in h.

A Raiding Song.

English.
Have ye, over plains and plains,
over (countless) plains,

Somali.
Idinku baneyal5,
banan idinku baneyal,

1 i.e. the dowry.

2 The women's shoes are not fastened by a strap at the heel, and, being just
as heavy as the men's, make a great clatter in walking. The best shoes are of
cow's hide.

3 touch, but here the meaning is "loot."

4 This is the meaning given me by the author, but I cannot explain it.

5 An intensive form of the plural.

K. 12

178

SONGS

Illahh beididi hai'sta,
dtilan mau btilaten ?
Barbar ma iss ka gurten ?
Bad 6 ' mau ghdbsoten ?
Bustihi2 iyo shalka3 ma Bad6

huwisen ?
Rakabka birtaah sulka mau

barkisen4 ?
Yassin6 maugu bahhden ?
Butlyihi 'ollku jehhai,
iyo budulki ma h^shen ?
Isago ka balawaya,
banan maugu takten ?
Wllal, Ebba badbadshei,
dabka mau bilbfshen ?
Sibrar 'anaha bokha6,
iyo habenkana barurta,
ma barura 'unten ?

whose richness belongs to God,

gone out to war ?

Have ye assembled the young men ?

Have ye caught Bado ?

Have ye put on Bado the blanket

and trappings ?
Have ye put the toe in the stirrup

iron ?
Have ye made your prayers ?
Where the enemy cut the ground,
have ye found the tracks ?
While he is talking,
have ye taken to the plain ?
Boys, enriched by God,
have ye prepared the fire ?
A skin of curdled milk,
and fat for to-night,
have ye eaten fat ?

VIII. Gerar, in b.

Cn the Raising of the Tribal Horse, 19037.

Somali.
Gerar wa bogholal,
wa badwein iyo m6jad,
wa baburki sidisa.
Ninki an badinahain
berka wa ka ghalaha.
Bablr mai makhashen ?
Hadi gaso lo bilabo,
o Burao lagu tont6mo8,

English.
Songs are in hundreds,
like the great sea and waves,
like the ships.

The man who is not full of them,
his bowels are cut out.
Do ye hear my song ?
If companies are collected,
and hailed to Burao,

1 Name of a horse.

2 is the hairy skin placed over the saddle.

8 is the woollen trappings on headstall and breast-plate (sita').

4 With the Somalis, as with other African horsemen, the stirrup iron is
small, and only the big toe is inserted.

5 The Prophet.

8 Curdled milk and melted sheep's tail fat are the usual supplies taken by
a Somali on a raid.

7 This and the next two were made by my sais, or groom, on the occasion
of the raising of mounted native levies for the operations against the Mullah,
1902-4.

8 from " tomtom " drum.

SONGS

179

wilal berka Ishhakah,
adunk6da badna,
an ku berkadsadahain1,
ayan Sirkal Basha ka ra'i.

IX. Gerar, in b.

Leaving
Somali.
Innagu Burao jogna,
ma jawabta illalo2 ?
War, bulali3 jader, 0,
so'od beinnaga4 j6ga.
Jiryal affeyei,
iyo sun b'e'id laga jehhai5,
aya iss ku jidei bilawa.
Wa jehhad6 tegeya,
aya jld ar6ryo,
ilia7 jidaneya.
Anna 'ss ku jad8 ndkhona.

sons of Ishhak's loins,

of great wealth,

who are not weak-hearted,

I will follow the Sirkal Pasha.

Burao before Jidballi.
English.
We wait at Burao,
has the scout brought answer ?
Lo, wiry dun,

the time to march is upon us.
I have sharpened spears,
and cut a thong from an oryx,
I have tied on a dagger.
I go on a crusade,
and start in the early morning,
in order to hasten.
We are of the same mettle.

X. Gerar, in b.

The Object of Fighting is Loot9.

Somali.
In kastada bareiso,
o ghasiradi bokhosho,
la'agteidi bakshishleh,
iyo hadan bur10 na la sinin,
ama gela Badwein bada leigu
'eriyin,

English.
However many you kill,
and cut their pay,
my bakshish money,
if it is not given us in heaps,
or the camels at Badwein if they are
not looted for me,

1 I do not know the derivation or correct form of the word in this line, but
the meaning was explained as I have given it.

2 scout, spy. 3 dun-coloured pony. 4 foa innaga.
B Oryx hide is the strongest in Somaliland.

6 Being an ignorant man, he did not realise the meaning of this word, or he
would not have used it in referring to a campaign against fellow Mohammedans.

7 in la. 8 is the Hindustani word.

9 The Somalis, even our so-called friendly and protected tribes, have no
compunction in saying that they will not join our army unless we promise them
loot, in the shape of camels. It is also implied here that money is of little
consequence compared to camels — an important fact to remember in dealing
with these people.

10 mountain. Here equals " piles of money."

12—2

180 SONGS

inan forska1 u b6do, that I join the force,

wa hal an bihhihainin, is a thing of no value,

Sirkal berka u sheg. let the Sirkal remember in his heart.

XL Gabei2, in d.

Lament on the Invasion and Raids of the Mullah,
Mohammed Abdallah, 1900—1904.

Da'da3 gabeiga watan4 beriaha daba'ei digdya,
Forget the holy song I formerly laid down,

Hadba anigu o dayei ya dari tidahhai,
Now I myself too have ceased from what people sang,

An dubeyo wa ki beriaha igu dahhsonei.
And from what came to me to sing before.

An ku d'odo, Somali yan hadalka dei'nahain,
Let me speak out, and if Somalis cease not their chatter,

Dab61ki an ku rido, hedoda an daboka gud saro.
Let me put on the lid, and cover up the dish.

Digti halei dahhdiga ka ma gam'in, da'kirka an ka'ei,
All last night my heart could not sleep, in the morning I arose,

Derewfshtu wa ti ka timi degalodoiyo,
There were the Dervishes come from their homes,

Darudki5 wagi hore yei dabin oghojen,
Darud first had laid his snare,

Dabadedna wa ti lei yimi dagahhan Idoro6,
And afterwards he was come to the land of Idoro,

Dareghada7 iyo wa ti guben, dinti Ne'biga dab ku shiden,
There were the priests' schools burned, the faith of the Prophet set fire to,

1 Adopted from the English.

2 I have given as literal a translation of these " Gabeis " as I can, but in
some cases where I am not able to explain how the meaning is arrived at, I
have given the meaning derived from a colloquial paraphrase by the author.

3 1 — 5. Old songs do not suit the present days of strife,

Now keep quiet unless you wish me to stop.

4 And later 1. 7, wa ti, cf. § 289.

6 Name of the Somali tribes, including Dolbohanta, Ogaden, etc., i.e. the
tribes of the Mullah.

6 A name for Ishhak.

7 Daregho is a school where young men learn their religion, or are trained
for priesthood. The chief schools are at u. Sheikh, Hargeisa ; the u. Sheikh
one is that referred to here.

SONGS 181

Dabuna da'ei iyo dunida nafbdei,
And he carried off loot and laid waste the earth,

Dadku da'ei, ag6nti dulmiya1, derisadu layei,
He robbed the people, injured the orphan, slew the neighbours.

Dubki2 iyo shaladki, arladdi lagu doafei,
Their headcovering and chant, as they tramp over the ground,

Sidi danab ku da'ei, rerihi digoda lo rebei.
Fell like lightning and thunder, our homes were left as dung.

Ebbo, adi ya dayenah, an duri ku moghene,
0 Father, thou art everlasting, and all knowing,

Dalki adaha laba nin3 ya dasaddu tunei,
Two sides have clamoured for portions of the land,

Rabo, kala dabal eida madhar leiss la d6neya.
0 God, separate the armies which seek one another.

XII. Gabei, in m.

My future Wife.

An maleyo tan4 mage wa madahhada Guledo.
It is in my mind that she whom I would marry is the (daughter of) the
head of the Guleds.

Marrin5 'as weiyei, o ga'amo wa majeno r6bah,
She is pink, and her hands are like drops of rain,

Kub malasan ba lehdahai, marodi wa sohhei,
Her ankles are round, her skirt is pleated,

Talaboda magug o ma rldei, wa miyirisei.
Her steps are not those of a fool, she walks daintily.

Malaek sameis an farsamo, lagu ma nagin6.
She is after the fashion of an angel, a virgin full of skill,

7Weli melod jogtana maarag, ku maana moghene.
Never yet have I seen the place of your abode, nor have I any knowledge
of you.

1 Orphans are ordered to be specially protected by the Koran.

2 The white cloth they tie orer their heads as a badge.
8 The Mullah's people and the British Government.

* tian.

B pink colour, or light copper, the favourite colour among Somalia.

6 From nag woman.

7 The singer now addresses the lady.

182 SONGS

Halun1 ba mirtfdaha ghalbigu ka muradsidei,
Last night, for half the night, in my heart I dreamed of you.

Marrwein hoyoda wahhannu sin Mur2 ai rerato3,
We will give your aged mother a loading camel,

Walalkana hamar maidan ban malin ho odane4.
And to your brother one day I may present a pure bay pony.

Mos ban u jebin abaha, Mura5 iyo Hemaleh6,
I will divide a host of camels with your father.

An majalis wada ghaddnne, miday6da kali.
Let us all take our places, come to my people.

XIII. Gabei, in d.

To Dahab.

Dirahh h<5rte, Guban6 o lei dilei, dukha la hayamei.
In the spring time, Guban is dead, the people have taken the road.

Ninki dano kahhayo banan dauga so ghdbeya,
He who leads water-camels, takes the road to the plain.

Dukhan5 iyo Ogaz6 6 dalei, derig la dansh6do,
Dukhan and Ogaz have foaled, and are proud with repletion.

Wa derejo labadeni o ghollad 'ss ku darei,
Here is honour for both of us, who meet in one room,

Unsiga ad nagu dadisida. Dahab 0, no kali !
While you sprinkle scent over us. 0 Dahab, come !

Wahhad d6nto wa laga heleya, Dahab 0, no kali !
Whatever you wish will be given you, 0 Dahab, come !

Dud7 annu nahai la ma horeyo, Dahab 0, no kali !
Our tribe is second to none, 0 Dahab, come !

Akhal dorah mod leiss ku darei, galmo daba joga,
Our goods are laid together in a beautiful house, the camels wait behind,

Durba holaha naga ghobo, Dahab 0, no kali !
Now take our flocks, 0 Dahab, come !

1 Halei un. 2 Name of a camel.

3 That she may load. 4 Ho take, hold. Oflo say.

6 Names of camels.

6 The maritime plain from which the tribes wander into the more fertile
Ogo, or southern slopes of the Golis range, at this time of year.

7 Forest. Here used for tribe.

SONGS 183

Wan lei dilei, barur laga dala'ei,
A ram is slaughtered, fat is cooked,

Aulalada diran, manfa'an wada d6nonne, Dahab 0, no kali !
The ribs are ready, let us all find food, O Dahab, come !

Sar dab61anx, hes2 danoneiyo, weso darandera,
Put on the shield-cloth, hang up spear and white flask,

Tusbah d6rah, iyo watahhan3 hore u si dadsha.
Lovely rosary and prayer-mat lay in front.

Kabo dalinka leisska diga e malmo lagu dalo,
In weariness one lays aside shoes in which one toils by day,

Iyo ga'anta ka ma dein karo jedal dubandabeyo.
And the whip which the hand cannot cease from flicking.

Daf hadan, la so yidi gogolaha darah gogoshuwa,
Enter now then, the beds are ready spread,

Dalaghdalagh4 u so'odkad hubki dib u lo lafiyotei5.
? ? ? ?

XIV. Hes, in g.

Dumar 0, kunka kabaha, kulliga damanta,
Ye women, the thousand generations, all and everyone,

Sikakaaga akhal gudi u garane.
Of your ancestors within the house we may know.

Illahed goisi u garane. Raga gelisi u garane.
The partitions of a room we may know. We may know the men's camels.

Gashan ma ghadan, ma ku gaban taghanin ?
Do you carry a shield, do you know how to lower it?

Marka rag iss u srt galo, ma gangani taghanin?
When men compete, do you know how to draw a bow?

G^ranka afki u badan iyo gojoda lugtaah m6yi.
The great clamour from your lips, and the dancing of your feet, I know not

Gembi kaleh ma garatan ?
Is there any other art you understand?

1 Somalia keep their shields white and new by covering them with a white
cloth.

2 Name of a particular kind of spear.

3 Watann is the tree from which the bark is taken for tanning leather.

4 Wagging of the head. 5 Walk.

THE DIALECTS OF THE OUTCAST TRIBES,
YIBIR AND MIDGAN.

1. ACCOUNT OF THE TWO TRIBES.

These two tribes are called by Somalis Sab, or outcast, being
considered of low origin and not descended from Darud or Iskhak
(cf. Appendix III). For this reason Somalis will not mix with them
or intermarry.

The Yibirs are said to be sorcerers, and to have prophetic
powers and the power of cursing. They live by begging, but
especially by the levy of a tax on Somalis, at a marriage or the
birth of a child, according to an old tradition told in a story which
is given here in Yibir dialect.

The Midgans are by nature hunters or trappers, and live largely
by the meat of game they can kill in the jungle. They are also
employed by Somalis to work for them, in return for which they
receive occasional payment, in food or otherwise, and protection,
from their employer. This work consists in fetching wood, drawing
water, and digging and cleaning wells.

Both tribes also work in leather, tanning hides, and making
leather ornaments, saddles, shoes, etc.

They profess to be Mohammedans like pure Somalis, but the
Midgans are very lax in their religion, being unclean in the matter
of the meat they eat. Many, however, are comparatively civilised
and are strict on this point.

Neither Yibir nor Midgan have any definite tract of land, like
the numerous tribes of Somali. They are scattered as wanderers
over the whole country, the Midgans either attaching themselves
to some Somali tribe as abban, or living upon them as robbers and
thieves.

Each tribe has its own dialect, which has hitherto been kept as
a solemn secret from the rest of the world. They still insist upon

YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS 185

secrecy from Somalis, and made me promise not to divulge to their
hereditary enemies what they were quite willing to explain to the
white man.

I, therefore, rely upon any who may read this not to disclose to
any Somali what I have been allowed to write down for the benefit
of the Sirkal, but if any other officer of an enquiring disposition
wishes to pursue the subject, he should be acquainted with the
Somali language, which all the Sab know, and discuss these things
with one of them.

2. OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIALECTS.

(Quoted by kind permission of the Editor of the Journal of the
African Society1.)

Yibirs and Midgans are both very jealous of their languages,
and keep them a secret from other Somalis, although all speak the
common language of the country, namely Somali. There are,
I believe, no Somalis who know anything of either dialect, and
while I was having my interviews with these people, they were very
particular not to allow any Somali within hearing, our conversations
having to be carried on in the latter's language.

Here let me repeat that I was put on my word by both peoples
not to divulge anything to a Somali, but was allowed to write it
down for the use of British officers, their vanity being evidently
touched by the idea of a white man wanting to study their
language.

Therefore I must ask any who may read this and who may
sojourn in the country, not to repeat what I give here to any Somali,
not of Yibir or Midgan birth.

A. W. Schleicher is the only author who refers to an unknown
language {Die Somali- Sprache, p. x) :

"Unter den Somali leben mehrere Helotenvolker, von denen die
Midgan, Tomal und Yibber die bekanntesten sind. Nur die Yibber scheinen
eine eigene Sprache zu besitzen, die sie unter sich sprechen."

"Bestimmte Angaben dariiber konnte ich nicht erhalten, dem Somali
sind die Yibber ein Greuel. Nach Hussein versteht kein Somali ihre Sprache,
doch verstehen die Yibber alle das Somali."

1 Journal of the African Society, No. xni., October, 1904.

186 YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS

The construction of the languages, I find, is the same as that of
the Somali tongue, as spoken all over the country, and by all tribes ;
that is to say, they are identical in, and the same rules apply in

(1) Syntax,

(2) Conjugation of Verbs,

(3) Inflexions of Nouns and Adjectives,

(4) Methods of forming Derivative Verbs, etc.

In the matter of Vocabulary, the following parts of speech are
practically altogether different from Somali and from one another,
though a very few roots are common to all three :

(1) Nouns,

(2) Adjectives,

(3) Verbs,
and consequently, (4) Adverbs,

(5) Conjunctions,

(6) Prepositions.

On the other hand such parts of speech as,

(1) Definite Article,

(2) Demonstrative Pronoun,

(3) Possessive Pronoun,

(4) all Particles,

are common to all three, and have the same forms and constructions.

The Yibir vocabulary is fairly complete, though poorer than
Somali. The Midgan, on the other hand, is extremely deficient.
A large number of words have therefore to do duty for several
meanings each, according to the context.

Examples,

Yibir.

dalanga any animal or bird (an appropriate epithet or descrip-
tion being required for each individual kind).

agar thing, stuff, food, etc.

a "rer," family, home, flocks, belongings, baggage,

property.

awas any vegetable, tree, grass, wood.

iftin light, sun (fern.), moon (masc), star, rupee, silver,

money (as adjective = bright or white).

NOTES ON THE DIALECTS

187

ilahh fire, gun (as adjective =hot).

mid exist, be, stop, stand.

tomala anything hard, hill, stone (adjective = hard).

lawo water, rain, river, year.

Midgan.

hangaguri any wild beast (carnivore).

nas thing, place, time, town, person, self.

ghoribirro wood, and anything made of wood, tree, bow, shaft of

spear, thorn,

gosad iron, knife, any iron tool,

iftimowa sun, light, day.

gomosfmo water, rain, river,

ghan good, large, heavy, far, white, hot, full,

neghatal bad, small, light, near, black, cold, empty,

makabur stone, hill, money, rupee (as adjective = hard).

I could not find any other native words to translate the various
meanings given opposite each of the above.

Where special definition is required, some paraphrase is used.
Yibirs have no special names for animals, but use such expressions
as the following :

dalangihi khabarki ghandldsan hyaena (lit. the animal with

plenty of noise).

dalangihi walahumo ku dashlya oryx (lit. the animal having

spears).

Midgans describe the lion and leopard as, hangaguri ghan,
and hangaguri neghatal, respectively.

The following are good examples of other paraphrases required
by the languages :

my father (Mid.) alowihi i so finfinshei.

(Yib.) goriedki i jagh'idei, literally, the man who
begat me.
yesterday (Mid.) iftimowihi tegedei.

(Yib.) iftinti tegedei, literally, the light that has
gone,
to-morrow (Mid.) iftimowihi so tegedeya, literally, the light
that is coming.

188

YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS

I am hungry (Mid.) guratada wa neghatal, literally, my belly is

small (or thin),
look at (Mid.) ind6kholaha ku yef.

(Yib.) ainta ku yef, literally, turn your eyes to.
pray (Mid.) gomosfmo 'ss ku dahhdahhbi, literally,

buy yourself with water.
(N.B. Does this refer to the Mohammedan ablutions before
praying, or has it any connexion with Christian baptism ?)

evening (Mid.) iftimowihi neghatala himirki so 'idbeya,

literally, the small light, as night comes on.

Notice that these phrases are similar in each language. A
number of words too are common to both :

Examples,

teged

shan

bakhrin

head

ganad

hand

yal

foot

ruf, rof

dead

yef

turn

ku dashi

have

On perusing a grammar of Galla, I found that no special
connexion exists, as I had expected, between that language and
either of these dialects. Where any similarity occurs, it pervades
the Somali as well.

Many Somali roots are found in these dialects, with additional
syllables.

Somali.

Yibir.

Midgan.

English.

iftin

iftimowa

light

indo (plur.)

ain

indokhol

eye

makhal

makhalei

makhashimei

hear

ghori

ghoribirro

wood

afjaghin

mouth

san

saneg

nose

kol

kulhi

time

laf

lafil

lafeiti

bone

lugh (voice)

laghdan (tongue)
lagh (talk)

laghowa (throat)

NOTES ON THE DIALECTS

189

The inflexions of Yibir and Midgan are the same as those of the
Somali, and not of the Galla language, as, for instance, agreement of
Adjectives, inflexions of Verbs, plurals of Nouns, and the Definite
articles.

Derivative words are formed in the same way as in Somali ;

Examples,

so Idib

Idib
shan

go.

so shan

}

fed (Y) wish
feflo look for

ind6khol (M) I

ain (Y) J J '

makhali <Y) 1
makhashin (M) J

yifan (Y) j s

kul
kusho

shamei J
(M) give.

take

eat, or drink.

inddkholei
aimei

makhalei

}

hear.

makhashimei J

■ mi I make good,
yifnei J

so\dbi . I bring,
so snamei J

'id (Y)give.

'ido eat, or drink.

indokoleisi|shew

aimeisi J

makhaleido ) listen
makhashimeiso J to.

ghamo
yifno

be good.

The following Midgan root ragh, or raghahh, is interesting as
regards its various derivatives and constructions, which are all
purely Somali.

raghahh

raghahhi mayo

'ss ka raghahh

so raghahh

ku raghahh

faras ku raghahh
raghahhi

gosad ku raghahhi
raghahho
raghahhsan

ku raghahhsan
raghahhsanei
raghahhsano

ku raghahhsano

act, do, fix

I will not do it

sit down (set yourself)

wait

catch, hold

ride a horse

set, place, make

cut (with a knife)

take to yourself, marry

be, exist, He, live

wish, have

give

look for

like, love

In an account, given me by a Midgan, of the traditional origin
of his tribe, it was suggested that this language was invented

190

YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS

by the Midgans' ancestors in the jungle as a secret code. This may
possibly be the case, judging from the following examples :

Midgan.

hand farolahato

from Somali j

Uaho

fingers

possess

arrow degoyir

fdego

tyir

ears
small

breast fddolahato

fddo

ribs

Clarke's gazelle } diboder
(Dibatag) J

fdibo

tder

tail
long

oryx gesoder

„ geso

horns

sheep yiryiro

fyeryerplur. form
I of yer small

skin gadlahato

gad

beard

liver madobiyo

f madd
tbiyo

black
water

3. EXAMPLES OF SENTENCES AND CONVERSATION
IN YIBIR AND MIDGAN.

Midgan.

higge ka so 'idibtei ?

alowa ba so 'idbeya.

naskas i kul.

goriedki ghansana.

awinti ghansaneid.

higgan so duhur.

'ss ka sir.

higga 'ss ka raghahhsano.

gararati shar bannu dagnei.

gedgharomed ma ku raghahhsana ?

raghahhi mayo.

jalmihi gomosfmodi u 'idbi.

hajiaha g6sad ku raghahhi.

bulalki so shanshamei.

gomosfmo ma raghahhsanid.

makaburta u sharei.

ma dukhanta ?

ma sharodei ?

ghoribirro ghan i kul.

baghdankini i dagsi.

nasina i kulin.

guratada wa neghatal.

wahhan kushodo i kul.

iftim6wihi tegec'lei alowihi i so

finfinshei la rufiyei.
iftim6wihi neghatala bodowyashi

higgar u shamei.

English.

where have you come from ?

a Midgan is coming.

give me that.

the good man.

the good woman.

come here.

go away.

stay there.

we saw many horses.

are there trees there ?

I will not do it.

take the camels to water.

cut the rope.

light the fire.

there is no water.

give more money.

are you sick ?

are you well ?

give me a big stick.

teach me your language.

give me nothing.

my stomach is empty.

give me something to eat.

yesterday my father was killed.

in the evening take the burden
camels over there.

192

YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS

Midgan.

iftim6waha ban Aji sukhodin ku

dukhei.
awintaida yag61ka raghahhsanta.
moyodi higga erifogad iss dukhesa

wa shar.
wa mahai naskas bakhrinka ku

raghahhsan ?
yag51kaigi makaburta ghan ku

raghahhsana.
naskakan hangaguri shar ku

midsha, hajia bannu ku ra-

ghahhadna.
hadad hangaguri ghan i indo-

kholeisineso, makabur shar ban

ku kuleya.
himirki jalmahaiga laga la sirei.

iftirnowihi tegedeya, kulhidi mo-
yodi jalmihi higga erifogad u
shameineso, an rufino moyoda,
o jalmihi la sirno.

English.

to-day I shot a Somali with a

bow.
my wife is at home,
the people fighting over there

are many,
what is that on your head ?

my house is by the big hill.

here are many animals, we catch
them in traps.

if you shew me a lion, I will
give you much money.

in the night my camels were

looted,
to-morrow, when the people take

the camels over there, let us

kill the people, and go off

with the camels.

Yibir.

ma yafantahai ?

ma yafnan ba ? so yafnan miya ?

higge u bidbidefnesa ?

higga dugageigu wa tegedeya.

mahhad f^desa ?

wahhan ka fedeya inad kalwein

i 'ida.
humaggi mahhad 'fdatan ?
g6dibki ma 'idatan ?
dugagagu weli ma awelisatei ?
weli ma awelisan.
ddrigas mahhad ku awelein ?

English.

are you well ?

is it peace ?

where are you going ?

I myself am going there.

what do you want ?

I want you to give me a tobe.

what do you eat at night ?
do you drink milk ?
are you married yet ?
I am not married yet.
what are you going to do with
that?

EXAMPLES OF SENTENCES AND CONVERSATION

193

Yibir.

jalmo ma ku dashisa ?

ku ma dashiyo.

alkhailahagu wa inhima ?

wa ghandid.

awaski yafneisfya, dalanga wa so

bidbideineya.
anghagi ad yiftimeisei ma so

ganiden ?
g<5riedkas ain ba rufsan.
derigi lagu anghaksodo "huwad"

ba la bida.
khabar ghandid ba lagu bida.
mahha bakhrefneya ? ma la wo ?
agarma ku midesa ?
agar ku ma mideso.
kulhimad bidbideinesa ?
higge ka so tegedei ?
alkhail ku tegedeya.
mahliad u tegedi weida ?
goriedki ma mideya ?
higga darsad 'ss ka midi.
ainta igu so yef.
godib i so shimi.
jalamada so shimiya.
dalangaha bakhreineya agarma

u fedeya?
ada biggan midslya.
jalamada kabarta ku midsiya.
agartada la teged.
higgisa ha mideyo.
khabarma aweleinesa ?
wa lei rufiyei.
difadki iga bilehh.
kalweinti humaksaneid yifnan

iss ugu shimi.
agarma aimeisei ?
khabarma makhaleidanesei ?
dengas ma ku duhuresa ?
ku ma duhuro.

English.

have you any camels ?

I have none.

how many are your horses ?

they are many.

make the zariba strong, a wild

beast will come,
have you caught the Mullah

you were fighting?
that man is one-eyed,
the thing one prays on is a

"huwad."
you are good at the language,
what is that noise ? rain ?
what is in there ?
nothing is there,
when are you going ?
where have you come from ?
I am riding a horse,
why don't you go ?
is the man here ?
sit down at the back there,
look this way.
bring me some milk,
bring the camels here,
what does the animal making

that noise want ?
put the things down here,
load up the camels,
take your things away,
(leave it alone.) let it be.
what are you doing ? (abstract.)
I am killed,
cut the rope from me.
fold up the blanket well.

what did you see ?
what did you hear ?
do you understand that ?
I do not understand.

194

YIBIR AND MIDGAN DIALECTS

Yibir.
kulhida g<5riedka so tegeda, i so

lagh.
khabarkas 'ss ka ladishei.
agarteidi wa ku midesa.
saddehhi kulhiod wa ku laghei.
watahhadi darsad galabfdi so

tegeda.
watahho walba kulhfdi iftinti so

godista wa so tegedena.
ani, yahafnyahh ba la bida.
gamaghda, gamaghdis ba la bida.
hegha yu lakheya.
khabar lagu aweleya, ma ku

duhuresa ?
gorieddi yiftimeisa khabar yafan

ma ka so tegedeya ?
higga wa lagu oremei.
khabarkas urshen ba la bida.
gorieddi almanki fedatei agar ma

aimeisei ? agar ghandid bei

aimeisei.
higgi lo gurei, almanki ma la ga

bagheyei ?
aihi darsad, awas ba aimeina

yafan.
ghorimada yafan dugagina awe-

leyei, lawihi laga tegedo, deriihi

urshena ma awelin.
igu makhaleido, khabar an ku

laghi.
wa ku makhaleidaneya, khabarkas

i lagh.
higgas ugu orensanyahai.
goried yafan ba lagu bida, kha-

barkagi i lagh, bidbidsin mayo,
ha bidin.

waferka katowa ku ma dashlyo.
hilaghamaha hadeidinan agar ka

'idin, ma yafna khabarkas.

English.
when the man comes, tell me.

never mind that, leave it alone,
my things are there.
I have told you three times,
come back to-morrow evening.

we will come every day at sunrise.

it is big, small.

you are right, he is right.

he is telling a lie.

do you understand what is said

to you ?
is there good news from the

army?
he was killed there,
that is bad news,
has the force found some stock ?

they have found plenty.

was the force frightened away
from where they went to ?

at the next village we find good
grass.

your people made the good boats
to cross the sea on, the bad
ones they didn't make.

listen to me, I will tell you a
story.

I am listening, tell me that story.

it is torn there.

you are a good man, say your

say, I will not go against it.
no. it is not.
that knife is blunt,
if you do not give anything for

the wives, it is not good.

EXAMPLES OF SENTENCES AND CONVERSATION

195

Yibir.
fil iftin wa so doi'yoneya.
d^rigan asuwan bu ku dashfya.
lawihi darsad yu awelisaneya.
derigi asuwanti jagh'idei dado yu

u 'ida iyo iftimo.
altob yafan, tobanihi fftimod, iyo

lfmihi ganadod o dado yu u

'idei, kulhidan ya ka fedeya.
jalmahaiga derigo ya ka almamei.
jalanka inhfman kaga doiyoda ?
hosi u bidbidei.
Abiryaha walahumo aweleya.
kabarti horyadedi kulhidi ad

midesen, ya'unki ku la khab-

reyei iyo dugagagu den yafan

ba la bida.
dugagisu u yafan.
tomalaha aniga adayadau shantei,

lawo iyo awas yu u fedatei.
dugageigu u shameya, hadanan

rufin.
goriedki jalmihi iyo dadodi fedtei,

ma so tegedeya ?
deriihi anghaga ka daras tegedei.

goried difada ya la gu bida.
shanihi kulhiod wa anghaksona,

saddebhi kulhiod wa humaggi,

limihhi wa watahhadi.
difadki jalanki u lagu awelein

jira.
dantashi seyadki lagu shimfn jira.
deriihi yabar yifno o Anasioda

'idin jirta, Hanfili ka so godisa.
Anas ain rufsanei kulhina ma ku

so godisei ?
waferti humaksana lugu tegejiyo.

English.
I am going to buy some rice,
this one has a wife,
he will marry next year,
to the girl's father he gives sheep

and money,
he gave a good shield, 10 rupees

and 20 sheep, now he is

engaged,
that man looted my camels,
how much do I pay for a camel 1
put it down below,
the Tomals make spears,
the old man who spoke with you,

when you went to the front of

the house, and yourself are

great men.
he is the senior,
my " rer " has gone to that hill,

for water and grazing.
I am going myself, in order not

to die.
is the man coming who fetched

the camels and sheep ?
those who followed after the

Mullah,
you are a gentleman,
we pray five times, three times

at night, and twice by day.

the rope with which the camel

is tied,
the vessel one puts ghi into.
Hanfili leaves alone people who

give plenty to the Yibirs.
has a blind Yibir ever come to

you?
the knife to cut the hair with.

13—2

196

YIBIR

A CONVERSATION, IN YIBIR.

Anaski ya'imkaaha dadodisi
inhfde ruftei?

Aferi ganadod iyo limihi ganadod
ya rtifei, huwadisi inhida aha.

Khabarma u laghei ?

Kalweinaleh bu u shimlyei.

Iftimo yu ka fedtei, jalankisi
anigaaha yu la tegedei.

Inhima ku so shansaneyei ?

Ya'un fila iyo ya'un asera, limihi
kalweinod, iyo mado kushan iyo
difad asuwanta kalweinta ku
shansoto, yu ku so shansodei.

Asuwantadi inhide iftimo u 'idei ?

Aferi iftimod iyo aferi ganadod

inhidas u 'idei. Kulhidiu 'idei

bu i laghei, "higgaga midi,

hadan iftimo darsad aimeisto

wa ku so 'idahaya."
Kulhidas dugageda na laghdei,

" Gamagh."
Anaskohadi asuwantadi u inhidas

o iftimo u 'idei, asuwanteidi

inhide ad u 'idei ?
Limihi ganadod iyo limihi iftimod

ban u 'idei.
Hadad inhidas u 'idei, miad inhi

ghandidah u 'idei ?
Inhida o iftimo an ku dashiyei,

inhi kelemad hadan ku dashiyo,

ban u 'idi laha.
Iftimo mad u maghurtei ?
Maghurti aimein wai.
An iftimo u maghure, ma u

shimfnesa ?
U shimin mayo, higgeigannu

midinena.

How many of the old man's

sheep died?
Thirty have died, that number

of skins there were.
What did he say ?
He took them to Berbera.
He wants to sell them, he went

with his big camel.
How much was he carrying ?
One man's (?) rice and dates, two

tobes, and an anna, and a

sash to tie his wife's dress, he

took.
How much money did he give

your wife ?
Twenty-four rupees he gave.

When he gave it, he said she

was to stay where she was,

and if he got more money, he

would give it.
Then she said to us, "All right."

If that man gave that money to
your wife, how much did you
give mine ?

I gave her twelve rupees.

If you gave that, did you give

much?
So much I had, if I had had

more, I would have given it.

Did you borrow money ?

I could get no loan.

I may lend you some money,

will you take it?
I will not take it, we are staying

where we are.

MOHAMMED HANIF 197

MOHAMMED HANIF (Ancestor of the Yibirs).

Kulhfdi horimad anghag ba lagu bidei1. Hig bu mldsha2,
The time before a priest there was. Where he lives

goried la ma midfn jirin. Deri'ihini3 horimad, iyo deri'ihi
people with not to live used. Your people before, and the people

anghaksodei dehhdodi u mldshei, limihi ya yfftimeyei. Deri
(who) prayed (who) among them lived, both fought A man

yabar ghandldsan ya la bidei. Deri'ihini horimad ya u so

of property plenty he was. Your people before to (him)

godisei. "Awas no cidbi," yei laghen. "Khabarkeku fedesan4?"
came. " A herb to us bring," they said. " What reason for do you want(it) ? "

yu laghei. Kulhfdas yu laghei, "Deriahan anghaksoda yannu ku
he said. Then they said, " These people (who) pray we with (it)

rtifinena." Kulhfdas yu laghei, "Wa iftimo ghandidah, idinku
will kill." Then he said, " It is money plenty you

i 'idi mahai5, awaskeiga idin 'idin mayo." Kulhfdas yu

to me give without, my herb to you give (I) will not." Then they

goderdwi iftimo iyo goderdwi jalmo inhfdas awaski yei kaga
a hundred rupees and a hundred camels so much the herb they for

doiybden. Kulhf das yu awaski u sara 'idei6. Kulhfdas ya deriihi
bought. Then he the herb to (them) gave. Then the people

anghakstfneyei alman so fedten7. Kulhfdasa yei deri'ihini horimad
(who) prayed a raid went for. ' Then they your people before

yei alman u so fedten. Kulhfdas limihi godertfwi o lawod8 yei
they a raid on (them) went for. Then for two hundred years they

hig midshei, o higgiu tegedei ya aimein waiyen. Kulhidasa
a place lived, and where they went (they) find could not. Then

1 Think, la bida it is thought. This is used for "is" (Somali wa).
8 Aorist, from midso.

3 Plur. derio. Here the narrator refers to the people of the person he was
addressing (i.e. myself), whom he considers to be the same as the Gala,
derllbi anghaksodei means Moslems.

4 Somali : mahhad ku donesan ?

6 Somali: idinku 1 sin mahai unless you give me.

6 Hand over. Somali flib.

7 Look for. (wan fedta.) Somali ddno. alman fe&o, Somali dul.

8 Water, rains, i.e. year.

198 TIBIR

deri'ihi anghaks6neyei higga ku rufen. Kulhfdas yei anghagi
the people (who) prayed there died, Then they the priest

yabar yifmefyen1 anghagi bu rufei. Adlsi ya la alman. Weled
property fought the priest he died. His home was looted A boy

yahafnyahh u u jagh'idei, ya higgi ka so godisei, weledki iyo
small (whom) he begat, there from came, the boy and

aferi kelemad hig midfn jirei. Weledki Mohammed Hanif ba
four others a place live used to. The boy Mohammed Hanif

la bidei. Weledku kulhfdas yu anghag nokhdei, asuwano yu
was. The boy then he a priest became, women he

difadfn* jirei. Dugaglsu3 higga midsha o asuwano difadsha2,
used to. (while) He there lives and women ,

anghagi yifna ya u s<5 shamei, Au-Bakhardli bu nokhdei. Kulhfdas
the priest great to (him) came, Au-Bakhardli he was. Then

yu u laghei, " Khabarma higgo u mldesa, o anghag lagugu bida ? "
he said, " What there for do you live, and a priest for are ? "

Kulhfdas bu laghei, " Dugagagu ma iga anghaksantahai ? "
Then he said, " Yourself (are you) me than (more) holy ? "

Kulhidasu laghei, "Ka anghaksanahai." Kulhfdas yu u laghei,
Then he said, " Moge holy I am." Then he said,

"Khabarka ad iga anghaks&ntahai igu aimidsi." Kulhfdasu
" The reason you me than (more) holy are me to shew." Then he

laghei, "Higgas an ka4 godisaya, ka godis dugagagu." Kulhfdasu
said, " There I will penetrate, through go yourself." Then

tomalaha anigah yu hosidlsi ka godisei. Kulhfdas ka godisei,
that hill great he beneath it through went Then (he) went through,

o higgo u ku godisei, yu u laghei Au-Bakhardli, "Tomalaha 0,
and there he in went, he to him said Au-Bakhardli, " O Hill,

gan'id." Kulhfdas tomalihi 'ss ku godisei, kulhfdas yu hig u
seize." Then the hill together went, then he where he

ka so godiso aimein wai. Tomalaha dehhdlsi yu ku rufei
out may come see could not. The hill in it he died

1 This is not correctly given, but the sense is "They fought over the dead
priest's property."

2 Whether this means "marry," or "rape" is not clear, dlfad rope.
There is one story that Mohammed Hanif was expelled by Sheik Ishhak because
of his immorality.

3 Self, person, dugagalga I myself.

4 Through, across.

MOHAMMED HANIF 199

anghagi. Anghagi aihayaga higgas u ku rufei. Kulhfdas ya
the priest The priest of our tribe there he died. Then

weldihi1 u jagh'idei yu u laghei, "Augayoada ruflyei, agar

the boys he begat they said, " Our father you have killed, something

no-ga* 'id." Anghagi ba ku laghei, khabarkan kulhfdasu
to us for it give." The priest to (them) said, this word then he

u laghei, " Ma watahhadan goder<5wi jalmo idin 'ida, mase
said, u (Am I) to-day a hundred camels to you to give, or

weledki goried u jagh'ido yan ilbir idin ka sara 'ida ? Sara-
the son a Somali begets I a ewe to you for (him) am I to give ? The

doshiski mian iftin idin ka sara Ida?" Kulhfdas ya weldihi
marriage am I money to you for to give ? " Then the boys

laghen, " Weledka ilbir noga sara 'id, saradostriska iftin,
said, "The boy a ewe to us for (him) give, the marriage money,

weldahana3 ilbir. Inhfdi ka darseisa inhida khabarka

and the boys a ewe. That (which) follows (hereafter) so much for that

yannu agarta ku 'idtfnena." Khabarkas yannu agar ku
we as the price for will receive." For that reason we a price

shansonna, Anasyod&yadu. Kulhidi iftinta iyo ilbirta na lo
take, we Yibirs. When the money and the ewe to us is

'ido, awasyo yahafnyahh yannu u 'idna. Wannu u yabartfnna.
given, sticks small we to them give. We ' thus earn our living.

Awas kelemad o ghandldah wa ku duhurna. Derigi rufrufeya
Herbs other many (we) understood. The man (who) is sick

iyo derigi aim an fed6neya, iyo derigi lagheya, "an
and the man (who) is going on a raid, and the man (who) says, "let me

derigas ka ur behhensanado," inhfdas awas lo 'ido yannu
than that man be better," for that a herb to be given we

ku duhurna. Deriga, annu u 'idna, iftimo ghandidah yu,
know. That man, (to whom) we give, money plenty he,

kulhida u yifnado, no sara 'ida.
when he is successful, to us hands.

1 Plur. weldo-ni.

2 na u ka. Cf. ka siso pay for.

3 And.

YIBIR-ENGLISH and MID&AN-ENGLISH
VOCABULARY.

The following is a list of Yibir and Midgan words not used by other
Somalis.

Words, such as Pronouns, Particles, etc., are not given, being common
to all three dialects.

Nouns are recognised by the Definite Article which follows each noun,
separated by a hyphen.

Examples,

ain-ti eye bulal-ki fire

In these examples, ain equals an eye, bulal equals a fire ; " the eye,"
" the fire," would be, ainti, bulalki.

The suffixes, -ki, -gi, -hi, are masculine, -ti, -di, are feminine.

Abbreviations :

(Y) Yibir dialect.

(M) Midgan dialect

(Y), (M) common to both dialects.

v.i. intransitive verb.

v.t transitive verb.

a. adjective.

The Arabic letter ain (*) is represented by ', ghain is represented
by gh, kh. ^

fl represents the " cerebral d," which at the beginning or end of a word
sounds like d, but in the middle of a word is more like r.

This letter in Yibir is pronounced usually like dh.

a-di (pi. ao-hi) (Y), family, "rer," agar-ti (Y), thing, any concrete

possessions object ; agarma ku midesa ? what

ababo-di (M), Plateau Gazelle, is there ?

" dero " aghtul v.t. (M), strike, hit

Abir-ki (Y), Tomal (an outcast aimei v.t. (Y), see, find, understand

tribe that work in iron) aimeisi v.t. (Y), shew, teach

adeisfmo-di (M), milk ain-ti (Y), eye ; ainta ku ye/, turn

aferi-hi (Y), four your eye (i.e. look)

afjaghin-ti (M), mouth aintoli-hi (Y), lie, untruth

VOCABULARY

201

Aiyifan-ti (Y), Gala
Aji-gi (M), Somali
alb&khar-ti (Y), cow
aleliso-di (M), bird, bustard
alkhail-ki, -shi (Y), horse
alman v.t. (Y), rob, loot
alman-ki (Y), army, enemy
alowa-hi (M), man (esp. ref. to
Midgan man), not used in referring
to a Somali ; aloicihi i sofinjinshei,
my father
altob-ki (Y), shield
amedo-di (Y), goats
anaduhr-ki (M), elephant
Anas-ki (Y), Yibir
Anasnimeiso v.i., collect the " sa-

manyo "
Anasnimo-di, the " samanyo " paid

to Yibirs
anghag-gi (Y), priest, "mullah"
anghakso v.i. (Y), pray
ani-gi (Y), largeness ; ani ba la

bi&a, it is large
kniah a. (Y), great
anisan a (Y), complete, correct, new
asahan-ti (M), woman
'aser-ti (Y), (M), dates ('asero-hi)
'aserah a. (Y), red (sometimes ase-

radh is used)
'asero-hi (Y), blood
'as6wa-hi (M), blood
'assi (M), lynx
asuwan-ti (Y) wife
au-gi (Y), ancestor
Awashona-hi (Y), God
awas-ki (Y), vegetable, grass, tree,

bush, zariba, grass mat ; aicaski

aldibo, the sacred tree of the

Yibirs, used as a charm,
aweilei v.t. (Y), do, make, construct,

cause
aweiliso v.t. (Y). do for yourself,

marry
awin-ti (M), woman

babato-di (M), cloth, dress

baghdan, v.i. (M), talk, tell, say ;
nasker bad baghdamesa? what
are you saying ?
baghdan-ki (M), talk, speech, lan-
guage
bagb v. (Y), (M), be in fear
baghei v.t (Y), (M), frighten
bagho v.i. (Y), (M), be afraid ; ka

bagho, be afraid of
bakhar-ti (M), cow
bakhrei v.i. (Y), make a noise

(? inverted "khabrei")
bakhrin-ki (Y), (M), head
balkhalo-bi (M), lesser bustard
baneisin-ki (M), in front, before
behhensan a (Y), useful
bid v.t. (Y), think ; khabarma bi-
desa ? what do you think ?

The Passive, formed by "la,"
is used for the verb " be " —

lei bida, I am ; lagu bida, thou
art ; he, she is ; you, they are ;
la na bida, we are —

e.g. derigas ba la bida, that is ;

Anas ba lei bida, I am a Yibir ;

ha bidin (don't think) it is not. No

bidbidei v. (Y), go

bidbidsei v.t. (Y), make to go, send

away, throw away
bikho-di(M), "Dik-dik"
bilehk v.t. (Y), cut
bi'yuso v.t. (Y), like, be pleased
boba'un v.t. (M), gulp down
bod6wa-bi (M), camel
buf-ki (M), donkey
bulal-ki (M), fire, smoke, fire-arm
bulalyei, v.t. (M), burn, heat, forge
bulbul-ki (Y), stick
bulbul-shi (Y), whip
buskulohh-i (Y), butter

dabo-'ad (M), Haartebeest
dado-di (Y), sheep
dag v.t. (M), see, understand
dahir-ki (M), fat, ghi
dahhbi v.t. (M), buy

202

YIBIR AND MIDGAN

dalanga-hi (Y), animal
damdmei v.t. (M), dig, excavate
damomya-hi (M), inside
dangharei v.t. (Y), refuse
daras-ti (Y), behind, tail ; ka ddras

teged, follow behind
d'arowa-hi (Y), breast, udder
darsad (Y), afterwards, subsequent ;

watahhddi darsdd, to-morrow
darsei v.i. (Y), be behind, be left ;

kulhidi ka darseisa, afterwards
dashi v.t. (Y) (M), have, possess

(always used with "ku"); inhima

ku dashisa ? how many have

you?
degayir (M), arrow
degig-gi (M), donkey
deri- -gi, -di (Y), finger; one

person ; derigas, that one ; deri

ba ku mideya, there is one
derigab (Y), loins
diboder (M), Clarke's Gazelle
dibyalin-ki (M), behind, after, back,

tail (of an animal) ; dibyalin u

raghahh, stand back ; dibyalin-

keigi, behind me
dffad-ki (Y), rope, snare
dikhxarin-ki (M), hide (of game),

prayer-mat
dilin-ti (M), " Dero "
dolyo v.t. (Y), buy
dubadyo hi (Y), jugular vessels
dugag-gi (Y), person, people, self;

dugaggeigu, I myself
duhur v.i. (M), travel, go
ku duhur v.t. (Y), understand;

ku duhuri mayo, I don't under-
stand
dujo v.t. (M), leave ; 'ss ka dujo, let

be, never mind
duk v.t. (M), strike, kill
dukhan v.i. (M), be sick, be afraid ;

be empty, be broken
dukhumei v. (M), ? fear
dul-shi (Y), end of backbone
dusar-ki (M), elephant

dussi (M), leopard

erifogad-ki (M), distance, in time
or space, year, country ; higgar
erifuydd, away over there ; erifo-
gddkini, your country ; erifogddki
tegedei, last year

faled-di (M), rupee
fardaho-hi (?M), finger
farolahato-hi (M), hand, arm
fed v.t. (Y), wish, want, mean ;

mahhad fedesa ? what do you

want?
fedo v.t. (Y), look for
fedolahato-di (M), breast
fidsin-ki (Y), camel's hump
fil-shi (Y), grain ; / tomdlaah,

jowaree ; f. if tin, rice
fin, or finfin v.t. (M), give birth to,

beget
finso v.i. (M), be born

ga'alo v.t. (M), like

gabar-ti (M), water-flask

gabis-ki (M), shield

gadlahato-di (M), camel-skin, shield

galabi-di (Y), evening

gamagh-i (Y), truth. Yes. All

right
gamagho v.i. (Y), be right, correct,

true
ganad-di (Y), (M), hand

In counting, "ganad " refers to

the five fingers and means five :
limihi gdnadod, ten ; saddehhi

gdnadod, fifteen ; aferi gdnadod,

twenty
gdnaddi yafneid, right hand ;

g. yahainyahheid, left hand
gana'id v.t. (Y), catch
gararati-gi (M), horse
gedgharom^d-ki (M), tree
geryal-ki (M), Waller's Gazelle

ge8°?T* }(M),Oryx
gesolahato-di J

VOCABULARY

203

gir-ki (M), ostrich

godanahh-i (M), chest

goiierowi-gi (Y), rosary, hundred

godib-ki (Y), milk

godis v.i. (Y), come, arise, come up,

begin ; kulhiddi iftinti so godista,

at sunrise ; humaggi wa godisa,

the night is coming on
golof-ti (M), woman
gomosfmo-di (M), water, river, rain
gonya-hi (M), inside, within
gorad-ki (M), cup
gorbei v.t (Y), pray for, beg
goried-di (Y), (M) (plur. ofgoriedki),

people, men
goried-ki (Y), (M), man, person
gdsad-di (M), iron, metal, any metal

article, knife ; gosadku raghahhi,

cut (with a knife)
gosin-ki (M), "Aoul," Soemering's

Gazelle
gujin-ki (Y), meat
guratd-di(M), stomach, belly ; gura-

iddi wa neghatal, I am hungry
ghami v.t. (M), make good, im-
prove
ghamo v.i. (M), be good
ghan a. (M), large, long, good (far,

fat, hot, white)
ghandid-ki (Y), plenty
ghandldah a. (Y), many; jalmihi

ghandidkadh, the many camels,
ghandidei v.t. (Y), increase
ghansan a. (M), good
ghodahh-di (Y), tin for ghi
ghoribfrro-di (M), wood, bush, thorn,

branch of a tree, any article of

wood, bow
ghorin-ki (Y), plate, dish, ship

hajla-hi (M), rope, string, trap
haman-ti (Y), bird
Hanan-ki (M), Yibir
Handud-ki (M), Tomal
Hanflli (Y), Hanfili, the Yibirs'
ancestress, spirit

hangaguri-gi (M), animal, any wild

animal
hainyalisan a. (Y), mad
halyokho-di (Y), iron
hawar-ti (Y), backbone
hedig-gi (M), ostrich
hekho-di (Y), lie, untruth
big-gi (Y), (M), place; higgan,

here; higgcb, there; higge? higma?

where ?
bilghan-ki (Y), see 'ilaghan
himir-ki (M), night
horimad (Y), before, (time)
horyad-di ( Y), before, in front, (place)
horyalin-ki (M), before, in front
hosyad-di (Y), below, beneath
hosyalin-ki (M), beneath, below
humag-gi (Y), night
humaksan a. (Y), black; humak-

sano bakhrinka, hair
humbur-ki (M), fox
hur-ki (M), quiver (of arrows)
huwad-ki (Y), prayer-mat
huwiya-hi (M), sheep-skin

'id v.t. (Y) (M), give

'idbi v.t. (M), make to go, take,
lead ; so Hdbi, bring

Idib v.i. (M), go ; so lidib, come

'ido v.t. (Y) (M), eat, drink

idon v.i. (M), go away, run away

iftimo-hi (Y), money (plur. of
iftin)

iftim6wa-bi (M), light, sun, day ;
iftimoicaha, to-day; i. tegedei,
yesterday ; i. so tegedeya, to-
morrow ; i. neghatal, twilight ;
i. n. himirki soHdbeya, evening

iftin a. (Y), white, bright

iftin-ki (Y), moon

iftin-ti (Y), sun, light, rupee

flaghan-ti or -ki (Y), child, daugh-
ter, or son

ilahh-hi (Y), fire, fire-arm ; ilahh
awelei, light the fire

ilan-ti (Y), leg

204

YIBIR AND MIDGAN

ilbir-ki (M), limb
ilbir-ti (Y), ewe
ildighan-ti (Y), bow
ilowa-M (Y), ram
imil-ki (Y), male camel
imitirahh-i (M), wing
inddholeisi v.t. (M), point out, shew
ind6khol-shi (M), eye ; indokholaha

u yef, look
ind6kholei v.t. (M), look at
inhi-di (Y), (M), quantity: inhidas,

so much; inhima? how much?

how many ?
irso v.i. (M), remain still

jagaflaho-di (M), shoe, sandal (plur.

jagafiahoin-ki)
jagh'id v.t. (Y), give birth to, beget;

goriedki ijaghHdei, my father
jagha-bi (Y), child
jalan-ti (Y), (M), she-camel (plur.

jalmo-hi)
jankho-hi (Y), kid, young goat
jehhar-ki (M), buck-Aoul
jimikb-hi (M), caracal-cat
jindar-ki (Y), ox, bull

kabar-ti (Y), house, loading-mat,
load of a camel

kalabed-ki (Y), half

kalwein-ti (Y), cloth, clothing; k.
hutnaksan, blanket

kalweinaleh-di (Y), town, Berberah

katowa-hi (Y), mouth, edge; wa-
ferka katowa ku ma dashlyo,
that knife has no edge

kelemad a. (Y), other

kbabar v.i. (Y), talk, speak

khabar-ki (Y), speech, talk, lan-
guage, news ; khdbarkas 'ss ka
ladishei, stop that talk ; khabar-
Jcas, like that ; khabarmad fedesa?
what do you want 1

khabrei v.i. (Y), talk, speak

kub'en-ti (Y), tail, tail-fat.

kul v.t. (M), give

kul-ki (M), half

kulhi-di (Y), time ; kulhidan, now ;

kulhidas, then ; kulhima ? when ?
saddehhi kulhiod, three times ;

kulhidi horyad, before
kulun, v.i. (M), be sick
kunoli-hi (Y), heart
kushan-ki (Y), ring
kusbo, v.t. (M), eat, drink

labodin-ki (Y), (M), body, belly
ladishei (Y), leave ; 'ss ka ladishei,

cease, let be
lafeiti-di (M), bone
lafil-shi (Y), breastbone
lagh v.i. (Y), speak, tell, say
laghdam-ki (Y), tongue
lagbowa-hi (M), tongue, throat
lamdi (see limdi)
langharomid-ki (M), rice
lawo-hi (Y), water, rain, river, year ;

lawihi darsad, next year
lawodaur-ki (Y), water-bottle
(lawo-bi (M), milk)
lig-gi (M), buck-Gerenuk
limdi v.i. (Y), (M), sleep, lie down ;

(infin. limdiyi)
limi-hi (Y), two
ludub-ki (M), penis

mad6biyo-hi (M), liver
maddkushan-ki (Y), anna
madola-hi (M), tortoise
maghur v.t. (Y), lend
makabur a. (M), hard
makabur-ti (M), hill, stone, pebble,

money
makabur-ti (Y), tortoise
makbalei v.t. (Y), hear
makhaleido v.t. (Y), listen
makhali-di (Y), ear
makbasbin-ti (M), ear
makbashimei v.t (M), hear
makhashimeiso v.i. (M), listen
manabho-di (Y), food
marubo-bi (M), plate, dish

VOCABULARY

205

mid v.i. (Y), be, exist, be present,
remain, be alive ; agarma ku
midesa ? what is there ?

mid (Y), (M). go ; 'ss ka mid, go
away; so mid, come; la mid, go
with, accompany

midsan v.i. (M), sit down

midsi v.t. (Y), bring

midso v.i. (Y), remain, live; ya^unki
ku jaghHdei ma midsha? is your
father alive ?

mirdolo-hi (Y), penis

mirgin-ki (M), plant, vegetable

moyo-di (M), people

mukhtaren-ki (Y), needle, bodkin

nafel-ki (Y), hunger

nafelo v.i. (Y), be hungry

nani-gi (Y), bag, satchel carried

by Yibirs
nas-ki (M), thing, place, time, self
neghatal a. (M), small, bad, few

(thin, near, black, light)
nirokh-i (Y), loins

omas-ki (M), bird
oran-ki (M), guinea-fowl
oremi v.t. (M), kill
oren v.i. (M), die

orensan v.i. (M), be sick; (Y), be
spoilt, torn

raghahh v.i. (M), act, do, catch;
raghahhi mayo, I will not do it ;
'ss ka raghahh, sit down ; so
raghahh, come here, wait here ;
ku raghahh, catch, hold ; gararati
ku raghahh, ride a horse

raghahhi v.t. (M), set, place, make ;
gosad ku raghahhi, cut (with a
knife) ; 'ss ka raghahhi, put it
down there

raghahho v.t. (M), take for your-
self, marry

raghahhsan v.i. (M), be, exist, lie,

live, think; ku raghahftsdn, have,

want
raghahtsanei v.t. (M), give
raghahhsano v.t. (M), look for ; ku

raghahsdno, like
remi v.t. (M), hit, strike
rer-ki (M), feather
rihin-ki (M), meat
rish-ki (M), ostrich-feather
robsahan-ki (Y), (M), loins
r6f v.i. (M), die
r6f-ki (M), corpse
ruf v.i. (Y), die
rufi v.t. (Y), (M), kill
rufsail v.i. (M), be sick, be poor

saddehh-hi (Y), three

sakhsakh v.t. (Y), slay, cut the

throat
saneg-gi (Y), nose
salolad-ki, -di (M), goat
saradoshis-ki (Y), bridegroom,

wedding
sareyagh-i (M), ostrich
saryen-ki (M), bull-Oryx
sedah-hi (M), legs of ostrich
seyad-di (Y), (M), oil, ghi
shamei v.t. (Y), (M), take, lead ; so

shamei, bring
shan v.i. (Y), iW), go ; so shar,

come
shani-hi (Y), five

shanshamei v.t. (M), kindle (a fire)
shanso v.t. (Y), take for yourself,

keep, put in, cany
shar a. (M), many, plenty
sharei v.t. (M), increase
sharo v.i. (M) be well
shashin-ki (M), things, property,

belongings
shimi v.t. (M), take ; u shimi,

put in
shirfei-di (Y), small quantity
siftihh a. (Y), fat
siftihh-di (Y), fat

206

YIBIR AND MIDGAN

silsil-ki (M), hair (usu. plur. sil-

silodi)
simokh-i (Y), leg
sir v.i.'(M), go
so'oto-di (M), foot, track
sukhodin-ti (M), bow

tabantab v.i. (M), walk, pass,

wander
tagi v.t. (Y), fasten
tahab v.i. (MX move, go ; mahhad

u so tahdbtei 1 what have you

come for?
takhalamo-di (Y), song
teged v.i. (Y), (M), go ; so teged,

come ; alkhail ku teged, ride a

horse; ka teged, cross
tegeji v.t. (Y), send
tingir-ki (M), Waller's Gazelle
tiro-gi (Y), liver
tobani-hi (Y), ten
tomala a. (Y), hard
tomala-bi (Y), stone, hill

ukub-ki (M), ram
ulud-di (M), upper arm
'unimad6- (M), cheetah
'unukh-bi (Y), throat
uro-di or ur-ti (Y), stomach
'urshen a. (Y), bad
'urshen v.i. (M), smell
'urshen-ti (M), nose
'ursheni v.t. (M), smell
'ursheni-gi v.t. (M), anything that

smells, dung, etc.
uskin-ki (M), leg

wafer-ki (M), spear

„ (Y), knife, tooth

walabun-ki (Y), spear

Waran-ti (Y), Midgan

watahh6-di (Y), day ; watahhddan,
to-day ; watahhddi darsad, to-
morrow

wawa'li-gi (M), dog

weled-ki (Y), boy

yabar-ki (Y), goods, wealth, pro-
perty

yabaro v.i. (Y), make your living,
earn your living

Yadur-ki (Y), Midgan

yafan or yifan a. (Y), good, right
hand

yafnan-ti (Y), goodness, health,
Peace

yafneisi v.t. (Y), make good

yafneisiso v.t. (Y), arrange for your-
self

yafno v.i. (Y), be good

yag61-ki (M), "herio," camel-mat,
hut

yahafnyahh a. (Y), small, bad

yaban-ti (Y), two annas

yahbab-ti (M), herd of Oryx

yal-sbi (Y), (M), leg

yaliyifo-bi (Y), shoes

ya'un-ki, -ti (Y), old man, woman ;
ya'unti jaghHdei, mother

yef v.t (Y), (M), turn

yiftimei v.i. (Y), fight

yihan-ki, ti (M), man, woman

yiryiro-hi (M), sheep and goats

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY OF SOMALI,
YIBIR, AND MIDGAN.

English

Somali

Yibir

Midgan

after

dambe

darsad

dibyalin

amulet

ghordas-ki

godahhed-ki

animal

bahal-ki

dalanga-hi

hangagiiri-gi

anna

gambo-di

madokushan-ki

2 annas

antin-ti

yahan-ti

arm

ga'an-ti

ganad-di

farolahato-di

army

'oU-ki

alman-ki

moyo-di

arrow

fallad-di

wafero yahainyahh

degoyir

backbone

adahh-hi

hawar-ti

bad

hhun

hirshen

neghatal

aho

la bid (be thought)

bear (beget)

dal

jaghld

finfin

before

hor

horyad

horyalin

beg

bari

gorbei

belly

leg-gi

labodin-ki

beneath

hds

hosyad

hosyalin

bird

shimbir-ti

haman-ti .

aleliso-di

black

inado

humaksan

neghatal

blood

dig-gi

'asero-hi

'asowa-hi

bone

laf-ti

lafil-shi

lafeiti-di

bow

ghanso-di

ildighan-ti

sukhodin-ti

boy

wil-ki

weled-ki

janakh-i

bradawl

muda'-i

mukhtaren-ki

breast

lab-ti

d'arowa-hi

fedolahato-di

bring

j la kali
( so kahhai

so shimi

so shamei

so idbi

burden (of camel)

akhal-ki

kabar-ti

yagdl-ki

bush

tged-ki
Idir-ti

awas-ki

ghoribirro-di

buy

Ibso

doiyo

dahhbi

butter

bur'ad-di

buskulohh-i

208

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY

English

Somali

Yibir

Midgan

camel (female)

hal-shi

jalan-ti

„ (male)

aur-ki

( imil-ki
(jalan-ki

bodowa-hi

carry

sido

shanso

raghahho

catch

ghobo

ganaldo

ku raghahho

chest

sakar-ki

godanahh-i

child

inau

ilaghan

janakh

cloth

maro-di

kalwein-ti

babato-di

come

j imo
fkali

so teged (etc.)

si idib (etc.)

godis

corpse

miyid-di

ruf-ki

r6f-ki

country

bilad-ki

hig-gi

erifogad-ki

cow

( lo'-di
( sa'-i

albakhar-ti

bakhar-ti

cup

dasad-di

gorad-di

cut

goi

bilehh

gdsad ku raghahh

dates

timir-ti

'aser-ti

( 'assi-di
{ nahhad-ki

day

malin-ti

watahho-di

iftimowa-hi

die

bakhti

ruf

r6f

dig

ghod

damdmei

/fal
•< ghobo
I samei

aweilei

raghahh

dog

e'i-gi

•

wawa'li-gi

donkey

dabeir-ki

himar-ki

(buf-ki
\ degig-gi

drink

«ab

ido

kusho

dung

har-ki

'ursheni-gi

ear

deg-ti

makhali-di

makhashin-ti

eat

*un

ido

kusho

evening

galab-ti

galabi-di

iftimowihi negh-
atala

ewe

sabein-ti

ilbir-ti

eye

il-shi (pi.

indo) ain-ti

ind6khol-shi

far

fog

erifogad-ki

fat (n.)

haid-di

( sahol-shi
\ siftihh-di

dahir-ki

tail-fat

badi-di

kubi'in-ti

fear

bagho

dukhun

feather

bal-ki

rer-ki

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY

209

English

Somali

Yibir

Midgan

fight

dirir

yiftimei

iss duk

finger

far-ti

deri-gi

fire (and fire-arm)

dab-M

ilohh-i

bulal-ki

flask

weiso-di

lawodaur-ki

gabar-ti

food

sor-ti

manaho-di

foot

ag-ti

ilan-ti

so'oto-di

forge (v.)

tun

awelei

bulalyei

frighten

baji

baghi

dukhumei

Gala

Galo-hi

Aiyifan-ti

•

ghi

subukh-i

seyad-di

dahir-ki

girl

gabad-di

ilaghan-ti

janakh-di

give

kul

(tag
\ so'o

l teged

( teged

•< shan

shan

( bidbidei

Idib
tahab
I sir

goat (female)

ri-di

amed-di

salolad-di

„ (male)

orgi-gi

yahan-ki

salolad-ki

God

Ilahh

Awashona

good

wanaksan

yafan, yifan

ghknsan

goodness

yifnan-ti

be good

samo

yifno

ghamo

make good

(samei = make)

yifneisi

ghkmi

grass

aus-ki

awas-ki

aus-ki

great

wein

aniah

ghan

greatness

weinan-ti

ani-gi

gulp

lukho

bobahin

hair

timo-hi

humaksano-hi

silsilo-di

half

bad-ki

kalahed-ki

kul-ki

hand

ga'an-ti

ganad-di J

ganad-di

farolahato-di

hard

adag

tomklaah

makabiir

have

( hai
( laho

ku dashi

ku dashl

ku raghahhsan

head

madah-hi

bakhrin-ki

hear

makhal

makhalei

makhashimei

heart

wadna-hi

kundli-hi

hill

bilr-ti

tomala-hi

makabtir-ti

horse

faras-ki

alkhail-ki (

gararati-gi

fuf-ki

house

akhal-ki

kabkr-ti

yagdl-ki

210

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY

English

Somali

Yibir

Midgan

how many ?

imisa ?

inhima ?

hot

kulul

ilohh

hump (of camel)

kurus-ki

fidsin-ki

hunger

gajo-di

nafel-ki

be hungry

gajo

nafelo

guratadi wa negh
atal

improve

wanaji

yifneisi

ghami

increase

(badi
( kordi

ghandidei

sharei

iron

bir-ti

halyokho-di

gAsad-di

jowaree

harud-ki

fil tomalah

jugular vessels

tuman-ki

dubadyo-hi

kid

makhal-shi

jagho-di

janakh-di

kill

dil

rufi

(r6fi
\ oremi

kindle (fire)

shid

aweilei

shanshamei

knife

bilawa-hi

wafer-ki

g6sad-di

language

( af-ki
( hadal-ki

khabar-ki

afjaghin-ki

baghdan-ki

leave

ladishei

dujo

leg

lug-ti

yal-shi

( yal-shi
( uskin-ki

lend

amahho

' maghilr

lie (untruth)

bein-ti

I hekho-di
\ aintoli-di

lie down

jif

midi

hmdi

light (n.)

if-ki

iftin-ki

iftimdwa-hi

like (v.)

ja'alaho

ku bi'yuso

ku raghahhsano

limb

lahhad-ki

ilbir-ki

listen

degeiso

makhaleido

makhashimeiso

liver

b&r-ki

tiro-gi

mad6biyo-hi

loins

sarar-ki

( robsahan-ki
( nirokh-i

robsahan-ki

long

der

ghan

look

ainta ku yef

indokholei

look for

ddno

fedo

raghahhsano

loot

(da'
) la tag

alman

la sir

mad

wallan

hainyalisan

madness

wallo-di

hainyali-di

make

samei

aweilei

raghhah

man

nin-ki

goried-ki

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY

211

English

Somali

Yibir

Midgan

old man

odei-gi

ya'un-ki

yahan-ki

many

badan

ghandidah

shar

marriage

aros-ki

saradoshis-ki

marry

gurso

aweiliso

raghahho

mat (prayer-mat)

masala-hi

huwad-ki

dikhrarin-ki

meat

hilib-ki

gujin-ki

rihin-ki

Midgan

Midgan-ki

( Yadur-ki
( Waran-ti

Alowa-hi

milk

'ano-hi

godib-ki

adeisfmo-di

money

lalag-ti

iftimo-hi

makabur-ti

moon

dayah-hi

iftin-ki

iftimo\rihi himirka

mouth

af-ki

katowa-hi

afjaghin-ti

near

ag-ti

gonia-hi

new

'usub

anisan

news

war-ki

khabar-ki

baghdan-ki

night

haben-ki

humag-gi

himir-ki

maaha, maya

ha bidin

nose

san-ki

saneg-gi

'urshen-ti

other

kaleh

kelemad

dibi-gi

jindar-ki

peace

nabad

yifnan-ti

people

( dad-ki
I r5g-i

moyo-di

goried-di

person

ghof-ki

deri-gi

penis

gus-ki

mirdolo-hi

ludub-ki

place

hag-gi

hig-gi

| hig-gi
\ nas-ki

plant (n.)

beir-ti

awas-ki

mirgin-ki

plate

hedo-di

ghorin-ki

maruba-hi

plenty

in badan

ghandid-ki

shar

pluck

rif

rug

pray

tuko

anghakso

put down

dig

midsi

raghahhi

put in

rid

shanso

quantity

in-ti

inhi-di

quiver

gaboyo-di

hur-ki

rain

rdb-ki

lawo-hi

gomosimo-di

ram

wan-ki

ilowa-hi

ukub-ki

red

'as

'aserah

refuse

did

dangharei

remain

j^g

midi

raghahhsan

"rer" (family)

rer-ki

k-di (pi. ayo-hi)

yagdl-ki

212

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY

English

rice

right hand

ring

rope

rosary

run

rupee

sandal

satchel

say

see

send

sheep
shew

shield

Somali

baris-ki

midig-ti

katun-ki

hadig-gi

tusbah-hi

orod

rubiad

kab-ti

ghandi-gi

odo

arag
|dir
( kahhai

adi-gi
tus

gashan-ki

Yibir

fil iftin

yifan

kushan-ki

difad-ki

goderowi-gi

bidbid

iftin-ti

yaliyifo-hi

nani-gi

(see "speak")

aimei

shimi

tegeji

bidbidsei

dado-di

aimidsi

altob-ki

sheep skin

harag-gi

ship

markab-ki

ghorin-ki

skin

san-ti

huwad-ki

slaughter

ghal

sakhsakh

sleep

sehho

limdi

small

yer

yahainyahh

smell (v. t.)

'urso

smell (v. i.)

'ur

Somali

Somali-di

Goried-ki

song

gabei-gi

takalamo-di

speak

hadal

( khabrei
Uagh

stick

ul-shi

bulbul-shi

still (be)

jdgso

stomach

aldl-shi

uro-di

stone

dagahh-i

tomala-hi

strike

ku dufo

sun

ghorahh-di

iftin-ti

tail

dibo-di

daras-ti

take

ghad

shimi

take to yourself

ghado

shanso

then

kolkas

kulhidas

there

hagga

higga

Midgan
langharomed-ki

hajia-hi
alel-ki

faled-di
jagaflaho-di

dag
shamei

yeryero-hi

indokholeisi

dagsi

gabis-ki

gatilahato-di

huwiya-hi

gadlahato-di

alemdi

neghatal

'ursheni

hirshen

Aji-gi

baghdan

ghoribirro-di

irso

gurato-di

makabilr-ti

aghtul

duk

iftimowa-hi

dibyalin-ki

shamei

shanso

naskas

higga

naska

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY

213

English

Somali

Yibir

Midgan

thigh

b6do-di

derighab-ki

thing

wahh-i

I deri-gi (indef.)
J. agar-ti (concrete)
(khabar-ki (abstract)

nas-ki

(possessions) ghalab-ki

a-di

shashin-ki

think

mdd

bid

throat

hunguri-gi

unukh-i

lakhowa-hi

time

kol-ki (etc.)

kulhi-di

nas-ki (?)

tobacco

buri-gi

mado-di

to-day

manta

watahhadan

iftimowaha

Tomal

Tomal-ki

Abir-ki

Handud-ki

to-morrow

berri

watahhadi darsad

iftimowihi so tege
deya

tongue

arab-ti

laghdam-ki

laghowa-hi

tooth

ilig-gi

wafer-ki

town

magalo-di

kalweinaleh-di

nas-ki (?)

track

rad-ki

so'oto-di

trap

dabin-ti

hajia-hi

tree

ged-ki

awas-ki

gedgharomed-ki

truth

run-ti

ghamagh-di

ghkn

turn

rug

yef

under

hos

hosyad

hosyalin

understand

garo

ku duhur

dag

useful

fi'an

behhensan

water

biyo-hi

lawo-hi

gomosimo-di

when

kolki

kulhldi

when ?

gorma ?

kulhima ?

where

haggi

higgi

, higgi

where ?

hagge?

j higge ?
\ higma ?

j higge ?
( higma ?

white

'ad

iftin

whip

jedal-ki

bulbul-ki

ghorin-ki

wing

bal-ki

imitirahh-i

wish

ddn

fed

ku raghahhsan

woman

nag-ti

asuwan-ti

i awin-ti
| asahan-ti

habar-ti

yahin-ti

< yihan-ti
\ golof-ti

wood

ghori-gi

ghoribirro-di

word

erei-gi

deri-gi

year

gu-gi

lawo-hi

erifogad-ki

yesterday

shalei

watahhadi horyad

iftimowihi tegedei

Yibir

Yibir-ki

Anas-ki

Hanan-ki

214

COMPARATIVE VOCABULARY

Numbers.

English

Somali

Yibir

Midgan

one

mid

deri (= finger)

two

laba

limihi

three

sadehh

sadehhi

four

afar

aferi

five

shan

ganad ( = hand)

six

lehh

ganad iyo deri

ten

toban

limihi ganadod, or

tobanihi

fifteen

shanyo-toban

sadehhi ganadod

hundred

boghol

goderowi-gi ( = rosary of 100 beads)

thousand

kun

tobanihi goderowiyod

The Midgans

use the Yibir numbers up to ten.

Names or descriptions of wild animals.

Caracal

jambel

jimikh

Cheetah

harimad

'unimado

Dikdik

sagaro

d * yahainyahha
awaski ka godisa

bikho

Elephant

marodi

dusar

Fox

da'wo

d. dado 'ita

humbur

Gazelle, Clarke's

dibotag

d. darasti tegeja

diboder

„ Soemmerin

g's 'aul

d. darasti

gosinki

iftimaleh

(buck) jehhar

„ Speke's

dero

d. amedo la hega

ababo

„ Waller's

geren&k

d. la bilehhoda

tingir
geryal
(buck) lig

Guinea-fowl

digirin

oran

Haartebeest

sig

d. albakharki

dabo'ad

Hyaena

waraba

d. khabarki
ghandidsanleh

furat

Koodoo

aderyo

godir

Leopard

shabel

d. amedo Ita

dussi

Lion

libahh

d. jalmo 'ita

hangagiiri ghan

Oryx

b'e'id

d. walahumo ku

\ gesodcr

dashiya

\ gesolahato
(buck) saryen

herd of Oryx

yahhab-ki

Ostrich

gorei

| hedig

balda

( sareyagh

0. feather

bal

rish

Rhinoceros

wiyil

aiuadur

Tortoise

din

makabur

madola

Note, d (in Yibir) representa daianga animal.

INDEX.

The numbers refer to the sections.

Ablative 159, 245
Accents 3, 60, 214
Accusative, see Object
Adjective 69, 169

Inflections 75

Comparison 82, 172

Derivative 73

Adjective Nouns 15

Demonstrative, Possessive and In-
terrogative, see Suffixes
Adverb 10, 44, 129, 130, 131, 137, see

Particles
Article

Indefinite 149

Definite (Suffix) 23, 28, 31, 32, 55,
63, 75, 150, 197

Gender
Nouns 17

Linking Consonant 25, 26
Plurals 164, 165

Interjections 134
Interrogative

Adjective 23, 33, 202

Pronoun 65, 146, 202

Adverbs 131, 146

Sentences 145, 146

Linking consonant 24, 31, 32, 34, 75 ;

omission of, 27 ; with Plurals 164,

165
la 67, 118

"be" 142 (b), 143, 147
belli 201

mahhan etc. 58, 131, 194, 202
mayo 92

Concord 75, 164-168
Conjunctions 10, 133, see Particles
Consonants 7
Coordinate sentences 127 (b), 252

Dative 157
Demonstrative

Adjective 23, 198

Pronoun 63, 199

Euphony 6, 20, 25 (iii), 35, 87, 95,

97, 98, 104, 123, 186
Existence 147

Negative

Conjugation 91, 145, 230

of aho 112

Indefinite Pronouns 210

wah 195

in Subordinate clauses 258

see Particles
Nominative, see Subject
Nouns 10, 12

Abstract 15

Cases 43, 155

Gender 17, 164

Plural 34, 162

216

INDEX

Nouns

used Adjectivally 160, 170
used Adverbially 29, 152, 158

Numerals 10, 46, 163, 168, 170, 178

Object 44, 136, 156
o, Conjunctive Particle 127, 170, 254,
261

Particles 9, 124, 236
wa, ba, ya 54, 138, 171, 185

ba witb Negative 213

wa Perfect Tense 220

ma Negative 91, 145, 230

ma Interrogative 93, 145

Adverbial 236

Prepositional 125, 236, 241

Conjunctive 127, 144, 253
Partitive Case 161, 208
Passive 118

Place 157, 158, see Adverbs
Plural

Nouns 34

Pronouns 63

Adjectives 76

Gender and Concord of 164-168
Possessive Case 45

Adjective, see Suffixes
Prepositions 10, 132, see Particles
Pronouns

Personal 10, 53, 183

Demonstrative 63

Empbatic 55, 229

Indefinite 67, 204

Interrogative 65, 146, 202

Possessive 62, 198

Beflexive 61, 196

Relative 64, 259

run 201

Salutations 135

Similarity 177

Subject 44, 53, 136, 141, 156

Subordinate sentences 257

Substantives 10, 11
Suffixes 10, 22, 197

Combination of 31, 198

with numerals 47

as Pronouns 62, 63, 65, 199

-ah 73, 160

-ed 73

-la 48, 73

-leh 73, 116, 160, 203

-ma 66, 131, 202

-na 127, 210

-se 127
Superlative 176

Time 48, 130, 265

Verbs 83, 211

Adjectives 72, 108, 113

Attributive 103, 122, 171

Auxiliary 86, 214

Causative 123

Conjugations 89, 95

Continuative Tenses 5, 86, 92, 96,
221, 222,

Intensive 120

Moods and Tenses 211

Nouns 15

Negative form 91, 112, 231

Persons 88, 228

Reflexive 121

aho 111, 147

fadi 109, 148

j6g 148

jir 85, 148, 214, 224

imo 106

laho 115, 148, 203, 214

nokho 105, 148

odo 106

ogho 106

oil 100, 148

wah 117, 195, 274 (note)
Vowels 3, 6

wahhan etc. 57, 192, 264, 288

CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY JOHN CLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY FRE8S.

PJ Kirk, John William Carnegie
2532 \ grammar of the Somali

K57 language
1905

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

SMI
mmm

D HI • i.:- ■ ■ ££01

rrf Trnnr ^BBWihTllffl LraiHtM

$$y8i2» tilliHB
mSR 9HHI

mmmWmm

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "A grammar of the Somali language with examples in prose and verse and an account of the Yibir and Midgan dialects"

See other formats